Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Permit D08-243 - SEGMENT 3 - MCDONALD'S - RESTAURANT BUILDING
D08-243 McDonald's 15210 Tukwila International Boulevard Due to the file size, this record has been broken down into 4 segments for easier download. Click on the following links to review the permit segments: Segment 1 - McDonald's D08-243 Segment 2 - McDonald's D08-243 Segment 3 - McDonald's D08-243 Segment 4 - Plans - McDonald's D08-243 This record contains information which is exempt from public disclosure pursuant to the Washington State Public Records Act, Chapter 42.56 RCW as identified on the Digital Records Exemption Log shown below. D08-243 McDonald's 15210 Tukwila International Boulevard THE ABOVE MENTIONED DIGITAL RECORDS PERMIT FILE INCLUDES (DR) EXEMPTION LOG THE FOLLOWING REDACTED INFORMATION Pa • e # Code Exem ' tion Brief Ex • lanato Descri .tion Statute/Rule DR1 Personal Information — Social Security Numbers Generally — 5 U.S.C. sec. 552(a); RCW 42.56.070(1) The Privacy Act of 1974 evinces Congress' intent that social security numbers are a private concern. As such, individuals' social security numbers are redacted to protect those individuals' privacy pursuant to 5 U.S.C. sec. 552(a), and are also exempt from disclosure under section 42.56.070(1) of the Washington State Public Records Act, which exempts under the PRA records or information exempt or •rohibited from disclosure under an other statute. 5 U.S.C. sec. 552(a); RCW 42.56.070(1) 314 DR2 Personal Information — Financial Information — RCW 42.56.230(4 5) Redactions contain Credit card numbers, debit card numbers, electronic check numbers, credit expiration dates, or bank or other financial account numbers, which are exempt from disclosure pursuant to RCW 42.56.230(5), except when disclosure is expressly re.uired b or soverned b other law. RCW 42.56.230(5) • 3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless Targe pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required: 1. Lead Sheets: Bum joints of lead sheets 6.0-Ib/sq. ft., 0.0938 -inch thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-Ib/sq. ft., 0.0625 -inch thickness or thinner. 2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets. B_ Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty. C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement. D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device. E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and tum down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess. G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes. 3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic -laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following: 1. Grease interceptors. B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and wam of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid dogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 9 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping inside the building: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Special pipe fittings. 3. Encasement for underground metal piping. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 22 Section "Sump Pumps." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ABS: Acrylonitrile -butadiene -styrene plastic. B. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic. C. PE: Polyethylene plastic. D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. E. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working -pressure, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10 -foot head of water. 2. Storm Drainage, Force -Main Piping: 150 psig. B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall be capable of withstanding the effects of seismic events determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures." 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for selecting seismic restraints. 2. Controlled -Flow Storni Drainage System: Include calculations, plans, and details. C. Field quality -control inspection and test reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 1 • B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Indude marking with "NSF -drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF -sewer' for plastic sewer piping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. 2.3 HUB -AND -SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class(es). B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber. 2.4 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. B. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion -resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. 1. Standard, Shielded, Stainless -Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. a. Available Manufacturers: 1) ANACO. 2) Femco, Inc. 3) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div. 2. Heavy -Duty, Shielded, Stainless -Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. a. Available Manufacturers: 1) ANACO. 2) Clamp -All Corp. 3) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div. 3. Heavy -Duty, Shielded, Cast -Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48, two-piece, cast-iron housing; stainless- steel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. a. Available Manufacturers: 1) MG Piping Products Co. C. Rigid, Unshielded Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve -type, reducing- or transition -type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion -resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. ANACO. 2.5 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade A or B, Standard Weight or Schedule 40, galvanized. Indude ends matching joining method. B. Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.12 , galvanized, threaded, cast-iron drainage pattem. C. Pressure Fittings: FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 2 • 1. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 106, Schedule 40, galvanized, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method. 2. Malleable -Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Class 150; hexagonal -stock body with ball-and-socket, metal - to -metal, bronze seating surface; and female threaded ends. 3. Gray -Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, galvanized, standard pattern. 4. Cast -Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125. 5. Cast -Iron, Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125. D. Grooved -Joint Systems: 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Anvil International. b. Victaulic Co. of America. 2. Grooved -End, Steel -Piping Fittings: ASTM A 47, malleable -iron casting; ASTM A 106, galvanized - steel pipe; or ASTM A 536, ductile -iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe. 3. Grooved -End, Steel -Piping Couplings: AWWA C606, for steel -pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and nuts. 2.6 DUCTILE -IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Mechanical -Joint, Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical -joint bell and plain spigot end, unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Mechanical -Joint, Ductile -Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray -iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile -iron compact pattem. 2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray -iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. B. Push -on -Joint, Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push -on -joint bell and plain spigot end, unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Push -on -Joint, Ductile -Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray -iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile -iron compact pattern. 2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. C. Grooved -Joint Systems: 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Victaulic Co. of America. 2. Grooved -End, Ductile -Iron Fittings: ASTM A 47, malleable -iron castings or ASTM A 536, ductile -iron castings with dimensions matching pipe. 3. Grooved -End, Ductile -Iron -Piping Couplings: AWWA C606, for ductile -iron -pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and nuts. D. Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125, cast iron. 2.7 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast -copper or ASME B16.29, wrought -copper, solder joint fittings. B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast -copper -alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought -copper, solder -joint fittings. Fumish wrought -copper fittings if indicated. 2. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder -joint end. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP -123, copper -alloy, hexagonal -stock body with ball-and-socket, metal -to - metal seating surfaces, and solder joint or threaded ends. C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L, water tube, annealed temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast -copper -alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought -copper, solder -joint fittings. Fumish wrought -copper fittings if indicated. 2.8 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid -Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40. B. Cellular -Core ABS Pipe: ASTM F 628, Schedule 40. FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 3 • C. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent pattems. 2.9 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid -Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. B. Cellular -Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40. 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent pattems and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. C. Cellular -Core, Sewer and Drain Series, PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Series PS 100. 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent pattems and to fit Series PS 100 sewer and drain pipe. 2.10 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS A. Flexible, Non -pressure Pipe Couplings: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve -type, reducing or transition pattern. Indude shear ring, ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and corrosion -resistant - metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Femco, Inc. b. NDS, Inc. 2. Sleeve Materials: a. For Cast -Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. b. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. c. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. B. Shielded Non -pressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion -resistant outer shield and corrosion -resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Mission Rubber Co. C. Rigid, Unshielded, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve -type reducing- or transition -type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion -resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. ANACO. D. Pressure Pipe Couplings: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve -type same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to, and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. JCM Industries, Inc. c. Romac Industries, Inc. d. Viking Johnson. 2. Center -Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber. 4. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion -resistant coating or material. E. Flexible Ball Joints: Ductile -iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include gasketed ball joint section and ductile -iron gland, rubber gasket, and steel bolts. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. F. Expansion Joints: Two or three-piece, ductile -iron assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve(s) with gaskets and restrained -type, ductile -iron, bell -and -spigot end sections complying with AVVWA C110 or AVVWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile -iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 4 • b. Romac Industries, Inc. c. Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div. G. Wall -Penetration Fittings: Compound, ductile -iron coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing sections for up to 20 -degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile -iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. SIGMA Corp. 2.11 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING A. Description: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, high-density, crosslaminated PE film of 0.004 -inch or LLDPE film of 0.008 -inch minimum thickness. B. Form: Sheet or tube. C. Color: Black or natural. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints. 4. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. 5. Solid -wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 6. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 7. Dissimilar Pipe -Material Couplings: Rigid, unshielded, non -pressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD. C. Aboveground, storm drainage piping NPS 8 and larger shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints. 4. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 5. Dissimilar Pipe -Material Couplings: Flexible, Shielded, non -pressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD. D. Underground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints. 4. Solid -wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 5. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 6. Dissimilar Pipe -Material Couplings: Rigid, unshielded, non -pressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD. E. Underground, storm drainage piping NPS 8 and larger shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty shielded, cast-iron couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 4. Cellular -core, Sewer and Drain Series, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent -cemented joints. FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 5 • 5. Dissimilar Pipe -Material Couplings: Flexible, Shielded, non -pressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Storm sewer and drainage piping outside the building are specified in Division 33 Section "Storm Utility Drainage Piping." B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Seismic -restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" D. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm sewers. Cleanouts are specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." E. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force -main piping. F. Install underground, ductile -iron, special pipe fittings according to AWWA C600. 1. Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AVWVA C105. G. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." H. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long -sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. J. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. K. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller, 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Horizontal Storm -Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. L. Install engineered controlled -flow storm drainage piping in locations indicated. M. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs -on -grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing. N. Install ABS storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2661. O. Install PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2665. P. Install underground ABS and PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321. Q. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 6 • B. Hub -and -Spigot, Cast -Iron Soil Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. C. Hub -and -Spigot, Cast -Iron Soil Piping Calked Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints. D. Hubless Cast -Iron Soil Piping Coupled Joints: Join according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints. E. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead -free -alloy solder, and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. F. Grooved Joints: Cut groove ends of pipe and assemble grooved ends of pipes, grooved -end fittings, and grooved -end -piping couplings according to AWWA C606. G. PVC Non -pressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665. 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each sump pump discharge. 1. Install gate or full -port ball valve for piping NPS 2 and smaller. 2. Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sump pump discharge. D. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow. 1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. 2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 3. Backwater valve are specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Seismic -restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section 'Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, damps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer than 100 feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer than 100 feet, if indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer. MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double -rod hangers, with 3/8 -inch minimum rods. F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8 -inch rod. 4. NPS 6: 60 inches with 3/4 -inch rod. 5. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 60 inches with 7/8 -inch rod. FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 7 • • 6. Spacing for 10 -foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches. G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet. H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/4: 84 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8 -inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2 -inch rod. 5. NPS 3: 12 feet with 1/2 -inch rod. 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8 -inch rod. 7. NPS 6: 12 feet with 3/4 -inch rod. 8. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 12 feet with 7/8 -inch rod. I. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet. J. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 4. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2 -inch rod. 5. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8 -inch rod. 6. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4 -inch rod. K. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. L. Install hangers for ABS and PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8 -inch rod. 4. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4 -inch rod. 5. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 48 inches with 7/8 -inch rod. M. Install supports for vertical ABS and PVC piping every 48 inches. N. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or dosing -in after roughing -in. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 8 • • • D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for Teaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping on completion of roughing -in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10 -foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. END OF SECTION 221413 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 9 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 221423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping specialties: 1. Backwater valves. 2. Cleanouts. 3. Trench drains. 4. Channel drainage systems. 5. Catch basins. 6. Through -penetration firestop assemblies. 7. Roof drains. 8. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties. 9. Flashing materials. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties" for backwater valves, floor drains, trench drains and channel drainage systems connected to sanitary sewer, air admittance valves, FOG disposal systems, grease interceptors and removal devices, oil interceptors, and solid interceptors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ABS: Acrylonitrile -butadiene -styrene plastic. B. FOG: Fats, oils, and greases. C. FRP: Fiberglass -reinforced plastic. D. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic. E. PE: Polyethylene plastic. F. PP: Polypropylene plastic. G. PUR: Polyurethane plastic. H. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations. STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423 - 1 • PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 BACKWATER VALVES A. Horizontal, Cast -Iron Backwater Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. b. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. c. Watts Drainage Products Inc. d. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.14.1. 3. Size: Same as connected piping. 4. Body: Cast iron. 5. Cover. Cast iron with bolted or threaded access check valve. 6. End Connections: Hub and spigot or hubless. 7. Type Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field modified to hang open for airflow unless subject to backflow condition. 8. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full-size, cast-iron, soil -pipe extension to field -installed cleanout at floor, replaces backwater valve cover. B. Drain -Outlet Backwater Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. b. Watts Drainage Products Inc. c. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet. 3. Body: Cast iron or bronze made for vertical installation in bottom outlet of floor drain. 4. Check Valve: Removable ball float. 5. Inlet: Threaded. 6. Outlet: Threaded or spigot. C. Horizontal, Plastic Backwater Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. IPS Corporation. b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. c. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. 2. Size: Same as connected piping. 3. Body: PVC. 4. Cover. Same material as body with threaded access to check valve. 5. Check Valve: Removable swing check. 6. End Connections: Socket type. 2.2 CLEANOUTS A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. b. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. c. Watts Drainage Products Inc. d. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 4. Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: Raised -head, cast-iron plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 7. Closure: Stainless-steel plug with seal. B. Metal Floor Cleanouts: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423 - 2 b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. c. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. d. Watts Drainage Products Inc. e. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. f. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout. 3. Size: Same as connected branch. 4. Type: Adjustable housing. 5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron. 6. Clamping Device: Required. 7. Outlet Connection: Threaded_ 8. Closure: Cast-iron plug. 9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads. 10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel -bronze, copper alloy. 11. Frame and Cover Shape: Square. 12. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty. 13. Riser. ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to deanout. C. Cast -Iron Wall Cleanouts: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. b. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. c. Watts Drainage Products Inc. d. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 4. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. 5. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 6. Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 7. Closure: Countersunk, drilled -and -threaded plug. 8. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 9. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome -plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw. 10. Wall Access: Round, nickel -bronze, copper -alloy, or stainless-steel wall -installation frame and cover. D. Plastic Floor Cleanouts: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. b. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. 2. Size: Same as connected branch. 3. Body: PVC. 4. Closure Plug: PVC. 5. Riser. Drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as drainage piping. 2.3 THROUGH -PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES A. Through -Penetration Firestop Assemblies: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ProSet Systems Inc. 3. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug. 4. Size: Same as connected pipe. 5. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing flange on one end for installation in cast -in-place concrete slabs. 6. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48, gray -iron, hubless-pattem, wye branch with neoprene 0 -ring at base and gray -iron plug in thermal -release hamess. Include PVC protective cap for plug. 7. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings. 2.4 ROOF DRAINS A. Metal Roof Drains <Insert drawing designation if any>: STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423 - 3 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. b. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. c. Watts Drainage Products Inc. d. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. e. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.21.2M. 3. Pattem: Roof drain. 4. Body Material: Cast iron. 5. 6. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required. 7. Flow -Control Weirs: Not required. 8. Outlet: Bottom. 9. Dome Material: Cast iron. 10. Extension Collars: Required. 11. Underdeck Clamp: Required. 12. Sump Receiver. Not required. B. Plastic Roof Drains 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. b. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.21.2M. 3. Pattern: Roof drain. 4. Body Material: ABS or PVC. 5. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required. 6. Outlet: Bottom. 7. Dome Material: ABS or PVC. 8. Underdedk Clamp: Required. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Expansion 1. Standard: ASME A112.21.2M. 2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland. 3. End Connections: Matching connected piping. 4. Size: Same as connected piping. 2.6 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152, 12 oz./sq. ft. thickness. B. Zinc -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04 -inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated. C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40 -mil minimum thickness. D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened. E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed. F. Solder. ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy. G. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent -type, bituminous mastic. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements. STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423 - 4 B. Install deanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. D. For deanouts located in concealed piping, install deanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. E. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written installation instructions. Roofing materials are specified in Division 07. 1. Install roof -drain flashing collar or flange so that there will be no leakage between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance. F. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane. G. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy access and maintenance. H. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattem escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless Targe pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required: 1. Lead Sheets: Bum joints of lead sheets 6.0-Ib/sq. ft., 0.0938 -inch thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-Ib/sq. ft., 0.0625 -inch thickness or thinner. 2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets. B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty. C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement. D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device. E. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid dogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 221423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423 - 5 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 223300 - ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following electric water heaters: 1. Flow -control, instantaneous electric water heaters. 2. Thermostat -control, instantaneous electric water heaters. 3. Commercial, storage electric water heaters. 4. Compression tanks. 5. Water heater accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, fumished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial and instantaneous electric water heater, signed by product manufacturer. D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that commercial water heaters, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. E. Source quality -control test reports. F. Field quality -control test reports. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of electric water heaters through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of electric water heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements." ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223300 - 1 C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004. E. ASME Compliance: Where indicated, fabricate and label commercial water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. F. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9," for all components that will be in contact with potable water. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural Drawings. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of electric water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports. b. Faulty operation of controls. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion: a. Instantaneous Electric Water Heaters: Five year(s). b. Commercial Electric Water Heaters: 1) Storage Tank: Five years. 2) Controls and Other Components: Three years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 INSTANTANEOUS ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A. Flow -Control, Instantaneous Electric Water Heaters: Comply with UL 499 for tankless electric (water heater) heating appliance. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Hot Aqua, Inc. b. IMI Waterheating, Ltd. c. Stiebel Eltron, Inc. 2. Construction: Copper piping or tubing complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable water, without storage capacity. a. Connections: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. c. Heating Element: Resistance heating system. d. Temperature Control: Flow -control fitting. e. Safety Control: High -temperature -limit cutoff device or system. f. Jacket: Aluminum or steel with enameled finish or plastic. 3. Support: Bracket for wall mounting. 4. Capacity and Characteristics: a. See Drawings. B. Thermostat -Control, Instantaneous Electric Water Heaters: Comply with UL 499 for tankless electric (water heater) heating appliance. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. IMI Waterheating, Ltd. b. Niagara Industries, Inc. ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223300 - 2 2. Construction: Copper piping or tubing complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable water, without storage capacity. a. Connections: ASME 81.20.1 pipe thread. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. c. Heating Element: Resistance heating system. d. Temperature Control: Thermostat. e. Safety Control: High -temperature -limit cutoff device or system. f. Jacket: Aluminum or steel with enameled finish or plastic. 3. Support: Bracket for wall mounting. 4. Capacity and Characteristics: a. See Drawings. 2.3 COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A. Commercial, Storage Electric Water Heaters: Comply with UL 1453 requirements for storage -tank -type water heaters. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Bradford White Corporation. b. Lochinvar Corporation. c. Rheem Water Heater Div.; Rheem Manufacturing Company. d. Ruud Water Heater Div.; Rheem Manufacturing Company. e. Smith, A. O. Water Products Company. f. State Industries, Inc. 2. Storage -Tank Construction: Non-ASME-code, steel vertical arrangement. a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank and piping connections. Attach tappings to tank before testing. 1) NPS 2 and Smaller. Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. 2) NPS 2-1/2 and Larger. Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel and stainless-steel flanges, and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper -alloy flanges. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable -water tank linings, including extending lining material into tappings. 3. Factory -Installed Storage -Tank Appurtenances: a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium. b. Drain Valve: Corrosion -resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005. c. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. d. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish. e. Heating Elements: Electric, screw-in or bolt -on immersion type arranged in multiples of three. 1) Staging: Input not exceeding 18 kW per step. f. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat. g. Safety Controls: High -temperature -limit and low-water cutoff devices or systems. h. Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3, for combination temperature and pressure relief valves. Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working -pressure rating. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank. 4. Special Requirements: NSF 5 construction. 5. Building Automation System Interface: Normally closed dry contacts for enabling and disabling water heater. 6. Capacity and Characteristics: a. See Drawings. 2.4 EXPANSION TANKS A. Description: Steel pressure -rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory -installed butyl -rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system -operating pressure at tank. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. AMTROL Inc. b. Smith, A. 0.; Aqua -Air Div. c. State Industries, Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co. 2. Construction: a. Tappings: Factory -fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. Include ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread. ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223300 - 3 b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable -water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets. c. Air -Charging Valve: Factory installed. 3. Capacity and Characteristics: a. Per water heater manufacturers recommendations. 2.5 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working -pressure rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage tank. B. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include pressure setting less than water heater working -pressure rating. C. Water Heater Stand and Drain -Pan Units: High -density -polyethylene -plastic, 18 -inch high, enclosed -base stand complying with IAPMO PS 103 and IAS No. 2. Include integral or separate drain pan with raised edge and NPS 1 drain outlet with ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. D. Water Heater Stands: Water heater manufacturer's factory -fabricated steel stand for floor mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water. Include dimension that will support bottom of water heater a minimum of 18 inches above the floor. E. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory -fabricated steel bracket for wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water. F. Drain Pans: Corrosion -resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than base of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4. G. Piping Manifold Kits: Water heater manufacturer's factory -fabricated inlet and outlet piping arrangement for multiple -unit installation. Include piping and valves for field assembly that are capable of isolating each water heater and of providing balanced flow through each water heater. H. Piping -Type Heat Traps: Field -fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004. I. Water Regulators: ASSE 1003, water -pressure reducing valve. Set at 25-psig maximum outlet pressure, unless otherwise indicated. J. Shock Absorbers: ASSE 1010 or PDI WH 201, Size A water hammer arrester. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect water heater storage tanks, specified to be ASME-code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. B. Hydrostatically test commercial water heater storage tanks before shipment to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating. C. Prepare test reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases. 1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand, bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated. 2. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223300 - 4 B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible. C. Install seismic restraints for commercial water heaters. Anchor to substrate. D. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial -water -heater relief -valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain. E. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in water piping for water heaters without storage. Extend commercial -water -heater relief -valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain. F. Install water -heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose -end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for hose -end drain valves. G. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers. H. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping of household, collector -to -tank, solar -electric water heaters. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers. I. Install pressure gage(s) on outlet of commercial electric water- heater piping. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages. J. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters. Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each water heater. Include shutoff valve, thermometer in each water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each water heater outlet. Refer to Division 22 Section "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general -duty valves and to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers. K. Install water regulator, with integral bypass relief valve, in booster -heater inlet piping and water hammer arrester in booster -heater outlet piping. L. Install piping -type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without integral or fitting -type heat traps. M. Fill water heaters with water. N. Charge compression tanks with air. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for easy removal of water heaters. C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Leak Test: After installation, test for Teaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223300 - 5 B. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial and instantaneous electric water heaters. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 223300 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223300 - 6 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 223400 - FUEL -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 12 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following fuel -fired water heaters: 1. Instantaneous, tankless, gas water heaters. 2. Commercial, high -efficiency, gas water heaters. 3. Compression tanks. 4. Water heater accessories. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. LP Gas: Liquefied -petroleum fuel gas. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, fumished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial and instantaneous water heater, signed by product manufacturer. D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that commercial water heaters, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 22 Section 'Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term 'withstand" means 'the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. E. Source quality -control test reports. F. Field quality -control test reports. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements." FUEL -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223400 -1 C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004. E. ASME Compliance: 1. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. F. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9" for all components that will be in contact with potable water. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural Drawings. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fuel -fired water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures indude, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports. b. Faulty operation of controls. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion: a. Instantaneous, Gas Water Heaters: 1) Heat Exchanger. Five years. 2) Controls and Other Components: Three years. b. Commercial, Gas Water Heaters: 1) Storage Tank: Five years. 2) Controls and Other Components: Three years. c. Compression Tanks: One year(s). PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 INSTANTANEOUS, GAS WATER HEATERS A. Description: Comply with ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3, except storage is not required. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Rinnai b. NORITZ America Corporation. 2. Construction: Copper piping or tubing complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable water, without storage capacity. a. Tappings: ASME 81.20.1 pipe thread. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. c. Heat Exchanger. Copper tubing. d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004. e. Burner. For use with tankless water heaters and for natural-gas fuel. f. Automatic Ignition: Manufacturer's proprietary system for automatic, gas ignition. g. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat. h. Jacket: Metal with enameled finish or plastic. 3. Support: Bracket for wall mounting. 4. Capacity and Characteristics: See Drawings. FUEL -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223400 - 2 • r 2.3 COMMERCIAL, GAS WATER HEATERS A. Commercial, High -Efficiency, Gas Water Heaters: Comply with ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Bradford White Corporation. b. Lochinvar Corporation. c. Rheem Water Heater Div.; Rheem Manufacturing Company. d. Ruud Water Heater Div.; Rheem Manufacturing Company. e. Smith, A. O. Water Products Company. f. State Industries, Inc. 2. Description: Manufacturer's proprietary design to provide at least 90 percent combustion efficiency at optimum operating conditions. Following features and attributes may be modified or omitted if water heater otherwise complies with requirements for performance. 3. Storage -Tank Construction: ASME-code steel with 150-psig minimum working -pressure rating. a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach tappings to tank before testing. 1) NPS 2 and Smaller. Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. 2) NPS 2-1/2 and Larger. Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel and stainless-steel flanges, and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper -alloy flanges. b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable -water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets. c. Lining: Glass complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable -water tank linings, including extending lining into and through tank fittings and outlets. 4. Factory -Installed, Storage -Tank Appurtenances: a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium. b. Dip Tube: Provide unless cold -water inlet is near bottom of tank. c. Drain Valve: Corrosion -resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005. d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Surround entire storage tank except connections and controls. e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish. f. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4. Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working -pressure rating. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank. 5. Bumer or Heat Exchanger. Comply with UL 795 or approved testing agency requirements for high - efficiency water heaters and for natural-gas fuel. 6. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat. 7. Safety Controls: Automatic, high -temperature -limit and low-water cutoff devices or systems. 8. Building Automation System Interface: Normally closed dry contacts for enabling and disabling water heater. 9. Draft Hood: Draft diverter, complying with ANSI Z21.12. 10. Capacity and Characteristics: See Drawings. 2.4 COMPRESSION TANKS A. Description: Steel, pressure -rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory -installed, butyl -rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system -operating pressure at tank. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. AMTROL Inc. b. Smith, A. 0.; Aqua -Air Div. c. State Industries, Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co. 2. Construction: a. Tappings: Factory -fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. Include ASME 61.20.1 pipe thread. b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable -water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets. c. Air -Charging Valve: Factory installed. 3. Capacity and Characteristics: Per water heater manufacturer's recommendations. 2.5 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES A. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15/CGA 9.1, manually operated. Fumish for installation in piping. FUEL -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223400 - 3 B. Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18, appliance type. Include pressure rating, capacity, and pressure differential required between gas supply and water heater. C. Gas Automatic Valves: ANSI Z21.21, appliance, electrically operated, on-off automatic valve. D. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working -pressure rating. Select each relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank. 1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4. 2. Oil -Fired Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3. E. Pressure Relief Valves: Include pressure setting less than working -pressure rating of water heater. 1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4. 2. Oil -Fired Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3. F. Water Heater Stand and Drain Pan Units: High -density -polyethylene -plastic, 18 -inch- high, enclosed -base stand complying with IAPMO PS 103 and IAS No. 2. Include integral or separate drain pan with raised edge and NPS 1 drain outlet with ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. G. Water Heater Stands: Water heater manufacturer's factory -fabricated steel stand for floor mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water. Provide dimension that will support bottom of water heater a minimum of 18 inches above the floor. H. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory -fabricated steel bracket for wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water. I. Drain Pans: Con-osion-resistant metal with raised edge. Provide dimensions not less than base of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4. J. Piping Manifold Kits: Water heater manufacturers factory -fabricated inlet and outlet piping arrangement for multiple -unit installation. Include piping and valves for field assembly that is capable of isolating each water heater and of providing balanced flow through each water heater. K. Piping -Type Heat Traps: Field -fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect water heater storage tanks, specified to be ASME-code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. B. Hydrostatically test commercial water heater storage tanks before shipment to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating. C. Prepare test reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases. 1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand, bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated. 2. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible. C. Install seismic restraints for commercial water heaters. Anchor to substrate. D. Install gas water heaters according to NFPA 54. FUEL -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223400 - 4 E. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters without shutoff valves. F. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas water heaters without gas pressure regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at bumer. G. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters, if required for operation of safety control. H. Install oil -fired water heaters according to NFPA 31. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial -water -heater, relief -valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain. J. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in water piping for water heaters without storage. Extend commercial -water -heater relief -valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain. K. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose -end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for hose -end drain valves. L. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers. M. Install pressure gage(s) on outlet piping of commercial, fuel -fired water heater piping. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages. N. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters. Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each water heater. Include shutoff valve and thermometer in each water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each water heater outlet. Refer to Division 22 Section "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general -duty valves and to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers. O. Install piping -type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without integral or fitting -type heat traps. P. Fill water heaters with water. Q. Charge compression tanks with air. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for easy removal of water heaters. C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above. FUEL -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223400 - 5 • • 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain instantaneous and commercial water heaters. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 223400 FUEL -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223400 - 6 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components: 1. Faucets for lavatories and sinks. 2. Laminar -flow faucet -spout outlets. 3. Flushometers. 4. Toilet seats. 5. Protective shielding guards. 6. Fixture supports. 7. Water closets. 8. Urinals. 9. Lavatories. 10. Commercial sinks. 11. Wash fountains. 12. Kitchen sinks. 13. Service sinks. 14. Service basins. 15. Owner-fumished fixtures. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 10 Section "Toilet Accessories." 2. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers, floor drains, and specialty fixtures not included in this Section. 3. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Filtration Equipment" for water filters. 4. Division 22 Section "Emergency Plumbing Fixtures." 5. Division 31 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for exterior plumbing fixtures and hydrants. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ABS: Acrylonitrile -butadiene -styrene plastic. B. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities. C. Cast Polymer. Cast -filled -polymer -plastic material. This material includes cultured -marble and solid -surface materials. D. Cultured Marble: Cast -filled -polymer -plastic material with surface coating. E. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general -duty valves are included where indicated. F. FRP: Fiberglass -reinforced plastic. G. PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic. H. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. I. Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast -polymer -plastic material with heat-, impact-, scratch-, and stain -resistance qualities. PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 1 • • 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow -control rates. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities" ; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures. E. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components -Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water. F. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible. G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures: 1. Enameled, Cast -Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1 M. 2. Plastic Mop -Service Basins: ANSI Z124.6. 3. Plastic Sinks: ANSI Z124.6. 4. Plastic Urinal Fixtures: ANSI Z124.9. 5. Porcelain -Enameled, Formed -Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M. 6. Solid -Surface -Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS -1. 7. Stainless -Steel Commercial, Handwash Sinks: NSF 2 construction. 8. Stainless -Steel Residential Sinks: ASME A112.19.3. 9. Vitreous -China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M. 10. Water -Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5. 11. Water -Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037. H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory and sink faucets: 1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M. 2. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose -Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M. 3. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025. 4. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. 5. Hose -Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011. 6. Hose -Coupling Threads: ASME 81.20.7. 7. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 8. NSF Potable -Water Materials: NSF 61. 9. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 10. Sensor -Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951. 11. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1. 12. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2. I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings: PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 2 • 1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1. 3. Dishwasher Air -Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021. 4. Manual -Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037. 5. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409. 6. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2. 7. Sensor -Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951. J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components: 1. Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430. 2. Dishwasher Air -Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021. 3. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6. 4. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3. 5. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446. 6. Hose -Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 7. Hot -Water Dispensers: ASSE 1023 and UL 499. 8. Off -Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1 M. 9. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 10. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 11. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of whirlpools that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures of unit shell. b. Faulty operation of controls, blowers, pumps, heaters, and timers. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period for Commercial Applications: One year from date of Certificate of Occupancy. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LAVATORY FAUCETS A. Lavatory Faucets: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Chicago Faucets. b. Eljer. c. Elkay Manufacturing Co. d. Sloan Valve Company. e. TOTO USA, Inc. 2. Description: Single -control mixing valve. Include hot- and cold -water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor. a. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. b. Finish: Polished chrome plate. c. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.2 gpm. d. Maximum Flow: 1.0 gallon. e. Centers: 4 inches. f. Mounting: Deck, concealed. g. Valve Handle(s): Not applicable. h. Inlet(s): NPS 1/2. i. Spout: Rigid type. j. Spout Outlet: Laminar flow. k. Operation: Manual - standard. Sensor - optional. I. Drain: Grid. m. Tempering Device: Thermostatic. 2.2 SINK FAUCETS A. Sink Faucets: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 3 • a. Chicago Faucets. b. Eljer. c. Elkay Manufacturing Co. d. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. e. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation. 2. Description: Service sink faucet with stops in shanks, vacuum breaker, hose -thread outlet, and pail hook. Include hot- and cold -water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor. a. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. b. Finish: Polished chrome plate. c. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm, unless otherwise indicated. d. Mixing Valve: Two -lever handle. e. Backflow Protection Device for Hose Outlet: Required. f. Backflow Protection Device for Side Spray: Not required. g. Centers: 8 inches. h. Mounting: Back/wall, concealed. i. Handle(s): Wrist blade, 4 inches. j. Inlet(s): NPS 1/2. k. Spout Type: Rigid, solid brass. I. Spout Outlet: Hose thread. m. Vacuum Breaker. Required. n. Operation: Non -compression, manual. o. Drain: Grid. 2.3 FLUSHOMETERS A. Flushometers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation. b. Sloan Valve Company. c. TOTO USA, Inc. 2. Description: Flushometer for urinal or water -closet -type fixture. Include brass body with corrosion -resistant intemal components, non -hold -open feature, control stop with check valve, vacuum breaker, copper or brass tubing, and polished chrome -plated finish on exposed parts. a. Internal Design: Diaphragm or piston operation. b. Style: Exposed or Concealed. c. Trip Mechanism: Hard -wired, electric -sensor actuator or Battery-operated sensor actuator. 2.4 TOILET SEATS A. Toilet Seats: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Bemis Manufacturing Company. c. Church Seats. d. Eljer. e. Olsonite Corp. 2. Description: Toilet seat for water -closet -type fixture. a. Material: Molded, solid plastic with antimicrobial agent. b. Configuration: Open front without cover. c. Size: Elongated. d. Hinge Type: SC, self-sustaining, check. e. Class: Heavy-duty commercial. f. Color. White. 2.5 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. TCI Products. c. TRUEBRO, Inc. PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 4 • d. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation. 2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold -water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements. B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold -water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements. 2.6 FIXTURE SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Josam Company. 2. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 3. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc. 4. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. B. Urinal Supports: 1. Description: Type I, urinal carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture for wall -mounting, urinal -type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet. 2. Wall mounted. 3. Accessible -Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights. C. Lavatory Supports: 1. Description: Type I, lavatory carrier with exposed arms and tie rods for wall -mounting, lavatory - type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet. 2. Accessible -Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights. D. Sink Supports: 1. Description: Type I, sink carrier with exposed arms and tie rods for sink -type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet. 2. Floating sink. 2.7 WATER CLOSETS A. Water Closets: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Eljer. c. Kohler Co. d. TOTO USA, Inc. 2. Description: Floor -mounting, floor -outlet, vitreous -china fixture designed for flushometer valve operation. a. Style: Flushometer valve. 1) 2) Flush: Standard. 3) Auto flush: Optional. 4) Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon -jet design. Include bolt caps matching fixture. 5) Height: Standard. 6) Design Consumption: 1.6 gal./flush. 7) Color. White. B. Water Closets: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Eljer. b. Kohler Co. c. American Standard Companies, Inc. 2. Description Accessible, floor -mounting, back -outlet, vitreous -china fixture designed for flushometer-valve operation. a. Style: Flushometer valve. PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 5 • 1) Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon -jet design. Include bolt caps matching fixture. 2) Height Accessible. 3) Design Consumption: 1.6 gal./flush. 4) Color. White. 2.8 URINALS A. Urinals: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products. c. Eljer. d. Kohler Co. e. TOTO USA, Inc. 2. Description: Accessible, wall -mounting, bads -outlet, vitreous -china fixture designed for flushometer valve operation. a. Type: Siphon jet. b. Strainer or Trapway: Separate removable strainer with integral trap. c. Design Consumption: 1 gal./flush. d. Color. White. e. Fixture Support: Urinal chair carrier. 2.9 LAVATORIES A. Lavatories: 1. Lavatory integral to solid surface countertop provided by decor company. 2. Description: Accessible, wall -mounting fixture. a. Faucet Hole Punching: Three holes, 2 -inch centers]. b. Faucet Hole Location: Top. c. Faucet: Lavatory. d. Supplies: NPS 3/8 chrome -plated copper with stops. e. Drain: Grid. 1) Location: Near back of bowl. f. Drain Piping: Schedule 40 ABS or PVC, NPS 1-1/4 by NPS 1-1/2 P -trap; NPS 1-1/2, tubular waste to wall; and wall escutcheon. g. Protective Shielding Guard(s). h. Fixture Support: Lavatory. 2.10 COMMERCIAL SINKS A. Commercial Sinks: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advance Tabco. b. Elkay Manufacturing Co. c. Just Manufacturing Company. d. Metal Masters Foodservice Equipment Co., Inc. 2. Description: One -compartment, wall -hung, stainless-steel commercial sink with backsplash. a. Compartment: 1) Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/2 tailpiece and twist drain. a) Location: Centered in compartment. b. Faucet(s): Sink. 1) Number Required: One. 2) Mounting: Backsplash. c. Supplies: NPS 3/4 chrome -plated copper with stops or PVC shutoff valves. d. Drain Piping: NPS 2 and wall escutcheon(s). B. Commercial Sinks ADA Compliant: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advance Tabco. b. Elkay Manufacturing Co. c. Just Manufacturing Company. d. Metal Masters Foodservice Equipment Co., Inc. PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 6 • 2. Description: One -compartment, wall -hung, stainless-steel commercial sink with backsplash. a. Compartment: 1) Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/2 tailpiece and twist drain. a) Location: Centered in compartment. b. Faucet(s): Sink. 1) Number Required: One. 2) Mounting: Backsplash. c. Supplies: NPS 3/4 chrome -plated copper with stops or PVC shutoff valves. d. Drain Piping: NPS 2 and wall escutcheon(s). 2.11 SERVICE BASINS A. Service Basins: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products. b. Florestone Products Co., Inc. c. Swan Corporation. d. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. 2. Description: Flush -to -wall, floor -mounting, cast -polymer fixture with rim guard. a. Shape: Square. b. Size: 24 by 24 inches. c. Height: 10 inches. d. Tiling Flange: On three sides. e. Color. White. f. Faucet: Sink. g. Drain: Grid with NPS 2 outlet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing -in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation. B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions. B. Install off -floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall -mounting fixtures. 1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back -outlet fixtures. 2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping. 3. Use chair -type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures. C. Install back -outlet, wall -mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports. D. Install floor -mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate. E. Install wall -mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports. F. Install floor -mounting, back -outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate and wall bracket and onto waste fitting seals. G. Install counter -mounting fixtures in and attached to casework. H. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing -in drawings. PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 7 • Install water -supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. 1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture. Valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." J. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system. K. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system. L. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach. M. Install tanks for accessible, tank -type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of compartment. N. Install toilet seats on water closets. O. Install trap -seal liquid in dry urinals. P. Install faucet -spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required. Q. Install water -supply flow -control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves. R. Install faucet flow -control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and pattems. Include adapters if required. S. Install traps on fixture outlets. 1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. 2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated. T. Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have disposer. Install switch where indicated or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated. U. Install hot-water dispensers in back top surface of sink or in countertop with spout over sink. V. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep -pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." W. Set service basins in leveling bed of cement grout. Grout is specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." X. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary -type, one -part, mildew - resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.3 CONNECTIONS Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed. PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 8 • B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components. C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. E. Install fresh batteries in sensor -operated mechanisms. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls. B. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream. C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. D. Install fresh batteries in sensor -operated mechanisms when used. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Do the following: 1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts. 2. Remove sediment and debris from drains. B. After completing installation of exposed, factory -finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner. C. Check ADA clearances. END OF SECTION 224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 9 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 230700 - HVAC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Insulation Materials: a. Calcium silicate. b. Cellular glass. c. Flexible elastomeric. d. Mineral fiber. Fire -rated insulation systems. 2. Insulating cements. 3. Adhesives. 4. Mastics. 5. Lagging adhesives. 6. Sealants. 7. Factory -applied jackets. 8. Tapes. 9. Securements. 10. Comer angles. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 21 Section "Fire -Suppression Systems Insulation." 2. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation." 3. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners. 4. Division 33 Section "Underground Hydronic Energy Distribution" for loose -fill pipe insulation in underground piping outside the building. 5. Division 33 Section "Underground Steam and Condensate Distribution Piping" for loose -fill pipe insulation in underground piping outside the building. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any). B. Shop Drawings: 1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels. 6. Detail application of field -applied jackets. 7. Detail application at linkages of control devices. 8. Detail field application for each equipment type. C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 1 • r 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire -test -response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke -developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame -spread index of 75 or less, and smoke -developed index of 150 or less. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field -applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Calcium Silicate: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Industrial Insulation Group; Thermo -12 Gold. 2. Preformed Pipe Sections: Flat-, curved-, and grooved -block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non -asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I. HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 2 • • 3. Flat-, curved-, and grooved -block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non -asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I. 4. Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges. G. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cell -U -Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF. b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K. 2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 3. Special -Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. 5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory -Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2. 7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. H. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed -cell, sponge- or expanded -rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armacell LLC; AP Amiaflex. Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory -applied FSK jacket or III with factory -applied FSP jacket. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap. d. Owens Corning; All -Service Duct Wrap. J. Mineral -Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory -applied FSK jacket. For equipment applications, provide insulation with factory -applied ASJ. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. b. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas. c. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series. K. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Johns Manville; Micro -Lok. b. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation. c. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. L. Mineral -Fiber, Pipe Insulation Wicking System: Preformed pipe insulation complying with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with absorbent cloth factory applied to the entire inside surface of preformed pipe insulation and extended through the longitudinal joint to outside surface of insulation under insulation jacket. Factory apply a white, polymer, vapor -retarder jacket with self-sealing adhesive tape seam and evaporation holes running continuously along the longitudinal seam, exposing the absorbent doth. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Knauf Insulation; Permawick Pipe Insulation. b. Owens Corning; VaporWick Pipe Insulation. M. Mineral -Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory -applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 Ib/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k -value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory - applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 3 • • 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation. 2.2 FIRE -RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS A. Fire -Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is tested and certified to provide a 2 -hour fire rating by a NRTL acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Thermal Ceramics; FireMaster Duct Wrap. b. Unifrax Corporation; FyreWrap. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. B. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium -silicate -based adhesive with a service temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -97. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-27/81-93. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 290. d. Vimasco Corporation; 760. C. Cellular -Glass, Adhesive: Solvent -based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -96. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-33. D. Mineral -Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL -A -3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. 2.4 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL -C - 19565C, Type II. B. Vapor -Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB -50. b. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590. c. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43 -mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 5. Color. White. 2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -52. HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 4 • • b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130. d. Vimasco Corporation; 136. 2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Color. White. 2.6 SEALANTS A. Joint Sealants: 1. Joint Sealants for Cellular -Glass, Phenolic, and Polyisocyanurate Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Vimasco Corporation; 750. 2. Joint Sealants for Polystyrene Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -70. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45/30-46. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Vimasco Corporation; 750. 3. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 4. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant 5. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. 6. Color: White or gray. 2.7 FACTORY -APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory -applied jackets on various applications. When factory - applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft -paper, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with aluminum -foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure -sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with kraft -paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I1. 4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 2.8 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor -retarder tape matching factory -applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibflnch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. FSK Tape: Foil -face, vapor -retarder tape matching factory -applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces forcefinch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 5 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbffinch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. C. Aluminum -Foil Tape: Vapor -retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 Ibf/inch in width. 2.9 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Products; Bands. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands. 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal. 3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal. B. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Capacitor -Discharge -Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc -coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor - discharge welding, 0.135 -inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP -1. 2) GEMCO; CD. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS. 2. Cupped -Head, Capacitor -Discharge -Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc -coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor -discharge welding, 0.135 -inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1 -1/2 -inch galvanized carbon -steel washer. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP -1. 2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP. 3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thidkness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T. 2) GEMCO; Perforated Base. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle. b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc -coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106 -inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 4. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) GEMCO; Nylon Hangers. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers. HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 6 • b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter_ c. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106 -inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 5. Self -Sticking -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series TSA. 2) GEMCO; Press and Peel. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick. b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc -coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106 -inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive -backed base with a peel -off protective cover. 6. Insulation -Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016 -inch thick, galvanized -steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC -150. 2) GEMCO; R-150. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA -150. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips. b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. 7. Nonmetal Insulation -Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016 -inch thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) GEMCO. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. C. Staples: Outward -clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4 -inch wide, stainless steel or Monel. D. Wire: 0.062 -inch soft -annealed, stainless steel. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. C&FWire. b. Childers Products. 2.10 CORNER ANGLES A. PVC Comer Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color -coded to match adjacent surface. B. Aluminum Comer Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14. C. Stainless -Steel Comer Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or 316. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are dean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 7 • • 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor -barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor -barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory -applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3 -inch wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor -barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor -barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings. HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 8 • M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration -control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts. 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire -rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire -rated wall and partition penetrations. Extemally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section 'Penetration Firestopping"irestopping and fire - resistive joint sealers. F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated. For penetrations through fire -rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches. 2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 3. Seal penetrations through fire -rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 9 B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor -retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing -box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor -barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric -reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well -shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field -applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. 9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two- part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field -applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. 3.6 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Boiler Breechings and Ducts: 1. Secure single -layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12 -inch intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation material. HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 10 • • • 2. Install 2 -layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12 -inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12 -inch intervals. 3. On exposed applications without metal jacket, finish insulation surface with a skim coat of mineral - fiber, hydraulic -setting cement. When cement is dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth. Overlap edges at least 1 inch. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth. Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform finish. B. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure single -layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12 -inch intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Install 2 -layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12 -inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12 -inch intervals. 3. Apply a skim coat of mineral -fiber, hydraulic -setting cement to insulation surface. When cement is dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform finish. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of same material and thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Finish flange insulation same as pipe insulation. D. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed insulation sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. 3. Finish fittings insulation same as pipe insulation. E. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 2. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3. Finish valve and specialty insulation same as pipe insulation. 3.7 CELLULAR -GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor - barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor -barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular -glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 11 s • • 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular -glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of cellular -glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.8 MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor - barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor -barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral -fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions; where access to top of ductwork is limited, adhesive application to top of ductwork may be omitted. 3. Install either capacitor -discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head, capacitor -discharge - weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 12 • • • inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2 -inch outward -clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field - applied jacket, adhesive, vapor -barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor -barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18 -foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor -barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches. 5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6 -inch - wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on altemating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. F. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions; where access to top of ductwork is limited, adhesive application to top of ductwork may be omitted.. 3. Install either capacitor -discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head, capacitor -discharge - weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2 -inch outward -clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field - applied jacket, adhesive, vapor -barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor -barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18 -foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor -barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches. 5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6 -inch wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 3.9 FIRE -RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Where fire -rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and supports to maintain a continuous fire rating. B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct. C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire -rated assemblies. Fire -stop systems are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 3.10 FINISHES A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass -Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections. HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 13 • • • 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex -emulsion size. B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C. Color. Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets. 3.11 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 3. Indoor, concealed retum located in nonconditioned space. 4. Indoor, exposed retum located in nonconditioned space. 5. Indoor, concealed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust. 6. Indoor, exposed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust. 7. Indoor, concealed oven and warewash exhaust. 8. Indoor, exposed oven and warewash exhaust. 9. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. 10. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. 11. Outdoor, concealed supply and retum. 12. Outdoor, exposed supply and retum. B. Items Not Insulated: 1. Fibrous -glass ducts. 2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 3. Factory -insulated flexible ducts. 4. Factory -insulated plenums and casings. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Vibration -control devices. 7. Factory -insulated access panels and doors. 3.12 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome -plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 3.13 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4 inch thick. b. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick. B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot -Gas Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. c. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. C. Refrigerant Suction and Hot -Gas Flexible Tubing: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 14 • • • a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. 3.14 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Refrigerant Suction and Hot -Gas Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick. c. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches thick. B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot -Gas Flexible Tubing: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick. END OF SECTION 230700 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 15 • • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 230900 — ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. 2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control devices. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 5. Written description of sequence of operation. 6. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics. 7. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For Energy Management System to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device. 2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and devices. 3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. 4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances. 5. Calibration records and list of set points. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Factory -Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment manufacturer. B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. B. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator workstation. ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 230900 - 1 • • • PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, use only approved manufacturers. 2.2 ENERGY PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION A. General Requirements: 1. The energy management system shall actively manage all HVAC units (cooling and heating), interior and exterior building lighting, exterior parking lot lighting, exterior signage, roof beams, restroom exhaust fans, PlayPlace exhaust fans, and electrical water heater (as allowed by local health code) in a manner that will minimize electrical load side demand and consumption. The energy management system shall manage the aforementioned electrical loads: a. Automatically without restaurant personnel or remote intervention, once acceptable set points have been programmed into the system, to decrease the restaurant's electric utility bill. b. Without affecting restaurant operations, customer service, crew and customer comfort. B. Specific Control Requirements: 1. Provide a control method that constantly monitors the actual energy usage as it occurs and predicts exactly when the peak demand will occur. When the prediction indicates that the demand will be over the specified set point, the system automatically selects those Toads of lowest priority to reset in order to cause the least disruption of operations. 2. Provide a control method that allows restaurant to set defined limits that are not to be exceeded even when demand is a threat. Provide the ability to have a variety of defined limits using this control method (for example: upper limits for HVAC or lower limits for heating, water heater etc.). 3. Provide a control method that will maximize the use of cooler outside air to reduce the necessity of air conditioning. 4. Provide a control method that will minimize the cycling of loads when conditions do not warrant moving Targe amounts of air. This system shall not prevent the HVAC supply fans from providing the necessary amount of make-up air required by kitchen equipment exhaust hoods. 5. Provide a control method that calculates the optimum number of minutes to be added to the start time for each day of the week, based on inside and outside temperature measurements, resulting in the latest start that will achieve comfort conditions by the scheduled start time. This feature, when combined with the night setback, allows for a broader night setback temperature. The result is Tess run time of the equipment and less energy consumption in the evening hours. 6. Provide a means to automatically control exterior lighting, roof beams and exterior signage systems such that these elements will be on as needed (at night as well as on rainy days). Activate exterior lighting on varying ambient light levels during occupied periods. Priority - 1st signage, 2nd exterior building lights and 3rd parking lot lights. Provide emergency override for failsafe operation. Provide remote bypass capabilities with user programmable intervals. 7. Provide means to automatically shut off all interior lighting during unoccupied hours. Provide emergency override for failsafe operation. This requirement does not apply to lighting used for security, emergency and night lighting purposes. Provide remote bypass capabilities with user programmable intervals. C. Display/Command Panel — System and Equipment Status Requirement: 1. Provide an easy to use means to monitor, view and change set points, schedules, and other systems or equipment parameters in the restaurant. The user-friendly design shall be capable of leading the average restaurant manager, intuitively, through the most common functions. 2. Provide mufti -level password protection to prevent unauthorized access. Switches/pushbuttons that are used to display operating functions of the system and specified overrides shall be available even when the access panel is closed. 3. Provide status indicators for each element of the heating and cooling system. 4. Provide status indicators to show what is occurring when it occurs. If the indicator is "off', then it is "off' due to scheduling, cycling or demand control. 5. Provide a status indicator to show when the system is controlling to meet demand limit. 6. Provide any other pertinent status indicators that show system is functioning as programmed and for troubleshooting purposes. 7. Provide a minimum of two override pushbuttons. One is for the HVAC system and the other for the lighting. When an override button is pressed, the HVAC or lighting is enabled for a time period of up to one additional hour. Repeated pressing of the override button shall not automatically extend the override time. When the override button times out, control returns to normal operation. The system shall keep track of overtime hours for reporting purposes. The override capability shall not circumvent the predictive demand control or specified set points. ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 230900 - 2 • r • D. Programming Requirements: 1. Provide a means to program and make programming changes both in the store and remotely. In store programming shall be achievable using the display panel and status indicators (no computer shall be needed for in store programming). E. Graphs and Logs for Trending: 1. Provide a means to record pertinent data and events so that each restaurant can see what has happened and when it happened even though it happened last week or in the case of electrical demand, last month. This information shall be capable of being graphed and printed out by connecting an IBM PC to the system or via modem. 2. The graph and log information, available from the energy management system, shall contain pertinent information that a restaurant could use, if they elect to do so, to generate additional savings via M&R. F. Alarms: 1. Provide an alarm in the store any time a sensor measurement if out of specification or if a sensor malfunctions. Also, provide an in store alarm any time an extemal contact doses when it should be open. 2. Provide an optional dial out feature for remote alarm indication via pager or other means. G. System Design: 1. All system components, including sensors, shall be designed to offer years of trouble free operation in a restaurant environment. System design shall provide maximum protection from surges for its own incoming 120V ac power and for all digital/analog inputs and outputs. 2.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field -assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 2.4 ADJUSTING A. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. 2.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the Energy Management System. END OF SECTION 230900 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 230900 - 3 • • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 231123 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators. 6. Service meters. 7. Mechanical sleeve seals. 8. Grout. 9. Concrete bases. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Operating -Pressure Ratings: 1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 3. Minimum Operating Pressure of Service Meter. 5 psig. B. Natural -Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig or less. C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Piping specialties. 2. Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with associated components. 3. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected models. 4. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. 5. Service meters. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. Include bypass fittings and meter bars. 6. Dielectric fittings. 7. Mechanical sleeve seals. 8. Escutcheons. B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 1 • • • 1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch per foot. 2. Detail mounting, supports, and valve arrangements for service meter assembly and pressure regulator assembly. C. Delegated -Design Submittal: For natural-gas piping and equipment indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints. D. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the items involved. E. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinated with other services and utilities. F. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer. G. Welding certificates. H. Field quality -control reports. I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For motorized gas valves, pressure regulators and service meters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory -applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory -applied protective coatings to avoid damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight. D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility - locating service for area where Project is located. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 2 • • • PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought -Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234 for butt welding and socket welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass -to -iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends. 4. Forged -Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: a. Material Group: 1.1. b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o -rings, and spiral - wound metal gaskets. e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel underground. 5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory -applied, three -layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE. a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat -shrink PE sleeves. 6. Mechanical Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Division of Dresser, Inc. 2) Smith -Blair, Inc. b. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish. c. Buna-nitrile seals. d. Steel bolts, washers, and nuts. e. Coupling shall be capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. f. Steel body couplings installed underground on plastic pipe shall be factory equipped with anode. B. Corrugated, Stainless -Steel Tubing: Comply with ANSI/IAS LC 1. 1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. OmegaFlex, Inc. b. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Parflex Division. c. Titeflex. d. Tru -Flex Metal Hose Corp. 2. Tubing: ASTM A 240/A 240M, corrugated, Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Coating: PE with flame retardant. a. Surface-Buming Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1) Flame -Spread Index: 25 or Tess. 2) Smoke -Developed Index: 50 or less. 4. Fittings: Copper -alloy mechanical fittings with ends made to fit and listed for use with corrugated stainless-steel tubing and capable of metal -to -metal seal without gaskets. Include brazing socket or threaded ends complying with ASME B1.20.1. 5. Striker Plates: Steel, designed to protect tubing from penetrations. 6. Manifolds: Malleable iron or steel with factory -applied protective coating. Threaded connections shall comply with ASME B1.20.1 for pipe inlet and corrugated tubing outlets. 7. Operating -Pressure Rating: 5 psig. C. Aluminum Tubing: Comply with ASTM B 210 and ASTM B 241. 1. Aluminum Alloy: Alloy 5456 is prohibited. 2. Protective Coating: Factory -applied coating capable of resisting corrosion on tubing in contact with masonry, plaster, insulation, water, detergents, and sewerage. 3. Flare Fittings: Comply with ASME B16.26 and SAE J513. a. Copper -alloy fittings. b. Metal -to -metal compression seal without gasket. c. Dryseal threads shall comply with ASME B1.20.3. D. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 3 • • • 1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket -fusion type or ASTM D 3261, butt -fusion type with dimensions matching PE pipe. 2. PE Transition Fittings: Factory -fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11; and steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 3. Transition Service -Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested. a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet connected to steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion - protective coating for aboveground outlet. b. Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection. c. Bridging sleeve over mechanical coupling. d. Factory -connected anode. e. Tracer wire connection. f. Ultraviolet shield. g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe. 4. Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller. Capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. 2) Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. 3) Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. b. PE body with molded -in, stainless-steel support ring. c. Buna-nitrile seals. d. Acetal collets. e. Electro -zinc -plated steel stiffener. 5. Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 2 and Larger. Capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. 2) Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. 3) Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. b. Fiber -reinforced plastic body. c. PE body tube. d. Buna-nitrile seals. e. Acetal collets. f. Stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers. 6. Steel Mechanical Couplings: Capable of joining plain -end PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Division of Dresser, Inc. 2) Smith -Blair, Inc. b. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish. c. Buna-nitrile seals. d. Steel bolts, washers, and nuts. e. Factory -installed anode for steel -body couplings installed underground. 2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Appliance Flexible Connectors: 1. Indoor, Fixed -Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable -Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. 4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating. 5. Operating -Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig. 6. End Fittings: Zinc -coated steel. 7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 8. Maximum Length: 72 inches. B. Quick -Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41. 1. Copper -alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector. 2. Nitrile seals. 3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected. 4. For indoor or outdoor applications. 5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 4 • • C. Y-Pattem Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller, flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.: 3. Strainer Screen: 60 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig. D. Basket Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high -tensile cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller, flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: 60 mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig. E. T-Pattem Strainers: 1. Body: Ductile or malleable iron with removable access coupling and end cap for strainer maintenance. 2. End Connections: Grooved ends. 3. Strainer Screen: 60 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 57 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 750 psig. F. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable -iron increaser fitting with corrosion -resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded -end connection. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with AWS A5.8. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited. 2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services. B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller. Comply with ASME B16.33. 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME 81.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller. 6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials 'WOG" permanently marked on valve body. C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger. Comply with ASME B16.38. 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges. 3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 4. Service Mark: Initials 'WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body. D. Two -Piece, Full -Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP -110. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 5 • • d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome -plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded -body packnut design with adjustable -stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with 'WOG" indicated on valve body. E. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP -78. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Lee Brass Company. b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Plug: Bronze. 4. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Operator. Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 6. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. F. Cast -Iron, Nonlubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP -78. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. b. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. c. Xomox Corporation; a Crane company. 2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B. 3. Plug: Bronze or nickel -plated cast iron. 4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. 5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas. 6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 7. Operator. Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 8. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with 'WOG" indicated on valve body. G. Cast -Iron, Lubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP -78. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Flowserve. b. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc. c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. d. Milliken Valve Company. e. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. f. R&M Energy Systems, A Unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc. 2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B. 3. Plug: Bronze or nickel -plated cast iron. 4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. 5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas. 6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 7. Operator. Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 8. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 6 • • 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with 'WOG" indicated on valve body. H. PE Ball Valves: Comply with ASME B16.40. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Kerotest Manufacturing Corp. b. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. c. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Body: PE. 3. Ball: PE. 4. Stem: Acetal. 5. Seats and Seals: Nitrile. 6. Ends: Plain or fusible to match piping. 7. CWP Rating: 80 psig. 8. Operating Temperature: Minus 20 to plus 140 deg F. 9. Operator. Nut or flat head for key operation. 10. Include plastic valve extension. 11. Include tamperproof locking feature for valves where indicated on Drawings. Valve Boxes: 1. Cast-iron, two -section box. 2. Top section with cover with "GAS" lettering. 3. Bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5 inches in diameter. 4. Adjustable cast-iron extensions of length required for depth of bury. 5. Include tee -handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve nut or flat head, and with stem of length required to operate valve. 2.5 MOTORIZED GAS VALVES A. Automatic Gas Valves: Comply with ANSI Z21.21. 1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Honeywell International Inc. b. Johnson Controls. 3. Body: Brass or aluminum. 4. Seats and Disc: Nitrile rubber. 5. Springs and Valve Trim: Stainless steel. 6. Normally closed. 7. Visual position indicator. 8. Electrical operator for actuation by appliance automatic shutoff device. B. Electrically Operated Valves: Comply with UL 429. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Magnatrol Valve Corporation. b. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Climate & Industrial Controls Group; Skinner Valve Div. c. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Pilot operated. 3. Body: Brass or aluminum. 4. Seats and Disc: Nitrile rubber. 5. Springs and Valve Trim: Stainless steel. 6. 120-V ac, 60 Hz, Class B, continuous -duty molded coil, and replaceable. 7. NEMA ICS 6, Type 4, coil enclosure. 8. Normally closed. 9. Visual position indicator. 2.6 EARTHQUAKE VALVES A. Earthquake Valves: Comply with ASCE 25. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pacific Seismic Products, Inc. 2. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 7 • • • 3. Maximum Operating Pressure: 7 psig. 4. Cast -aluminum body with stainless-steel intemal parts. 5. Nitrile -rubber, reset -stem o -ring seal. 6. Valve position, open or dosed, indicator. 7. Composition valve seat with clapper held by spring or magnet locking mechanism. 8. Level indicator. 9. End Connections: Threaded for valves NPS 2 and smaller, flanged for valves NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 2.7 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. General Requirements: 1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion -resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller, flanged for regulators NPS 2-1/2 and larger. B. Service Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Meter Company. b. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. c. Invensys. 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc -plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc -plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. 6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet -stabilized, mineral -filled nylon. 8. Single -port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping extemal to the regulator. 9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field -installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. 12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psig. C. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Meter Company. b. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. c. Invensys. d. Maxitrol Company. 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc -plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc -plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. 6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet -stabilized, mineral -filled nylon. 8. Single -port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping extemal to the regulator. 9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field -installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. 12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig. D. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Maxitrol Company. 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 8 • 3. Springs: Zinc -plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc -plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet -stabilized, mineral -filled nylon. 7. Factory -Applied Finish: Minimum three -layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish. 8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 1 psig. 2.8 SERVICE METERS A. Diaphragm -Type Service Meters: Comply with ANSI B109.2. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Meter Company. b. Invensys. 2. Case: Die-cast aluminum. 3. Connections: Steel threads. 4. Diaphragm: Synthetic fabric. 5. Diaphragm Support Bearings: Self-lubricating. 6. Compensation: Continuous temperature and pressure. 7. Meter Index: Cubic feet. 8. Meter Case and Index: Tamper resistant. 9. Remote meter reader compatible. 10. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psig. 11. Pressure Loss: Maximum 0.5 -inch wg. 12. Accuracy: Maximum plus or minus 1.0 percent. B. Rotary -Type Service Meters: Comply with ANSI B109.3. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Meter Company. b. Invensys. 2. Case: Extruded aluminum. 3. Connection: Flange. 4. Impellers: Polished aluminum. 5. Rotor Bearings: Self-lubricating. 6. Compensation: Continuous temperature and pressure. 7. Meter Index: Cubic feet. 8. Tamper resistant. 9. Remote meter reader compatible. 10. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psig. 11. Accuracy: Maximum plus or minus 2.0 percent. C. Service -Meter Bars: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Meter Company. b. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. 2. Malleable- or cast-iron frame for supporting service meter. 3. Include offset swivel pipes, meter nuts with o -ring seal, and factory- or field -installed dielectric unions. 4. Omit meter offset swivel pipes if service -meter bar dimensions match service -meter connections. D. Service -Meter Bypass Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. b. Williamson, T. D., Inc. 2. Ferrous, tee, pipe fitting with capped side inlet for temporary natural-gas supply. 3. Integral ball -check bypass valve. 2.9 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Dielectric Unions: FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 9 • • • 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. b. Wilkins; Zum Plumbing Products Group. 2. Minimum Operating -Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials. 4. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas. 5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed joint, plain, or welded end connections that match piping system materials. B. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. b. Wilkins; Zum Plumbing Products Group. 2. Minimum Operating -Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials. 4. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas. 5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed joint, plain, or welded end connections that match piping system materials. 2.10 SLEEVES A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. B. Cast -Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. 2.11 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Metraflex Company_ b. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe and sleeve. 3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of Length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one nut and bolt for each sealing element. 2.12 ESCUTCHEONS A. General Requirements for Escutcheons: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with ID to fit around pipe or tube, and OD that completely covers opening. B. One -Piece, Deep-Pattem Escutcheons: Deep -drawn, box -shaped brass with polished chrome -plated finish. C. One -Piece, Cast -Brass Escutcheons: With set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome -plated or rough brass. D. Split -Casting, Cast -Brass Escutcheons: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome -plated or rough brass. E. One -Piece, Stamped -Steel Escutcheons: With set screw or spring dips and chrome -plated finish. F. Split -Plate, Stamped -Steel Escutcheons: With exposed -rivet hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome -plated finish. G. One -Piece, Floor -Plate Escutcheons: Cast-iron floor plate. H. Split -Casting, Floor -Plate Escutcheons: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 10 • • • 2.13 GROUT A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non -shrink and non-metallic, dry hydraulic -cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post -hardening, volume adjusting, non -staining, non -corrosive, non-gaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. 2.14 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Detectable Waming Tape: Acid and alkali -resistant, PE film waming tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing -in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Close equipment shutoff valves before tuming off natural gas to premises or piping section. B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 or the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that natural-gas utilization devices are tumed off in piping section affected. C. Comply with NFPA 54 or the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition. 3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Comply with NFPA 54 or the International Fuel Gas Code acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction for installation and purging of natural-gas piping. B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 1. If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it in containment conduit. C. Install underground, PE, natural-gas piping according to ASTM D 2774. D. Steel Piping with Protective Coating: 1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating manufacturer. 3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe. E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. F. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. G. Underground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular dear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 11 • • H. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. I. Install pressure gage downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." 3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Comply with NFPA 54 or the Intemational Fuel Gas Code acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction for installation and purging of natural-gas piping. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. G. Locate valves for easy access. H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps. I. Install piping free of sags and bends. J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. K. Install escutcheons at penetrations of interior walls, ceilings, and floors. 1. New Piping: a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattem type. b. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast -brass type with polished chrome -plated finish. c. Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split -casting, cast -brass type with polished chrome -plated finish. d. Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast -brass type with rough -brass finish. e. Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast -brass type. f. Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor -plate type. 2. Existing Piping: a. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split -casting, cast -brass type with chrome -plated finish. b. Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split -casting, cast -brass type with chrome - plated finish. c. Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split -casting, cast -brass type with rough -brass finish. d. Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split -casting, cast -brass type. e. Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split -casting, floor -plate type. L. Fire -Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." M. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in. N. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing -in requirements. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 12 • • • O. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service -meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing. 1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap. P. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap. Q. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view. R. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel pipe with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap. 1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit. 2. In Floors: Install natural-gas piping with welded or brazed joints and protective coating in cast -in- place concrete floors. Cover piping to be cast in concrete slabs with minimum of 1-1/2 inches of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed piping in concrete slabs containing quick -set additives or ander aggregate. 3. In Floor Channels: Install natural-gas piping in floor channels. Channels must have cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation. 4. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports. a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker barriers. 5. Prohibited Locations: a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts. b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions. S. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down. T. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. U. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections. V. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode. W. Install strainer on inlet of each line -pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve. X. Install pressure gage downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." 3.5 SERVICE -METER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION A. Install service -meter assemblies aboveground. B. Install metal shutoff valves upstream from service regulators. Shutoff valves are not required at second regulators if two regulators are installed in series. C. Install strainer on inlet of service -pressure regulator and meter set. D. Install service regulators mounted outside with vent outlet horizontal or facing down. Install screen in vent outlet if not integral with service regulator. E. Install metal shutoff valves upstream from service meters. Install dielectric fittings downstream from service meters. F. Install service meters downstream from pressure regulators. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 13 • 3.6 • • G. Install metal bollards to protect meter assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for pipe bollards. VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector. B. Install underground valves with valve boxes. C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing. D. Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing. E. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping. 3.7 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Threaded Joints: 1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. D. Welded Joints: 1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators. 2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory -applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter. F. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas service. Install gasket concentrically positioned. G. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not overtighten. H. PE Piping Heat -Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean doth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. Plain -End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain -End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. 3.8 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic -restraint devices specified in Division 23 Section 'Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." C. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller. Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 14 • 4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 5. NPS 4 and Larger. Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. D. Install hangers for horizontal, corrugated stainless-steel tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/8: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 3/4 and Larger. Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3.9 CONNECTIONS A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements. B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70. C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances. D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment. E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance. 3.10 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification. B. Install detectable waming tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.11 PAINTING A. Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for painting interior and exterior natural-gas piping. B. Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory -applied paint or protective coating. 1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q. a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat). c. Color. Gray. 2. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1E. a. Prime Coat: Quick -drying alkyd metal primer. b. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (flat). c. Color. Gray. C. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory -applied finishes with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish. 3.12 CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to seismic codes at Project. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy -coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions fumished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 15 • • • 6. Use 3000-psig, 28 -day, compressive -strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 or the International Fuel Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction. C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.14 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain earthquake valves. 3.15 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE A. Underground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following: 1. PE pipe and fittings joined by heat fusion, or mechanical couplings; service -line risers with tracer wire terminated in an accessible location. 2. Steel pipe with wrought -steel fittings and welded joints, or mechanical couplings. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping. B. Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Annealed -temper copper tube with wrought -copper fittings and brazed joints. C. Containment Conduit Steel pipe with wrought -steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping. 3.16 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded joints. B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded joints. C. Underground, below building, piping shall be the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought -steel fittings and welded joints. D. Containment Conduit Steel pipe with wrought -steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping. E. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded or wrought -steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping. 3.17 UNDERGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE A. Connections to Existing Gas Piping: Use valve and fitting assemblies made for tapping utility's gas mains and listed by an NRTL. B. Underground: 1. PE valves. 2. NPS 2 and Smaller. Bronze plug valves. 3. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger. Cast-iron, lubricated plug valves. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 16 • • • 3.18 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following: 1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, regular -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve. B. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger at service meter shall be one of the following: 1. Two-piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve. 3. Cast-iron, non -lubricated plug valve. C. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve. D. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be one of the following: 1. Two-piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve. 3. Cast-iron, lubricated plug valve. E. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following: 1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve. END OF SECTION 231123 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 17 • • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall round and flat -oval ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Duct liner. 5. Sealants and gaskets. 6. Hangers and supports. 7. Seismic -restraint devices. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 Section 'Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 2. Division 23 Section "Nonmetal Ducts" for fibrous -glass ducts, thermoset fiber -reinforced plastic ducts, thermoplastic ducts, PVC ducts, and concrete ducts. 3. Division 23 Section "HVAC Casings" for factory- and field -fabricated casings for mechanical equipment. 4. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound -control devices, duct -mounting access doors and panels, tuming vanes, and flexible ducts. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall withstand the effects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and ASCE/SEI 7. C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1- 2004. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following products: 1. Liners and adhesives. 2. Sealants and gaskets. 3. Seismic -restraint devices. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Factory- and shop -fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static -pressure Basses. 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. METAL DUCTS 233113 -1 • • 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire -rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, tuming vanes, and access doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and budding attachment , seismic restraints, and vibration isolation. C. Delegated -Design Submittal: 1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports. 5. Design Calculations: Calculations , including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation for selecting hangers and supports and seismic restraints. D. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire -rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Perimeter moldings. E. Welding certificates. F. Field quality -control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports. 3. AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start -Up." C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static -pressure Bass unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, 'Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular Ducts," for static -pressure METAL DUCTS 233113 - 2 • • class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct - support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT -OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static -pressure class unless otherwise indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Lindab Inc. b. SEMCO Incorporated. c. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. B. Flat -Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension). C. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter. Flanged. D. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and Fittings," for static -pressure Bass, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt -welded longitudinal seams. 2. Fabricate flat -oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with butt -welded longitudinal seams. E. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static - pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View. Mill phosphatized. C. Carbon -Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts. D. Stainless -Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article. E. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper, with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one -side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view. F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. METAL DUCTS 233113 - 3 • 1. Where black- and galvanized -steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 -inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or Tess; 3/8 -inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.4 DUCT LINER A. Fibrous -Glass Duct Liner. Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMAAH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group. b. Johns Manville. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning. e. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 1) Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. 2) Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. 2. Antimicrobial Erosion -Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion -resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems. 3. Solvent -Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916. a. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Natural -Fiber Duct Liner. 85 percent cotton, 10 percent borate, and 5 percent polybinding fibers, treated with a microbial growth inhibitor and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bonded Logic, Inc. b. Reflectix Inc. 2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature when tested according to ASTM C 518. 3. Surface-Buming Characteristics: Maximum flame -spread index of 25 and maximum smoke - developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84; certified by an NRTL. 4. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. a. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or Tess when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Insulation Pins and Washers: 1. Cupped -Head, Capacitor -Discharge -Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc -coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor -discharge welding, 0.106 -inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1 -1/2 -inch galvanized carbon -steel washer. 2. Insulation -Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016 -inch thick galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. D. Shop Application of Duct Liner. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-19, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation." 1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited. 2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing. 3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive. 4. Fold and compress liner in comers of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted -edge overlapping. 5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at comers of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary. 6. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from comers and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally. METAL DUCTS 233113 - 4 • • 7. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations: a. Fan discharges. b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. 8. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire -damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. 2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-buming characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame -spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke -developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Two -Part Tape Sealing System: 1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. 2. Tape Width: 4 inches. 3. Sealant Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static -Pressure Class: 10 -inch wg, positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum. 10. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Water -Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static -Pressure Class: 10 -inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. D. Solvent -Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Base: Synthetic rubber resin. 3. Solvent: Toluene and heptane. 4. Solids Content: Minimum 60 percent. 5. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 60. 6. Water resistant. 7. Mold and mildew resistant. 8. VOC: Maximum 395 g/L. 9. Maximum Static -Pressure Class: 10 -inch wg, positive or negative. 10. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 11. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. E. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920. 1. General: Single -component, acid -curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). METAL DUCTS 233113 - 5 F. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. • G. Round Duct Joint 0 -Ring Seals: 1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1 -inch wg and shall be rated for 10 - inch wg static -pressure class, positive or negative. 2. EPDM 0 -ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Non -corrosive Environments: Cadmium -plated steel rods and nuts. B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all -thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc -chromate primer after installation. C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." D. Steel Cables for Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. E. Steel Cables for Stainless -Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492. F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium -plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic -locking and damping device. G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self -tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. H. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized -steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless -Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate. • 2.7 SEISMIC -RESTRAINT DEVICES • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Hilti Corp. 3. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd. B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Structural Safety Factor. Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected. C. Channel Support System: Shop or field fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. Include matching components and corrosion -resistant coating. D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492, stainless-steel cables with end connections made of cadmium -plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with an automatic - locking and clamping device or double -cable clips. E. Hanger Rod Stiffener. Reinforcing steel angle damped to hanger rod. F. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled -in and stud -wedge or female -wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. METAL DUCTS 233113 - 6 • • • PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air -handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install round and flat -oval ducts in maximum practical lengths. D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E. Install factory- or shop -fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. J. Where ducts pass through non -fire -rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. K. Where ducts pass through fire -rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers. L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system. C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. 3.3 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCT A. Install commercial kitchen hood exhaust ducts without dips and traps that may hold grease, and sloped a minimum of 2 percent to drain grease back to the hood. B. Install fire -rated access panel assemblies at each change in direction and at maximum intervals of 12 feet in horizontal ducts, and at every floor for vertical ducts, or as indicated on Drawings. Locate access panel on top or sides of duct a minimum of 1-1/2 inches from bottom of duct. METAL DUCTS 233113 - 7 C. Do not penetrate fire -rated assemblies except as allowed by applicable building codes and authorities having jurisdiction. • 3.4 DUCT SEALING • • A. Seal ducts for duct static -pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible": 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Outdoor, Supply -Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 4. Outdoor, Retum-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 5. Unconditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2 -Inch wg and Lower. Seal Class B. 6. Unconditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than2-Inch wg: Seal Class A. 7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 8. Unconditioned Space, Return -Air Ducts: Seal Class B. 9. Conditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes2-Inch wg and Lower. Seal Class C. 10. Conditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2 -Inch wg: Seal Class B. 11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. 12. Conditioned Space, Retum-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder -actuated fasteners, or structural -steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder -actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for standard -weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight -aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints. C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View. Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet. F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.6 SEISMIC -RESTRAINT -DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet o.c. 2. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet. B. Select seismic -restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads. C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. METAL DUCTS 233113 - 8 • • D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators. E. Install seismic -restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members. G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling. Notify the Architect if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc -coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless-steel anchors for applications exposed to weather. 3.7 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.8 PAINTING A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized -steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.10 DUCT CLEANING A. Clean new and existing duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Use service openings for entry and inspection. 1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static -pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or Tined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors. 2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process. C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control: 1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3 -micron -size (or larger) particles. 2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits: METAL DUCTS 233113 - 9 • • 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, retum, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and retum plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air -handling unit intemal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. 5. Retum-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and tuming vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply -air ducts, dampers, actuators, and tuming vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems. E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical leaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum -collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. 4. Clean fibrous -glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous -glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth. 5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with lean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. 6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash -down procedures. 7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA -registered antimicrobial agents if fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris. 3.11 START UP A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section 'Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 3.12 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Supply Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Constant -Volume Air -Handling Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive 2 -inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular. 6. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. 2. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. Pressure Class: Positive 2 -inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular. 6. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. B. Retum Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Air -Handling Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2 -inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular. 6. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. 2. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2 -inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular. 6. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. C. Exhaust Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air. a. Pressure Class: Negative 1 -inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. METAL DUCTS 233113 - 10 • 2. Ducts Connected to Commercial Kitchen Hoods: Comply with NFPA 96. a. Concealed: Carbon -steel sheet. b. Welded seams and joints. c. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2 -inch wg. d. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: Welded seams, joints, and penetrations. e. SMACNA Leakage Class: 3. 3. Ducts Connected to Dishwasher Hoods: a. Type 304, stainless-steel sheet. b. Exposed to View. No. 3 finish. c. Concealed: No. 2D finish. d. Welded seams and flanged joints with watertight EPDM gaskets. e. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 3 -inch wg. f. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: Welded seams, joints, and penetrations. g. SMACNA Leakage Class: 3. 4. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2 -inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular. 6. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. D. Outdoor -Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Air -Handling Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2 -inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular. 6. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. 2. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2 -inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular. 6. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. E. Intermediate Reinforcement: 1. Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel or carbon steel coated with zinc -chromate primer. 2. Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized sheet steel coated with zinc chromate. F. Liner. 1. Supply Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I or Natural fiber, 2 inches thick. 2. Retum Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I or Natural fiber, 2 inches thick. G. Elbow Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower. 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius -to -diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius -to -diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius -to -diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, 'Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2- 4, "Vane Support in Elbows." c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher. 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius -to -diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius -to -diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2- 4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius -to -diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius -to -diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, 'Vane Support in Elbows." METAL DUCTS 233113 - 11 • • 3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius -to -Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with Tess than 90 -degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower. 0.5 radius -to -diameter ratio and three segments for 90 - degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius -to -diameter ratio and four segments for 90 - degree elbow. 3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher. 1.5 radius -to -diameter ratio and five segments for 90 - degree elbow. b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter. Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter. Standing seam. H. Branch Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections." a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45 -degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in. 2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower. 90 -degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher. 45 -degree lateral. END OF SECTION 233113 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 12 • • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manual volume dampers. 2. Tuming vanes. 3. Duct -mounted access doors. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Flexible ducts. 6. Duct accessory hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 Section "HVAC Gravity Ventilators" for roof -mounted ventilator caps. 2. Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" for duct -mounted fire and smoke detectors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion Toss data. Include breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings. B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. 1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. c. Control damper installations. d. Fire -damper, smoke -damper, combination fire- and smoke -damper, ceiling, and corridor damper installations, including sleeves; and duct -mounted access doors and remote damper operators. e. Duct security bars. f. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling -mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved. D. Source quality -control reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1 H. Hanger -Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy Toads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Tumbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable -Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top -Beam C -Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side -Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if Toads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C -Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge. 8. Side -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I -beams. 9. Steel -Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I -beams for heavy Toads. 10. Linked -Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I -beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. 12. Welded -Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated Toads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 Ib. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 Ib. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 Ib. 13. Side -Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited. J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe -Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal -Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Restraint -Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light Toads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches. 3. Spring -Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable -Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated Toad and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable -Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. 7. Variable -Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support. 8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load -adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 6 c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical -type supports and one trapeze member. L. Comply with MSS SP -69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. N. Use powder -actuated fasteners or mechanical -expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. O. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field -fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1. C. Fiberglass Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with applicable portions of MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -89. Install hangers and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. D. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field -assembled metal framing systems. E. Fiberglass Strut System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field -assembled fiberglass struts. F. Thermal -Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. G. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder -actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder -actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder -actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical -expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. H. Pipe Stand Installation: 1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb -Mounting Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane. 2. Curb -Mounting -Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. Refer to Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for curbs. I. Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for plumbing fixtures. J. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. K. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded -structural -steel shapes. L. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 7 M. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. N. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. O. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. P. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded. Q. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1. Attach damps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal -hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP -58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal -hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight -distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP -58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal -hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight -distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger. Include wood inserts. 6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 7. Thermal -Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural -steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 8 • • • 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous -thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. 3.6 PAINTING A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field -painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing -repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 9 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 220548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Isolation pads. 2. Isolation mounts. 3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 4. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators. 5. Housed spring mounts. 6. Elastomeric hangers. 7. Spring hangers. 8. Spring hangers with vertical -limit stops. 9. Pipe riser resilient supports. 10. Resilient pipe guides. 11. Seismic snubbers. 12. Restraining braces and cables. 13. Steel and inertia, vibration isolation equipment bases. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. IBC: International Building Code. B. ICC -ES: ICC -Evaluation Service. C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of Califomia. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic -Restraint Loading: 1. Seismic restraints shall be designed and installed in accordance with local codes and shall be acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device. 2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic -restraint component used. a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements. 3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads. B. Delegated -Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic -restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators, seismic restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases. 2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring deflection VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220548 - 1 changes, and seismic Toads. Include certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist. 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loads_ 4. Seismic -Restraint Details: a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear Toads. b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices. c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations). C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for plumbing piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints. D. Welding certificates. E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with seismic -restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." C. Seismic -restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproved by ICC -ES, or preapproved by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic -restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic -restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Califomia Dynamics Corporation. 3. Isolation Technology, Inc. 4. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. D. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a non -slip pattem and galvanized -steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. 1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene, rubber or hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass. E. Mounts: Double -deflection type, with molded, oil -resistant rubber, hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory -drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color -code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220548 - 2 1. Materials: Cast -ductile -iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil - resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. 2. Neoprene: Shock -absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge -bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO. F. Restrained Mounts: All -directional mountings with seismic restraint. 1. Materials: Cast -ductile -iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil - resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. 2. Neoprene: Shock -absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge -bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO. G. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open -spring isolators. 1. Outside Spring Diameter. Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated Toad, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4 -inch thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig. 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment. H. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open -spring isolators with seismic or limit -stop restraint. 1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical -limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory -drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4 -inch thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 2. Restraint: Seismic or limit -stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Outside Spring Diameter. Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated Toad. 4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated Toad, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers. 1. Housing: Ductile -iron or steel housing to provide all -directional seismic restraint. 2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure. 3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4 -inch travel up or down before contacting a resilient collar. J. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double -deflection type, fitted with molded, oil -resistant elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color -code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. K. Spring Hangers: Combination coil -spring and elastomeric insert hanger with spring and insert in compression. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger -rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter. Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil -resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel -washer -reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 7. Self -centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil. L. Spring Hangers with Vertical -Limit Stop: Combination coil -spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical -limit stop. VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220548 - 3 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger -rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter. Not Tess than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated Toad. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated Toad, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil -resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up -stop" on lower threaded rod. 8. Self -centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil. M. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All -directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2 -inch thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical -limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions. N. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2 -inch thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a factory -set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements. 2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Califomia Dynamics Corporation. 3. Isolation Technology, Inc. 4. Mason Industries. D. Steel Base: Factory -fabricated, welded, structural -steel bases and rails. 1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1 -inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps. 2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment. 3. Support Brackets: Factory -welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support. E. Inertia Base: Factory -fabricated, welded, structural -steel bases and rails ready for placement of cast -in- place concrete. 1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1 -inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps. 2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment. 3. Support Brackets: Factory -welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support. 4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor -bolt sleeves and anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor -bolt templates from supported equipment manufacturer. 2.3 SEISMIC -RESTRAINT DEVICES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220548 - 4 C. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. D. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected. E. Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural -steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings. 1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic -rated, drill -in, and stud -wedge or female - wedge type. 2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil and water resistant neoprene. 3. Maximum 1/4 -inch air gap, and minimum 1/4 -inch thick resilient cushion. F. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop or field fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion -resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces. G. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement. H. Hanger Rod Stiffener. Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod. I. Bushings for Floor -Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs. J. Bushing Assemblies for Wall -Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used. K. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face. L. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled -in and stud -wedge or female -wedge type in zinc -coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter. M. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled -in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate - based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc -coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. 2.4 FACTORY FINISHES A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime -coat finish ready for field painting. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory -assembled and -tested equipment before shipping. 1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot -dip galvanize metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color -code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic -control devices to indicate capacity range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic -control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220548 - 5 B. Examine roughing -in of reinforcement and cast -in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces. C. Strength of Support and Seismic -Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to can -y present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits. 3.3 VIBRATION -CONTROL AND SEISMIC -RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Equipment Restraints: 1. Install seismic snubbers on plumbing equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure. 2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inches. 3. Install seismic -restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component. B. Piping Restraints: 1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP -127. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 20 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet. C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. D. Install seismic -restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component. E. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor -mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base. F. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall -mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment -mounting channels are attached to wall. G. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. H. Drilled -in Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive. 5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc -coated steel anchors for interior and stainless steel anchors for exterior applications. 3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220548 - 6 equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for piping flexible connections. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Perform tests and inspections. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless post -connection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice. 3. Obtain Architects approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load - spreading members. 4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect. 5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. Verify snubber minimum clearances. 9. Air -Mounting System Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 10. Air -Mounting System Operational Test: Test the compressed -air leveling system. 11. Test and adjust air -mounting system controls and safeties. 12. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight. B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. C. Adjust active height of sprint isolators. D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation. END OF SECTION 220548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220548 - 7 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Waming signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Stencils. 5. Valve tags. 6. Waming tags. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device. C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label. D. Valve numbering scheme. E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS Metal Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032 -inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self -tapping screws. 5. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Plastic Labels for Equipment: IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 1 1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color. White. 3. Background Color. Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self -tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. C. Label Content: Include equipments Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules). D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8 -1/2 -by -11 -inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color. Red. C. Background Color. White. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self -tapping screws. H. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. I. Label Content: Include caution and waming information, plus emergency notification instructions. 2.3 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color -coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semi-rigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. C. Self -Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact -type, permanent -adhesive backing. D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow -Direction An-ows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high. IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 2 • • • 2.4 STENCILS A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions. 1. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal. 2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray -can form. 3. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 VALVE TAGS A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4 -inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2 -inch numbers. 1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032 -inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Fasteners: Brass wire -link or beaded chain; or S -hook. B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8 -1/2 -by -11 -inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal -operating position (open, closed, qr modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 1. Valve -tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.6 WARNING TAGS A. Waming Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident -prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum. 2. Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire or string. 3. Nomenclature: Large -size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE." 4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Piping Color -Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting." B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installers option. Install stenciled pipe labels, complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system. 1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking. C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 3 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 10 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 10 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. 3.4 VALVE -TAG INSTALLATION A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory - fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn -watering hose connections; and similar roughing -in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. B. Valve -Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs: 1. Valve -Tag Size and Shape: a. Cold Water. 1-1/2 inches, round. b. Hot Water. 1-1/2 inches, round. c. Low -Pressure Compressed Air. 1-1/2 inches, square. d. High -Pressure Compressed Air. 1-1/2 inches, square. 2. Valve -Tag Color. a. Cold Water. Natural. b. Hot Water. Natural. c. Low -Pressure Compressed Air. Green. d. High -Pressure Compressed Air. Green. 3. Letter Color. a. Cold Water. White. b. Hot Water. White. c. Low -Pressure Compressed Air. White. d. High -Pressure Compressed Air. White. 3.5 WARNING -TAG INSTALLATION A. Write required message on, and attach waming tags to, equipment and other items where required. END OF SECTION 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 4 • r McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 220700 - PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Insulation Materials: a. Calcium silicate. b. Cellular glass. c. Flexible elastomeric. d. Mineral fiber. 2. Insulating cements. 3. Adhesives. 4. Mastics. 5. Lagging adhesives. 6. Sealants. 7. Factory -applied jackets. 8. Tapes. 9. Securements. 10. Comer angles. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 21 Section "Fire -Suppression Systems Insulation." 2. Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any). B. Shop Drawings: 1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels. 6. Detail application of field -applied jackets. 7. Detail application at linkages of control devices. 8. Detail field application for each equipment type. C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows: 1. Sample Sizes: a. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches long by NPS 2. b. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches square. c. Jacket Materials for Pipe: 12 inches long by NPS 2. d. Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches square. e. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full range of colors available for each type of finish material. D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 1 • • E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed. F. Field quality -control reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire -test -response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke -developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame -spread index of 75 or less, and smoke -developed index of 150 or less. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field -applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 2 • • F. Calcium Silicate: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Industrial Insulation Group; Thermo -12 Gold. 2. Preformed Pipe Sections: Flat-, curved-, and grooved -block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non -asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I. 3. Flat-, curved-, and grooved -block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non -asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I. 4. Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges. G. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Cell -U -Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF. b. Pittsburgh Coming Corporation; Foamglas Super K. 2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 3. Special -Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. 5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory -Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2. 7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. H. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed -cell, sponge- or expanded -rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180. Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Artide. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap. d. Owens Corning; All -Service Duct Wrap. J. High -Temperature, Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type V, without factory -applied jacket. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Johns Manville; HTB 23 Spin-Glas. b. Owens Corning; High Temperature Flexible Batt Insulations. K. Mineral -Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For equipment applications, provide insulation with factory -applied ASJ. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Artide. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. b. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas. c. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series. L. High -Temperature, Mineral -Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type III, without factory -applied jacket. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Johns Manville; 1000 Series Spin-Glas. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 3 • • b. Owens Coming; High Temperature Industrial Board Insulations. M. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Johns Manville; Micro -Lok. b. Knauf Insulation; 1000(Pipe Insulation. c. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. 2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory -applied ASJ. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. N. Mineral -Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory -applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 Ib/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k -value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation. 2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS A. Mineral -Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I. b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik. B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Thermal-V-Kote. C. Mineral -Fiber, Hydraulic -Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote. b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik -Cote. c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. B. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium -silicate -based adhesive with a service temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -97. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-27/81-93. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 290. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-30. e. Vimasco Corporation; 760. C. Cellular -Glass, Adhesive: Solvent -based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 4 • • • a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -96. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-33. D. Mineral -Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL -A -3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. b. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. c. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. 2.4 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL -C -19565C, Type II. 1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES Description: Comply with MIL -A -3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -52. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30. e. Vimasco Corporation; 136. 3. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over equipment and pipe insulation. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F. 5. Color. White. 2.6 SEALANTS A. Joint Sealants: 1. Joint Sealants for Cellular -Glass, Phenolic, and Polyisocyanurate Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. b. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. 5. Color. White or gray. 2.7 FACTORY -APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory -applied jackets on various applications. When factory -applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft -paper, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with aluminum -foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure -sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with kraft -paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 4. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4 -mil thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame -spread index of 5 and a smoke -developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1) Dow Chemical Company; Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 5 • • 5. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6 -mil thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame -spread index of 5 and a smoke -developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1) Dow Chemical Company; Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. 6. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure -sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1) Dow Chemical Company; Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. 2.8 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor -retarder tape matching factory -applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibffinch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. FSK Tape: Foil -face, vapor -retarder tape matching factory -applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK. d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ: 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibffnch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. C. PVC Tape: White vapor -retarder tape matching field -applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555. b. Compac Corp.; 130. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape. d. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 Ibffnch in width. D. Aluminum -Foil Tape: Vapor -retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 6 • • b. Compac Corp.; 120. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 Ibf/inch in width. E. PVDC Tape: White vapor -retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Dow Chemical Company; Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Tape. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Film Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. 5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 55 Ibf/iinch in width. 2.9 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Childers Products; Bands. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands. 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal. 3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal. 4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application. B. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Capacitor -Discharge -Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc -coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor - discharge welding, 0.135 -inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP -1. 2) GEMCO; CD. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS. 2. Cupped -Head, Capacitor -Discharge -Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc -coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor -discharge welding, 0.106 -inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1 -1/2 -inch galvanized carbon -steel washer. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP -1. 2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP. 3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T. 2) GEMCO; Perforated Base. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle. b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc -coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106 -inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 7 • • d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 4. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work indude, but are not limited to the following: 1) GEMCO; Nylon Hangers. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers. b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter. c. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106 -inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 5. Self -Sticking -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work indude, but are not limited to the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series TSA. 2) GEMCO; Press and Peel. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick. b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc -coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106 -inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive -backed base with a peel -off protective cover. 6. Insulation -Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016 -inch thick, galvanized -steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work indude, but are not limited to the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC -150. 2) GEMCO; R-150. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA -150. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips. b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. 7. Nonmetal Insulation -Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016 -inch thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1) GEMCO. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. C. Staples: Outward -clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4 -inch wide, stainless steel or Monel. D. Wire: 0.062 -inch soft -annealed, galvanized steel. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. C&FWire. b. Childers Products. c. PABCO Metals Corporation. d. RPR Products, Inc. 2.10 CORNER ANGLES A. PVC Comer Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color -coded to match adjacent surface. B. Aluminum Comer Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 8 • • C. Stainless -Steel Comer Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240, Type 304 or 316. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. 2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water, if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless- steel surfaces, use demineralized water. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor -barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 9 • • • 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor -barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory -applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3 -inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor -barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor -barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration -control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts. 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 10 • • E. Insulation Installation at Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire -rated walls and partitions. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping"irestopping and fire - resistive joint sealers. F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire -rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor -retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing -box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor -barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric -reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well -shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field -applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. 9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two- part section on the vertical center line of valve body. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -11 • • 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field -applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. 3.6 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Domestic Water Boiler Breechings: 1. Secure single -layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12 -inch intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation material. 2. Install 2 -layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12 -inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12 -inch intervals. 3. On exposed applications without metal jacket, finish insulation surface with a skim coat of mineral - fiber, hydraulic -setting cement. When cement is dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth. Overlap edges at least 1 inch. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth. Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform finish. B. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure single -layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12 -inch intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Install 2 -layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12 -inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12 -inch intervals. 3. Apply a skim coat of mineral -fiber, hydraulic -setting cement to insulation surface. When cement is dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform finish. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of same material and thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Finish flange insulation same as pipe insulation. D. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed insulation sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. 3. Finish fittings insulation same as pipe insulation. E. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 2. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3. Finish valve and specialty insulation same as pipe insulation. 3.7 CELLULAR -GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor - barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 12 • • 4. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor -barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular -glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturers recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available_ Secure according to manufacturers written instructions. 2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular -glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of cellular -glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.8 MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor - barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor -barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral -fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturers recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 13 • • • B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect field -insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field -applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance. 2. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field -applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse. order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article. C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. 3.10 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated. C. Domestic water pump insulation shall be one of the following: D. Domestic water, domestic hot-water hydropneumatic tank insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. 2. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. 3. Mineral -Fiber Board: 1 inch thick and 3-Ib/cu. ft. nominal density. 4. Mineral -Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1 inch thick. 3.11 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome -plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. END OF SECTION 220700 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 14 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Under -building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building. 2. Encasement for piping. 3. Specialty valves. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Water meters fumished by utility company for installation by Contractor. 6. Water meters. 7. Escutcheons. 8. Sleeves and sleeve seals. 9. Wall penetration systems. B. Related Section: 1. Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water -service piping outside the building from source to the point where water -service piping enters the building. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following products: 1. Specialty valves. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Water meters. 6. Backflow preventers and vacuum breakers. 7. Escutcheons. 8. Sleeves and sleeve seals. 9. Water penetration systems. B. Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article. C. Coordination Drawings: For piping in equipment rooms and other congested areas, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved: 1. Fire -suppression -water piping. 2. Domestic water piping. D. Field quality -control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1 • • • 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L and ASTM B 88, Type M water tube, drawn temper. 1. Cast -Copper Solder -Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings. 2. Wrought -Copper Solder -Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought -copper pressure fittings. 3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder -joint ends. 4. Copper Unions: MSS SP -123, cast -copper -alloy, hexagonal -stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal - to -metal seating surfaces, and solder -joint or threaded ends. 5. Copper Pressure -Seal -Joint Fittings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division. 2) NIBCO INC. b. NPS 2 and Smaller. Wrought -copper fitting with EPDM-rubber 0 -ring seal in each end. c. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Cast -bronze or wrought -copper fitting with EPDM-rubber 0 -ring seal in each end. 6. Copper Push -on -Joint Fittings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) NVent LLC. b. Description: Cast -copper fitting complying with ASME B16.18 or wrought -copper fitting complying with ASME B 16.22; with stainless-steel teeth and EPDM-rubber 0 -ring seal in each end instead of solder joint ends. 7. Copper -Tube Extruded -Tee Connections: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) T -DRILL Industries Inc. b. Description: Tee formed in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. 8. Grooved -Joint Copper -Tube Appurtenances: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Anvil International. 2) Shurjoint Piping Products. 3) Victaulic Company. b. Copper Grooved -End Fittings: ASTM B 75 copper tube or ASTM B 584 bronze castings. c. Grooved -End -Tube Couplings: Copper -tube dimensions and design similar to AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water, and bolts and nuts. B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, annealed temper. 1. Copper Solder -Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought -copper pressure fittings. 2. Copper Pressure -Seal -Joint Fittings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division. 2) NIBCO INC. b. NPS 2 and Smaller. Wrought -copper fitting with EPDM-rubber 0 -ring seal in each end. c. NPS 3 and NPS 4: Cast -bronze or wrought -copper fitting with EPDM-rubber 0 -ring seal in each end. 2.3 DUCTILE -IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Mechanical -Joint, Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 2 • • 1. Standard-Pattem, Mechanical -Joint Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron. 2: Compact-Pattem, Mechanical -Joint Fittings: AWWA C153, ductile iron. a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray -iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. B. Push -on -Joint, Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push -on -joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Standard-Pattem, Push -on -Joint Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron. a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. 2. Compact-Pattem, Push -on -Joint Fittings: AWWA C153, ductile iron. a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. C. Plain -End, Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C151. 1. Grooved -Joint, Ductile -Iron -Pipe Appurtenances: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Anvil International. 2) Shurjoint Piping Products. 3) Victaulic Company. b. Grooved -End, Ductile -Iron Fittings: ASTM A 47, malleable -iron castings or ASTM A 536, ductile -iron castings with dimensions matching pipe. c. Grooved -End, Ductile -Iron -Pipe Couplings: AWWA C606 for ductile -iron -pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water, and bolts and nuts. 2.4 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe -Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full -face or ring type unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal, Pipe -Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper -phosphorus alloys for general -duty brazing unless otherwise indicated. E. Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Piping and Tubing: ASTM F 493. 1. Use CPVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 490 g/L or Tess when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). F. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or Tess when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). G. Plastic, Pipe -Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. B. Form: Sheet or Tube. C. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008 -inch minimum thickness or high-density, cross -laminated PE film of 0.004 - inch minimum thickness. D. Color. Black or Natural. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 3 2.6 SPECIALTY VALVES A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general -duty metal valves. B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves, drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers. 2.7 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. General Requirements: 1. Same size as pipes to be joined. 2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined. 3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Fitting -Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. C. Sleeve -Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing. b. Dresser, Inc.; Dresser Piping Specialties. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. d. JCM Industries. D. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company. b. Harvel Plastics, Inc. c. Spears Manufacturing Company. 2. Description: CPVC or PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert and one solvent -cement -socket or threaded end. E. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Colonial Engineering, Inc. b. NIBCO INC. c. Spears Manufacturing Company. 2. Description: CPVC or PVC four-part union. Include brass threaded end, solvent -cement -joint or threaded plastic end, rubber 0 -ring, and union nut. 2.8 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. b. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products. 2. Description: a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig at 180 deg F. b. End Connections: Solder -joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Factory -fabricated, bolted, companion -flange assembly. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. c. End Connections: Solder -joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder -joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. D. Dielectric -Flange Kits: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 4 �. 0 a. Calpico, Inc. b. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Description: a. Non -conducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers. E. Dielectric Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corporation. 2. Description: a. Galvanized -steel coupling. b. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F. c. End Connections: Female threaded. d. Lining: Inert and non -corrosive, thermoplastic. F. Dielectric Nipples: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Victaulic Company. 2. Description: a. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545. b. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F. c. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. d. Lining: Inert and non -corrosive, propylene. 2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Flex -Hose Co., Inc. 2. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 3. Mercer Rubber Co. B. Bronze -Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated -bronze tubing with bronze wire -braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing. 1. Working -Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig. 2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller. Threaded copper pipe or plain -end copper tube. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger. Flanged copper alloy. C. Stainless -Steel -Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated -stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire -braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing. 1. Working -Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig. 2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller. Threaded steel -pipe nipple. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple. 2.10 WATER METERS A. Displacement -Type Water Meters: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ABB. b. Badger Meter, Inc. c. Mueller Company; Water Products Division. 2. Description: a. Standard: AWWA C700. b. Pressure Rating: 150-psig working pressure. c. Body Design: Nutating disc; totalization meter. d. Registration: In gallons or cubic feet as required by utility. e. Case: Bronze. f. End Connections: Threaded. B. Turbine -Type Water Meters: DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 5 • • 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ABB. b. Badger Meter, Inc. c. Mueller Company; Water Products Division. 2. Description: a. Standard: AWWA C701. b. Pressure Rating: 150-psig working pressure. c. Body Design: Turbine; totalization meter. d. Registration: In gallons or cubic feet as required by utility company . e. Case: Bronze. f. End Connections for Meters NPS 2 and Smaller. Threaded. g. End Connections for Meters NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged. C. Compound -Type Water Meters: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ABB. b. Badger Meter, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: AWWA C702. b. Pressure Rating: 150-psig working pressure. c. Body Design: With integral mainline and bypass meters; totalization meter. d. Registration: In gallons or cubic feet as required by utility company. e. Case: Bronze. f. Pipe Connections: Flanged. D. Fire -Service -Type Water Meters: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Badger Meter, Inc. b. Mueller Company; Water Products Division. 2. Description: a. Standard: AWWA C703 and UL listing. b. Pressure Rating: 175-psig working pressure. c. Body Design: 1) Turbine -Type Water Meters: With strainer, and with meter on bypass. a) Strainer. Full size, matching water meter. b) Bypass Meter. AWWA C701, turbine type with bronze case; not less than NPS 2. d. Registration: In gallons or cubic feet as required by utility company. e. Case: Bronze. f. Pipe Connections for Meters NPS 2 and Smaller. Threaded. g. Pipe Connections for Meters NPS 2-1/2 and Larger. Flanged. E. Remote Registration System: Direct -reading type complying with AWWA C706; modified with signal transmitting assembly, low -voltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly as required by utility company. F. Remote Registration System: Encoder type complying with AWWA C707; modified with signal transmitting assembly, low -voltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly as required by utility company. 2.11 ESCUTCHEONS A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates. B. One Piece, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome -plated finish with setscrews. C. One Piece, Deep Pattern: Deep -drawn, box -shaped brass with chrome -plated finish. D. One Piece, Stamped Steel: Chrome -plated finish with spring clips. E. Split Casting, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome -plated finish with concealed hinge and setscrew. F. Split Plate, Stamped Steel: Chrome -plated finish with concealed hinge spring clips. G. One -Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 6 • • H. Split -Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge. 2.12 SLEEVES A. Cast -Iron Wall Pipes: Fabricated of cast iron, and equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized -Steel -Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239 -inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. C. Molded -PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered -cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. D. Molded -PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. E. PVC -Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. F. Galvanized -Steel -Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc -coated, with plain ends. G. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews. 2.13 SLEEVE SEALS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex, Inc. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. B. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, used to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 2. Pressure Plates: Plastic. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion -resistant coating, of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. 2.14 WALL PENETRATION SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1. SIGMA. B. Description: Wall -sleeve assembly, consisting of housing and gland, gaskets, and pipe sleeve. 1. Carrier -Pipe Deflection: Up to 5 percent without leakage. 2. Housing: Ductile -iron casting with hub, waterstop, anchor ring, and locking devices. Include gland, bolts, and nuts. 3. Housing -to -Sleeve Gasket: EPDM rubber. 4. Housing -to -Carrier -Pipe Gasket: AWWA C111, EPDM rubber. 5. Pipe Sleeve: AWWA C151, ductile -iron pipe or ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, zinc -coated steel pipe. 2.15 GROUT A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, post -hardening and volume -adjusting, dry, hydraulic -cement grout. B. Characteristics: Non -shrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications. C. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 7 • • D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." C. Install ductile -iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. D. Install underground copper tube and ductile -iron pipe in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. E. Install shutoff valve, hose -end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers. F. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. G. Install water -pressure -reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for pressure -reducing valves. H. Install domestic water piping level and plumb. I. Rough -in domestic water piping for water -meter installation according to utility company's requirements. J. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section 'Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic -restraint devices. K. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. L. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. M. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space. N. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance. O. Install piping to permit valve servicing. P. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. Q. Install piping free of sags and bends. R. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. S. Install PEX piping with loop at each change of direction of more than 90 degrees. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 8 • • T. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty. U. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages. V. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Pumps" for thermostats. W. Install thermometers on outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers. 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter. E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." F. Pressure -Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure -seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer. G. Copper -Tubing, Push -on Joints: Clean end of tube. Measure insertion depth with manufacturer's depth gage. Join copper tube and push -on -joint fittings by inserting tube to measured depth. H. Extruded -Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar. I. Copper -Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll groove end of tube. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join copper tube and grooved -end fittings according to AWWA C606 for roll -grooved joints. J. Ductile -Iron -Piping Grooved Joints: Cut groove end of pipe. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join ductile -iron pipe and grooved -end fittings according to AWWA C606 for ductile - iron -pipe, cut -grooved joints. K. Steel -Piping Grooved Joints: Cut or roll groove end of pipe. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved -end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel -pipe grooved joints. L. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos -free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9. M. Plastic Piping Solvent -Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe -handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. Apply primer. 2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846 Appendix. 3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. N. PEX Piping Joints: Join according to ASTM F 1807. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 9 • 3.4 • • O. Dissimilar -Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. VALVE INSTALLATION A. General -Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations. B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2- 1/2 and larger. C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." 1. Hose -End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Stop -and -Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose -end drain valves where indicated. D. Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation retum branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves. E. Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation retum branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for calibrated balancing valves. 3.5 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping. B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller. Fitting -type coupling. 2. NPS 2 and Larger. Sleeve -type coupling. C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller. Plastic -to -metal transition fittings or unions. 3.6 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller. Use dielectric unions. C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flange kits. D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger. Use dielectric flange kits. 3.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION A. Install flexible connectors in suction and discharge piping connections to each domestic water pump and in suction and discharge manifold connections to each domestic water booster pump. B. Install bronze -hose flexible connectors in copper domestic water tubing. C. Install stainless -steel -hose flexible connectors in steel domestic water piping. 3.8 WATER METER INSTALLATION A. Rough -in domestic water piping for water meter installation according to utility company's requirements. B. Install water meters according to AWWA M6, utility company's requirements, and the following: DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 10 • • • C. Install displacement -type water meters with shutoff valve on water -meter inlet. Install valve on water -meter outlet and valved bypass around meter unless prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Install turbine -type water meters with shutoff valve on water -meter inlet. Install valve on water -meter outlet and valved bypass around meter unless prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction. E. Install compound -type water meters with shutoff valves on water -meter inlet and outlet and on valved bypass around meter. Support meters, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers. F. Install fire -service water meters with shutoff valves on water -meter inlet and outlet and on full-size valved bypass around meter. Support meter, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers. G. Install remote registration system according to standards of utility company and of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.9 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section 'Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic -restraint devices. B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation. 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet If Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer. MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double -rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch. E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller. 60 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2 -inch rod. 6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8 -inch rod. 7. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4 -inch rod. F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. G. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.10 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water -service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. D. Connect domestic water piping to water -service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following: 1. Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold -water suction and discharge piping. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 11 • • 2. Water Heaters: Cold -water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes. 4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3.11 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. B. Escutcheons for New Piping: 1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern. 2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome -plated finish. 3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome - plated finish. 4. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, cast brass with rough -brass finish. 5. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, cast brass. 6. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor plate. 3.12 SLEEVE INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls. B. Sleeves are not required for core -drilled holes. C. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves. D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated. E. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built. F. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants. G. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants. H. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using sleeve seals specified in this Section. I. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout. J. Install sleeves that are Targe enough to provide 1/4 -inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated. K. Install sleeve materials according to the following applications: 1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs: Molded PVC. 2. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs of Mechanical Equipment Areas or Other Wet Areas: Stack sleeve fittings. a. Extend sleeves 2 inches above finished floor level. b. For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing, extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing. 3. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Gypsum -Board Partitions: a. PVC pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 12 • • b. Galvanized -steel sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger. c. Exception: Sleeves are not required for water supply tubes and waste pipes for individual plumbing fixtures if escutcheons will cover openings. 4. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Exterior Concrete Walls: a. Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Cast-iron wall pipe sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger. c. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1 -inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation when sleeve seals are used. d. Do not use sleeves when wall penetration systems are used. L. Fire -Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestop materials and installations. 3.13 SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water -service piping entries into building. B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.14 WALL PENETRATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install wall penetration systems in new, exterior concrete walls. B. Assemble wall penetration system components with sleeve pipe. Install so that end of sleeve pipe and face of housing are flush with wall. Adjust locking devices to secure sleeve pipe in housing. 3.15 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation. B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure. 3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Piping Inspections: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing -in after roughing -in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Piping Tests: 1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. 2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 13 • • 5. Repair Teaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required. D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.17 ADJUSTING A. Perform the following adjustments before operation: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot -water -circulation retum piping to provide adequate flow. a. Manually adjust ball -type balancing valves in hot -water -circulation retum piping to provide flow of hot water in each branch. b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated. 5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation. 6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and are dean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. 3.18 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below. a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. B. Clean non -potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if methods are not prescribed, follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 3.19 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Fitting Option: Extruded -tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 14 • • • D. Under -building -slab, domestic water, building service piping, NPS 3 and smaller, shall be one of the following: 1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K or ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought -copper solder -joint fittings; and brazed copper pressure -seal fittings; and pressure -sealed joints. 2. PVC, Schedule 80 pipe; PVC, Schedule 80 socket fittings; and solvent -cemented joints. E. Under -building -slab, domestic water, building -service piping, NPS 4 to NPS 8 and larger, shall be one of the following: 1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K or ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought -copper solder -joint fittings; and brazed joints. 2. Mechanical -joint, ductile -iron pipe; standard or compact pattern mechanical -joint fittings; and mechanical joints. 3. Push -on -joint, ductile -iron pipe; standard or compact pattern push -on -joint fittings; and gasketed joints. 4. Plain -end, ductile -iron pipe; grooved -joint, ductile -iron -pipe appurtenances; and grooved joints. 5. PVC, Schedule 80 pipe; PVC, Schedule 80 socket fittings; and solvent -cemented joints. F. Under -building slab, combined domestic water, building -service, and fire -service -main piping, NPS 6 to NPS 12, shall be one of the following: 1. Mechanical -joint, ductile -iron pipe; standard or compact pattern mechanical -joint fittings; and mechanical joints. 2. Push -on -joint, ductile -iron pipe; standard or compact pattern push -on -joint fittings; and gasketed joints. 3. Plain -end, ductile -iron pipe; groovedjoint, ductile -iron -pipe appurtenances; and grooved joints. G. Under -building -slab, domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following: 1. Hard or soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought copper solder joint fittings; and brazed joints. 2. PVC, Schedule 80 pipe; PVC, Schedule 80 socket fittings; and solvent -cemented joints. H. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following: 1. Galvanized -steel pipe and nipples; galvanized, gray -iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L or ASTM B 88, Type M; cast or wrought copper solder -joint fittings; and soldered joints. 3. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L or ASTM B 88, Type M; copper pressure -seal -joint fittings; and pressure -sealed joints. 4. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L or ASTM B 88, Type M; copper push -on -joint fittings; and push -on joints. I. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast or wrought copper solder -joint fittings; and soldered joints. 2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L or ASTM B 88, Type M; copper pressure -seal -joint fittings; and pressure -sealed joints. 3. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L or ASTM B 88, Type M; grooved joint copper -tube appurtenances; and grooved joints. J. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 5 to NPS 8, shall be one of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L or ASTM B 88, Type M; cast or wrought copper solder -joint fittings; and soldered joints. 2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L or ASTM B 88, Type M; grooved -joint copper -tube appurtenances; and grooved joints. K. Above ground, combined domestic -water -service and fire -service -main piping, NPS 6 to NPS 12, shall be the following: 1. Plain -end, ductile -iron pipe; grooved joint, ductile -iron -pipe appurtenances; and grooved joints. 3.20 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Hot -Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory -stop balancing valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose -end drain valves. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 15 • • • PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Exposed -Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized. C. Stainless -Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480, Type 304, and having a No. 2 finish for concealed ducts and finish for exposed ducts. D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1 -side bright finish for exposed ducts. E. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6. F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized -steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 -inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8 -inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1. Duro Dyne Inc. 2. Greenhedk Fan Corporation. 3. Nailor Industries Inc. 4. Ruskin Company. 5. Vent Products Company, Inc. B. Description: Gravity balanced. C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm. D. Maximum System Pressure: 1 -inch wg. E. Frame: 0.052 -inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange. F. Blades: Multiple single -piece blades, maximum 6 -inch width, 0.025 -inch thick, roll -formed aluminum with sealed edges. G. Blade Action: Parallel. H. Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked. I. Blade Axles: 1. Material: Galvanized steel. 2. Diameter. 0.20 inch. J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. K. Retum Spring: Adjustable tension. L. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings. M. Accessories: AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 2 • • • 1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2. Counterweights and spring -assist kits for vertical airflow installations. 3. Electric actuators. 4. Chain pulls. 5. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted. 6. Screen Material: Aluminum. 7. Screen Type: Bird. 8. 90 -degree stops. 2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Nailor Industries Inc. b. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. c. Ruskin Company. d. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2. Standard leakage rating , with linkage outside airstream. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: a. Hat -shaped, galvanized -steel channels, 0.064 -inch minimum thickness. b. Mitered and welded comers. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: a. . Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed -blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized -steel, 0.064 inch thick. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings: a. Oil -impregnated bronze. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3 -inch wg or Tess shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. B. Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Nailor Industries Inc. b. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. c. Ruskin Company. d. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2. Standard leakage rating. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: Hat -shaped, 0.10 -inch thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed -blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Roll -Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10 -inch thick aluminum sheet. e. Extruded -Aluminum Blades: 0.050 -inch thick extruded aluminum. 6. Blade Axles: Nonferrous metal. 7. Bearings: a. Oil -impregnated bronze. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3 -inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. C. Low -Leakage, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Nailor Industries Inc. b. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 3 • • • c. Ruskin Company. d. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2. Low -leakage rating and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: a. Angle shaped. b. Galvanized -steel channels, 0.064 inch thick. c. Mitered and welded comers. d. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed -blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized, roll -formed steel, 0.064 inch thick. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings: a. Oil -impregnated bronze. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3 -inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Blade Seals: Neoprene. 9. Jamb Seals: Cambered aluminum. 10. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. 11. Accessories: a. Include locking device to hold single -blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. D. Low -Leakage, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Nailor Industries Inc. b. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. c. Ruskin Company. d. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2. Low -leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: Angle -shaped, 0.10 -inch thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed -blade design. c. Roll -Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10 -inch thick aluminum sheet. d. Extruded -Aluminum Blades: 0.050 -inch thick extruded aluminum. 6. Blade Axles: Nonferrous metal. 7. Bearings: a. Oil -impregnated bronze. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3 -inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Blade Seals: Neoprene. 9. Jamb Seals: Cambered aluminum. 10. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. 11. Accessories: a. Include locking device to hold single -blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. E. Jackshaft: 1. Size: 1 -inch diameter. 2. Material: Galvanized -steel pipe rotating within pipe -bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple -damper assemblies. 3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in multiple - damper assembly. F. Damper Hardware: 1. Zinc -plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32 -inch thick zinc -plated steel, and a 3/4 - inch hexagon locking nut. 2. Include center hole to suit damper operating -rod size. 3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 4 r • • 2.4 TURNING VANES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. B. Manufactured Tuming Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil -shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous -glass fill. C. Manufactured Tuming Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin -bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible'; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, 'Vane Support in Elbows." E. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions. 2.5 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Flame Gard, Inc. 3. 3M. B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL. C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0428 -inch stainless steel. D. Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall. E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease -tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum 2000 deg F. F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10 -inch wg, positive or negative. 2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. D. Metal -Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2- 3/4 -inch wide, 0.028 -inch thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032 -inch- thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 Ibf/inch in the warp and 360 Ibf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone. 1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 530 Ibf/iinch in the warp and 440 Ibffinch in the filling. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 5 s • i 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F. 2.7 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. McGill AirFlow LLC. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2 -ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring -steel wire; fibrous -glass insulation; aluminized vapor -barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 10 -inch wg positive and 1.0 -inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F. 4. Insulation R -value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004. C. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound, spring -steel wire; fibrous -glass insulation; polyethylene vapor -barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 4 -inch wg positive and 0.5 -inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F. 4. Insulation R -Value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004. D. Flexible Duct Connectors: 1. Clamps: Nylon strap in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size. 2. Non -Clamp Connectors: Liquid adhesive plus tape. 2.8 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct -insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous -glass ducts. B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized -steel accessories in galvanized -steel and fibrous -glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated. D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, retum, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. 1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. 2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts. E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 6 • G. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Upstream and downstream from duct filters. 3. At outdoor -air intakes and mixed -air plenums. 4. At drain pans and seals. 5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and equipment. 6. Adjacent to and dose enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers. 7. At each change in direction and at maximum 50 -foot spacing. 8. Upstream and downstream from tuming vanes. 9. Upstream or downstream from duct silencers. 10. Control devices requiring inspection. 11. Elsewhere as indicated. H. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. Access Door Sizes: 1. One -Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two -Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches. J. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment to indicate the purpose of access door. K. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. L. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. M. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. N. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1 /4 -inch movement during start and stop of fans. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat -response device is installed. 4. Inspect tuming vanes for proper and secure installation. 5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and damper. END OF SECTION 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 7 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers. 2. Perforated diffusers. 3. Louver face diffusers. 4. Adjustable bar registers and grilles. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts. 2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume -control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static -pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. B. Samples for Verification: For diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's standard sizes to verify color selected. C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Ceiling -mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. 5. Duct access panels. D. Source quality -control reports. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Price Industries. b. Titus. 2. Material: Aluminum. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches. 5. Face Style: Three cone. 6. Mounting: T -bar. 7. Pattem: Fixed. 8. Dampers: Combination damper and grid. DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 1 9. Accessories: a. Equalizing grid. b. Plaster ring. c. Safety chain. d. Wire guard. e. Sectorizing baffles. f. Operating rod extension. B. Perforated Diffuser. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Price Industries. b. Titus. 2. Material: Steel backpan and pattern controllers, with aluminum face. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches. 5. Duct Inlet: Round. 6. Face Style: Flush. 7. Mounting: T -bar. 8. Pattem Controller. None. 9. Dampers: Combination damper and grid. 10. Accessories: a. Equalizing grid. b. Plaster ring. c. Safety chain. d. Wire guard. e. Sectorizing baffles. f. Operating rod extension. C. Louver Face Diffuser. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Price Industries. b. Titus. 2. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable -air -volume flows. 3. Material: Aluminum. 4. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 5. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches. 6. Mounting: T -bar. 7. Pattem: One-way, Two-way, Two-way comer, Three-way, Four-way core style. 8. Dampers: Combination damper and grid. 9. Accessories: a. Square to round neck adaptor. b. Adjustable pattern vanes. c. Throw reducing vanes. d. Equalizing grid. e. Plaster ring. f. Safety chain. g. Wire guard. h. Sectorizing baffles. i. Operating rod extension. 2.2 REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. Adjustable Bar Register. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Price Industries. b. Titus. 2. Material: Aluminum. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Face Blade Arrangement: Vertical spaced 3/4 inch apart. 5. Core Construction: Removable. 6. Rear -Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 3/4 inch apart. 7. Frame: 1 inch wide. 8. 9. Mounting: Countersunk screw. 10. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade. DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 2 11. Accessories: a. Rear -blade gang operator. b. Filter. B_ Adjustable Bar Grille: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Price Industries. b. Titus. 2. Material: Aluminum. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Face Blade Arrangement: Vertical spaced 3/4 inch apart. 5. Core Construction: Removable. 6. Rear -Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 3/4 inch apart. 7. Frame: 1 inch wide. 8. Mounting: Countersunk screw. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. B. Ceiling -Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay -in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 3 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 233813 - COMMERCIAL -KITCHEN HOODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes Type I and Type II commercial kitchen hoods. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Listed Hood: A hood, factory fabricated and tested for compliance with UL 710 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standard Hood: A hood, usually field fabricated, that complies with design, construction, and performance criteria of applicable national and local codes. C. Type I Hood: A hood designed for grease exhaust applications. D. Type II Hood: A hood designed for heat and steam removal and for other nongrease applications. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Standard hoods. 2. Filters/bafes. 3. Fire -suppression systems. 4. Lighting fixtures. B. Welding certificates. C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that commercial kitchen hoods, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section 'Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports; and AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for joint and seam welding. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. COMMERCIAL -KITCHEN HOODS 233813 - 1 • • 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate equipment layout and installation with adjacent Work, including lighting fixtures, HVAC equipment, plumbing, and fire -suppression system components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HOOD MATERIALS A. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 1. Minimum Thickness: 0.050 inch. 2. Finish: Comply with SSINA's "Finishes for Stainless Steel" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. a. Finish shall be free from tool and die marks and stretch lines and shall have uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Grain shall run with long dimension of each piece. 3. Concealed Stainless -Steel Surfaces: ASTM A 480, No. 2B finish (bright, cold -rolled, unpolished finish). 4. Exposed Surfaces: ASTM A 480, No. 3 finish (intermediate polished surface). 5. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. B. Carbon -Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008, cold -rolled sheets; commercial quality; with oiled, exposed matte finish. 1. Minimum Thickness: 0.043 inch. C. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: Lock -forming quality; ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation. 1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 inch. D. Zinc -Coated Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated according to ASTM A 123 requirements. E. Sealant ASTM C 920; Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. Elastomeric sealant shall be NSF certified for commercial kitchen hood application. Sealants, when cured and washed, shall comply with requirements in 21 CFR, Section 177.2600, for use in areas that come in contact with food. 1. Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Backer Rod: Closed -cell polyethylene, in diameter larger than joint width. F. Sound Dampening: NSF -certified, nonabsorbent, hard -drying, sound -deadening compound for permanent adhesion to metal in minimum 1/8 -inch thickness that does not chip, flake, or blister. G. Gaskets: NSF certified for end-use application indicated; of resilient rubber, neoprene, or PVC that is nontoxic, stable, odorless, nonabsorbent, and unaffected by exposure to foods and cleaning compounds, and that passes testing according to UL 710. 2.2 GENERAL HOOD FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Welding: Use welding rod of same composition as metal being welded. Use methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metal. Make ductile welds free of mechanical imperfections such as gas holes, pits, or cracks. 1. Welded Butt Joints: Full -penetration welds for full -joint length. Make joints flat, continuous, and homogenous with sheet metal without relying on straps under seams, filling in with solder, or spot welding. 2. Grind exposed welded joints flush with adjoining material and polish to match adjoining surfaces. 3. Where fasteners are welded to underside of equipment, finish reverse side of weld smooth and flush. 4. Coat concealed stainless-steel welded joints with metallic -based paint to prevent corrosion. 5. After zinc -coated steel is welded, clean welds and abraded areas and apply SSPC-Paint 20, high - zinc -dust -content, galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. B. For metal butt joints, comply with SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines." C. Where stainless steel is joined to a dissimilar metal, use stainless-steel welding material or fastening devices. COMMERCIAL -KITCHEN HOODS 233813 - 2 • • D. Form metal with break bends that are not flaky, scaly, or cracked in appearance; where breaks mar uniform surface appearance of material, remove marks by grinding, polishing, and finishing. E. Sheared Metal Edges: Finish free of burrs, fins, and irregular projections. F. In food zones, as defined in NSF, fabricate surfaces free from exposed fasteners. G. Cap exposed fastener threads, including those inside cabinets, with stainless-steel lock washers and stainless-steel cap (acorn) nuts. H. Fabricate pipe slots on equipment with tumed-up edges sized to accommodate service and utility lines and mechanical connections. I. Fabricate enclosures, including panels, housings, and skirts, to conceal service lines, operating components, and mechanical and electrical devices including those inside cabinets, unless otherwise indicated. J. Fabricate seismic restraints according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines," Appendix 1, "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Kitchen Equipment." K. Fabricate equipment edges and badksplashes according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines." L. Fabricate enclosure panels to ceiling and wall as follows: 1. Wall Offset Spacer. Minimum of 3 inches. 2. Wall Shelves and Overshelves: Fabricate according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines," with minimum 0.0625 -inch thick, stainless-steel shelf tops. 2.3 TYPE I EXHAUST HOOD FABRICATION A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Weld all joints exposed to grease with continuous welds, and make filters/baffles or grease extractors and makeup air diffusers easily accessible for cleaning. 1. Fabricate hoods according to NSF 2, "Food Equipment." 2. Hoods shall be listed and labeled, according to UL 710, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Duct Collars: Minimum 0.0598 -inch thick steel at least 3 inches long, continuously welded to top of hood and at comers. Fabricate a collar with a 0.5 -inch wide duct flange. D. Hood Configuration: Exhaust only. 1. Makeup air shall be introduced through laminar -flow -type, perforated metal diffusers mounted in the ceiling. E. Hood Style: Back shelf. F. Filters/Baffles: Removable, stainless-steel. Fabricate stainless steel for filter frame and removable collection cup and pitched trough. Exposed surfaces shall be pitched to drain to collection cup. Fitters/baffles shall be tested according to UL 1046, "Grease Filters for Exhaust Ducts," by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. G. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for hood controls. H. Hood Controls: 1. Exhaust Fan: On-off switches on cooking equipment shall start and stop the exhaust fan. Interlock exhaust fan with makeup air supply fan to operate simultaneously. Interlock exhaust fan with fire - suppression system to operate fan(s) during fire -suppression -agent release and to remain in operation until manually stopped. Include red pilot light to indicate fan operation. Motor starters shall comply with Division 26 Section "Enclosed Controllers." COMMERCIAL -KITCHEN HOODS 233813 - 3 • • • 2.4 TYPE II EXHAUST HOOD FABRICATION A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Fabricate hoods according to NSF 2, "Food Equipment." D. Fabricate hoods to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards: Metal and Flexible." E. Hood Configuration: Exhaust only. 1. Makeup air shall be introduced through laminar -flow -type, perforated metal diffusers in ceiling. F. Hood Type: Heat and vapor removal. G. Hood Style: Wall -mounted canopy. H. Condensate Hood Baffles: Removable, stainless-steel baffles to drain into a hood drain trough, and stainless-steel drain piping. 2.5 WET -CHEMICAL FIRE -SUPPRESSION SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: B. Description: Engineered distribution piping designed for automatic detection and release or manual release of fire -suppression agent by hood operator. Fire -suppression system shall be listed and labeled for complying with NFPA 17A, 'Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems," by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Steel Pipe, NPS 2 and Smaller. ASTM A 53, Type S, Grade A, Schedule 40, plain ends. 2. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300. 3. Piping, fusible links and release mechanism, tank containing the suppression agent, and controls shall be factory installed. Controls shall be in stainless-steel control cabinet mounted on wall. Fumish manual pull station for wall mounting. Exposed piping shall be covered with chrome -plated aluminum tubing. Exposed fittings shall be chrome plated. 4. Liquid Extinguishing Agent: Non -corrosive, low -pH liquid. 5. Fumish electric -operated gas shutoff valve with clearly marked open and closed indicator for field installation. 6. Fire -suppression system controls shall be integrated with controls for fans, lights, and fuel supply and located in a single cabinet for each group of hoods immediately adjacent. 7. Wiring shall have color -coded, numbered terminal blocks and grounding bar. Spare terminals for fire alarm, optional wiring to start fan with fire alarm, red pilot light to indicate fan operation, and control switches shall all be factory wired in control cabinet with relays or starters. Include spare terminals for fire alarm, and wiring to start fan with fire alarm. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing -in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Complete field assembly of hoods where required. 1. Make dosed butt and contact joints that do not require filler. 2. Grind field welds on stainless-steel equipment smooth, and polish to match adjacent finish. Comply with welding requirements in Part 2 "General Hood Fabrication Requirements" Article. COMMERCIAL -KITCHEN HOODS 233813 - 4 • • • B. Install hoods and associated services with clearances and access for maintaining, cleaning, and servicing hoods, filters/baffles, grease extractor, and fire -suppression systems according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Securely anchor and attach items and accessories to walls, floors, or bases with stainless-steel fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. D. Install hoods to operate free from vibration. E. Install seismic restraints according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines," Appendix 1, "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Kitchen Equipment" F. Install trim strips and similar items requiring fasteners in a bed of sealant. Fasten with stainless-steel fasteners at 48 inches o.c. maximum. G. Install sealant in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous joint backing, unless otherwise indicated. Provide airtight, watertight, vermin -proof, sanitary joints. H. Install lamps, with maximum recommended wattage, in equipment with integral lighting. I. Set initial temperatures, and calibrate sensors. J. Set field -adjustable switches. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect ducts according to requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." Install flexible connectors on makeup air supply duct. Weld exhaust -duct connections with continuous liquidtightjoint. C. Install fire -suppression piping for remote -mounted suppression systems according to NFPA 17A, "Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Test each equipment item for proper operation. Repair or replace equipment that is defective, including units that operate below required capacity or that operate with excessive noise or vibration. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3. Test water, drain, gas, and liquid -carrying components for leaks. Repair or replace leaking components. 4. Perform hood performance tests required by authorities having jurisdiction. 5. Perform fire -suppression system performance tests required by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial kitchen hoods. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 233813 COMMERCIAL -KITCHEN HOODS 233813 - 5 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 234100 - PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes factory -fabricated air -filter devices and media used to remove particulate matter from air for HVAC applications. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. DOP: Dioctyl phthalate or bis-(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. B. HEPA: High -efficiency particulate air. C. ULPA: Ultra low penetration air. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include dimensions; operating characteristics; required clearances and access; rated flow capacity, including initial and final pressure drop at rated airflow; efficiency and test method; fire classification; fumished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details to illustrate component assemblies and attachments. 1. Show filter rack assembly, dimensions, materials, and methods of assembly of components. 2. Include setting drawings, templates, and requirements for installing anchor bolts and anchorages. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of filter and rack to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air filters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements." B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with ARI 850. D. Comply with ASHRAE 52.1 and ASHRAE 52.2 for method of testing and rating air -filter units. E. Comply with NFPA 70 for installing electrical components. F. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION 234100 - 1 • • • 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Fumish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Provide one complete set of filters for each filter bank. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Air Filters, Electrostatic Air Cleaners, and Filter -Holding Systems: a. AAF International. b. Farr Co. c. International Air Filtration Corporation. 2.2 EXTENDED -SURFACE, DISPOSABLE PANEL FILTERS A. Description: Factory -fabricated, dry, extended -surface filters with holding frames. B. Media: Fibrous material formed into deep -V-shaped pleats with anti -microbial agent and held by self- supporting wire grid. C. Media and Media -Grid Frame: Nonflammable cardboard. D. Duct -Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners, and suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks. 2.3 SIDE -SERVICE HOUSINGS A. Description: Factory -assembled, side -service housings, constructed of galvanized steel, with flanges to connect to duct system. B. Access Doors: Continuous gaskets on perimeter and positive -locking devices. C. Sealing: Incorporate positive -sealing gasket material on channels to seal top and bottom of filter cartridge frames to prevent bypass of unfiltered air. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install filter frames according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter holding frames to substrate. C. Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air. D. Coordinate filter installations with duct and air -handling unit installations. E. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections. F. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.2 CLEANING A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air -handling and air -distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filter media. END OF SECTION 234100 PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION 234100 - 2 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 237413 - PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes packaged, outdoor, central -station air -handling units (rooftop units) with the following components and accessories: 1. Direct -expansion cooling. 2. Hot -gas reheat. 3. Electric -heating coils. 4. Gas fumace. 5. Economizer outdoor- and retum-air damper section. 6. Integral, space temperature controls. 7. Roof curbs. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. DDC: Direct -digital controls. B. ECM: Electrically commutated motor. C. Outdoor -Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the outdoor -air stream to reject heat during cooling operations and to absorb heat during heating operations. "Outdoor air" is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system. D. Outdoor -Air Refrigerant -Coil Fan: The outdoor -air refrigerant -coil fan in RTUs. "Outdoor air" is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system. E. RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, this abbreviation means packaged, outdoor, central -station air - handling units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit is mounted on the roof or on a concrete base on ground. F. Supply -Air Fan: The fan providing supply air to conditioned space. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus. G. Supply Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the supply -air stream to absorb heat (provide cooling) during cooling operations and to reject heat (provide heating) during heating operations. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus. H. VVT: Variable -air volume and temperature. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: RTUs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. 1. The term 'Withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each RTU, including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, fumished specialties, and accessories. PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS 237413 - 1 B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, Toads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Manufacturer Wind Loading Qualification Certification: Submit certification that specified equipment will withstand wind forces identified in "Performance Requirements" Article and in Division 23 Section Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculations. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of wind force and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that RTUs, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in "Performance Requirements" Article and in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. E. Coordination Drawings: Plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Structural members to which RTUs will be attached. 2. Roof openings 3. Roof curbs and flashing. F. Field quality -control test reports. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For RTUs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ARI Compliance: 1. Comply with ARI 210/240 and ARI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs. 2. Comply with ARI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs. B. ASHRAE Compliance: 1. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air -Conditioning." D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. E. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995. F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components of RTUs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion. PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS 237413 - 2 2. Warranty Period for Gas Fumace Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not Tess than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Solid -State Ignition Modules: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Fumish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fan Belts: One set for each belt -driven fan. 2. Filters: One set of filters for each unit. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2.2 CASING A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced double-wall insulated panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to intemal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed. B. Exterior Casing Material: Galvanized steel with factory -painted finish, with pitched roof panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs. 1. Exterior Casing Thickness: 0.052 inch thick. C. Inner Casing Fabrication Requirements: 1. Inside Casing: Galvanized steel, 0.028 inch thick. D. Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. 1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Liner materials shall have air -stream surface coated with an erosion- and temperature -resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric. 4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. E. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of galvanized -steel sheet, a minimum of 2 inches deep, and complying with ASHRAE 62.1-2004. 1. Double -Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal moisture tight. 2. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple. 3. Pan -Top Surface Coating: Corrosion -resistant compound. F. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1- 2004. 2.3 FANS A. Belt -Driven Supply -Air Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, single - speed motor installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the casing. Aluminum or painted - steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted -steel fan scrolls. B. Condenser -Coil Fan: Propeller, mounted on shaft of permanently lubricated motor. C. Relief -Air Fan: Propeller, shaft mounted on permanently lubricated motor. PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS 237413 - 3 D. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate fan section, intemal mounting frame and attachment to fans, fan housings, motors, casings, accessories, and other fan section components with reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section 'Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" when fan -mounted frame and RTU -mounted frame are anchored to building structure. E. Fan Motor. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 2.4 COILS A. Supply -Air Refrigerant Coil: 1. Copper -plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing -type vertical distributor. 2. Polymer strip shall prevent all copper coil from contacting steel coil frame or condensate pan. 3. Coil Split: Interlaced. 4. Condensate Drain Pan: Galvanized steel with corrosion -resistant coating formed with pitch and drain connections complying with ASHRAE 62.1-2004. B. Outdoor -Air Refrigerant Coil: 1. Copper plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing -type vertical distributor. 2. Polymer strip shall prevent all copper coil from contacting steel coil frame or condensate pan. C. Hot -Gas Reheat Refrigerant Coil: 1. Copper -plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing -type vertical distributor. 2. Polymer strip shall prevent all copper coil from contacting steel coil frame or condensate pan. D. Electric -Resistance Heating: 1. Open Heating Elements: Resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percent chromium, supported and insulated by floating ceramic bushings recessed into casing openings, fastened to supporting brackets, and mounted in galvanized -steel frame. Terminate elements in stainless-steel machine - staked terminals secured with stainless-steel hardware. 2. Overtemperature Protection: Disk -type, automatically reset, thermal -cutout, safety device; serviceable through terminal box. 3. Overcurrent Protection: Manual -reset thermal cutouts, factory wired in each heater stage. 4. Control Panel: Unit mounted with disconnecting means and overcurrent protection. Include the following controls: a. Mercury contactors. b. Step Controller: Pilot lights and override toggle switch for each step. c. SCR Controller. Pilot lights operate on load ratio, a minimum of five steps. d. Time -delay relay. e. Airflow proving switch. 2.5 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS A. Compressor. Hermetic, scroll, mounted on vibration isolators; with intemal overcurrent and high- temperature protection, intemal pressure relief, and crankcase heater. B. Refrigeration Specialties: 1. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element. 2. Refrigerant filter/dryer. 3. Manual -reset high-pressure safety switch. 4. Automatic -reset low-pressure safety switch. 5. Minimum off -time relay. 6. Automatic -reset compressor motor thermal overload. 7. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines. 8. Low -ambient kit high-pressure sensor. 9. Hot -gas reheat solenoid valve with a replaceable magnetic coil. 10. Four-way reversing valve with a replaceable magnetic coil, thermostatic expansion valves with bypass check valves, and a suction line accumulator. 2.6 AIR FILTRATION A. Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS 237413 - 4 • r r 1. Pleated: MERV 8. 2.7 GAS FURNACE A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; complying with ANSI Z21.47 and NFPA 54. 1. CSA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of CSA. B. Bumers: Stainless steel. 1. Fuel: Propane gas. 2. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark or hot -surface igniter with flame sensor. 3. High -Altitude Kit: For Project elevations more than 2000 feet above sea level. C. Heat -Exchanger and Drain Pan: Stainless steel. D. Power Vent: Integral, motorized centrifugal fan interlocked with gas valve. E. Safety Controls: 1. Gas Control Valve: Two stage. 2. Gas Train: Single -body, regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing pilot solenoid valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff. 2.8 DAMPERS A. Outdoor -Air Damper. Linked damper blades, for 0 to 25 percent outdoor air, with motorized damper filter. B. Outdoor- and Retum-Air Mixing Dampers: Parallel- or opposed -blade galvanized -steel dampers mechanically fastened to cadmium plated for galvanized -steel operating rod in reinforced cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously. 1. Damper Motor. Modulating with adjustable minimum position. 2. Relief -Air Damper. Gravity actuated or motorized, as required by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, with bird screen and hood. 2.9 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTION A. Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit -mounted disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control -circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection. 2.10 CONTROLS A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC." B. Basic Unit Controls: 1. Control -voltage transformer. 2. Wall -mounted thermostat or sensor with the following features: a. Heat -cool -off switch. b. Fan on -auto switch. c. Fan -speed switch. d. Manual changeover. e. Adjustable deadband. f. Exposed set point. g. Exposed indication. h. Degree F indication. i. Unoccupied -period -override push button. j. Data entry and access port to input temperature and humidity set points, occupied and unoccupied periods, and output room temperature and humidity, supply -air temperature, operating mode, and status. 3. Wall -mounted humidistat or sensor with the following features: a. Concealed set point. b. Concealed indication. 4. Remote Wall -Mounted Annunciator Panel for Each Unit: a. Lights to indicate power on, cooling, heating, fan running, filter dirty, and unit alarm or failure. b. DDC controller or programmable timer and interface with HVAC instrumentation and control system. PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS 237413 - 5 c. Digital display of outdoor -air temperature, supply -air temperature, retum-air temperature, economizer damper position, indoor -air quality, and control parameters. C. DDC Controller: 1. Controller shall have volatile -memory backup. 2. Safety Control Operation: a. Smoke Detectors: Stop fan and close outdoor -air damper if smoke is detected. Provide additional contacts for alarm interface to fire alarm control panel. b. Firestats: Stop fan and dose outdoor -air damper if air greater than 130 deg F enters unit. Provide additional contacts for alarm interface to fire alarm control panel. c. Fire Alarm Control Panel Interface: Provide control interface to coordinate with operating sequence described in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm." d. Low -Discharge Temperature: Stop fan and close outdoor -air damper if supply air temperature is less than 40 deg F. e. Defrost Control for Condenser Coil: Pressure differential switch to initiate defrost sequence. 3. Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods on 365 -day clock with a minimum of four programmable periods per day. 4. Unoccupied Period: a. Heating Setback: 55 deg F. b. Cooling Setback: System off. c. Override Operation: Two hours. 5. Supply Fan Operation: a. Occupied Periods: Run fan continuously. b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle fan to maintain setback temperature. 6. Refrigerant Circuit Operation: a. Occupied Periods: Cycle or stage compressors, and operate hot -gas bypass to match compressor output to cooling load to maintain room temperature and humidity. Cycle condenser fans to maintain maximum hot -gas pressure. Operate low -ambient control kit to maintain minimum hot -gas pressure. b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle compressors and condenser fans for heating to maintain setback temperature. c. Switch reversing valve for heating or cooling mode on air-to-air heat pump. 7. Hot -Gas Reheat -Coil Operation: a. Occupied Periods: Humidistat opens hot -gas valve to provide hot -gas reheat, and cycles compressor. b. Unoccupied Periods: Reheat not required. 8. Gas Fumace Operation: a. Occupied Periods: Stage burner to maintain room temperature. b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle bumer to maintain setback temperature. 9. Electric -Heating -Coil Operation: a. Occupied Periods: Stage coil to maintain room temperature. b. Unoccupied Periods: Energize coil to maintain setback temperature. 10. Economizer Outdoor -Air Damper Operation: a. Occupied Periods: Open to for minimum intake, and maximum 100 percent of the fan capacity to comply with ASHRAE Cycle II. Controller shall permit air -side economizer operation when outdoor air is less than 60 deg F. Use mixed -air temperature and select between outdoor -air and return -air enthalpy to adjust mixing dampers. Start relief -air fan with end switch on outdoor -air damper. During economizer cycle operation, lock out cooling. b. Unoccupied Periods: Close outdoor -air damper and open retum-air damper. 2.11 ROOF CURBS A. Roof curbs with vibration isolators and wind or seismic restraints are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion -protection coating, watertight gaskets, and factory -installed wood nailer, complying with NRCA standards. 1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. a. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or II. b. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the intemal surface of curb. a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet. PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS 237413 - 6 c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air -stream surface coated with a temperature -resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric depending on service air velocity. d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. C. Curb Height 14 inches. D. Wind and Seismic Restraints: Metal brackets compatible with the curb and casing, painted to match RTU, used to anchor unit to the curb, and designed for loads at Project site. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for wind -load requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of RTUs. B. Examine roughing -in for RTUs to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections before equipment installation. C. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where RTUs will be installed. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure, according to NRCA's "Low -Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts. B. Install wind and seismic restraints according to manufacturer's written instructions. Wind and seismically restrained vibration isolation roof -curb rails are specified in Division 23 Section 'Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap. B. Install piping adjacent to RTUs to allow service and maintenance. 1. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section "Facility Natural -Gas Piping." Connect gas piping to bumer, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for bumer removal and service. C. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb. 2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under entire roof curb. 3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." 4. Install retum-air duct continuously through roof structure. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements. PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS 237413 - 7 2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie -down straps. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE A. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the following: 1. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing. 2. Inspect for visible damage to fumace combustion chamber. 3. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, coils, and fans. 4. Inspect intemal insulation. 5. Verify that labels are clearly visible. 6. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. 7. Verify that controls are connected and operable. 8. Verify that filters are installed. 9. Clean condenser coil and inspect for construction debris. 10. Clean flue and inspect for construction debris. 11. Connect and purge gas line. 12. Remove packing from vibration isolators. 13. Inspect operation of barometric relief dampers. 14. Verify lubrication on fan and motor bearings. 15. Inspect fan -wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding. 16. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. 17. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions. a. Start refrigeration system. b. Do not operate below recommended low -ambient temperature. c. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report. 18. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences. 19. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer. 20. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing. Adjust burner for peak efficiency. a. Measure gas pressure on manifold. b. Inspect operation of power vents. c. Measure combustion -air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber. d. Measure flue -gas temperature at fumace discharge. e. Perform flue -gas analysis. Measure and record flue -gas carbon dioxide and oxygen concentration. f. Measure supply -air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing rate and when bumer is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air. 21. Calibrate thermostats. 22. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits. 23. Inspect outdoor -air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with retum-air dampers. 24. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following when ambient is a minimum of 15 deg F above retum-air temperature: a. Coil leaving -air, dry- and wet -bulb temperatures. b. Coil entering -air, dry- and wet -bulb temperatures. c. Outdoor -air, dry-bulb temperature. d. Outdoor -air -coil, discharge -air, dry-bulb temperature. 25. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown. 26. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve. a. Supply -air volume. b. Retum-air volume. c. Relief -air volume. d. Outdoor -air intake volume. 27. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following: a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot -gas pressures. b. Short circuiting of air through condenser coil or from condenser fans to outdoor -air intake. 28. Verify operation of remote panel including pilot -light operation and failure modes. Inspect the following: a. High-temperature limit on gas-fired heat exchanger. PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS 237413 - 8 b. Low-temperature safety operation. c. Filter high-pressure differential alarm. d. Economizer to minimum outdoor -air changeover. e. Relief -air fan operation. f. Smoke and firestat alarms. 29. After startup and performance testing and prior to Substantial Completion, replace existing filters with new filters. 3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on- site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site during other -than -normal occupancy hours for this purpose. B. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTU and air -distribution systems, dean filter housings and install new filters. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain RTUs. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 237413 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS 237413 - 9 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 260500 — BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. All drawings and all Divisions of these specifications shall be considered as a whole and work of this Division shown anywhere therein shall be fumished under this Division. B. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of equipment and wiring. Most direct routing of conduits and wiring is not assured. Exact requirements shall be govemed by architectural, structural and mechanical conditions of the job. Consult all other drawings in preparation of the bid. Extra lengths of wiring or addition of pull or junction boxes, etc., necessitated by such conditions shall be included in the bid. Check all information and report any apparent discrepancies before submitting bid. C. Should there be any discrepancies or a question of intent, refer the matter to the Architect/Engineer/Area Construction Manager for a decision before ordering any equipment, materials or before starting any related work. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Above Grade: Not buried in ground or embedded in concrete slab on grade. B. Below Grade: Buried in ground or embedded in concrete slab. C. Concealed: Inside building above grade and located within walls, furred spaces, crawl spaces, attics, above suspended ceilings, etc. Any item not visible or directly accessible. D. Connect: Complete hookup of item with required services, including conduit, wires and other accessories. E. Exposed: Either visible or subject to mechanical or weather damage, indoors or outdoors, including areas such as mechanical and storage rooms. In general any item that is directly accessible without removing panels, walls, ceilings, or other parts of structure. F. Fumish: Supply and deliver complete. G. Install: Place, secure and connect as required to make fully operational (Perform work). H. Provide: See fumish above. I. Underground: Buried in ground, including under building slabs J. Use (verb): Fumish and install as defined above. K. Wiring: Electrical raceway, conductors and connection. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Carefully examine the contract documents, visit the site, and thoroughly become familiar with the local conditions relating to the work. Failure to do so will not relieve the contractor of the obligations of the Contract. B. After all equipment, devices and raceways are installed and wires and cables are in place and connected to devices and equipment, test the system for continuity, proper phase rotation, short circuit, improper grounds, BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 1 • 1.5 polarity and other defects. If defective condition is present, make all necessary corrections and retest for compliance. Test systems for proper operation and demonstrate the operation of the system to the Architect/Engineer/Area Construction Manager. COORDINATION A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow. 1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured -in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural components as they are constructed. B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building. C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components fumished by utility companies. 1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and services, including provision for electricity -metering components. 2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company providing electrical power and other services. D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished surfaces. E. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field -finished surfaces, coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface. F. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical ceilings and similar finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation. 1.6 WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Electrical installation shall be completed by licensed electricians, from an electrical contracting firm with at least five years of successful electrical installation experience on projects utilizing electrical components similar to those in both size and type, to those required for this project. All specialties, including computer isolated ground/ dedicated circuit power, and low voltage wiring installations shall be performed by an electrician qualified in the maintenance and installation of such systems. 1.7 SCOPE OF WORK A. Fumish, erect, install, connect, clean, adjust, test, condition and place into service all material and equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and recommendations except as otherwise noted and provide all labor required to complete the work shown on the drawings and/or specified in all Sections of Division 26 and all other work and miscellaneous items, not specifically mentioned, for a complete installation including all accessories required for testing the system. Such that the system is complete, code compliant and ready for operation. B. Apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on drawings, but mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, or any incidental accessories necessary to make the work complete and ready for operation, even though not specified or shown on the drawings, shall be furnished and installed without additional expense to the owner. C. Delivery and Storage: Receive, handle, and store electrical items and materials at the project site. Materials and electrical items shall be so placed that they are protected from damage, weather, environmental factors and deterioration. D. Secure and pay for all permits, govemmental fees, taxes and licenses necessary for the proper execution and completion of Division 26 work. E. Submit to govemmental agencies and utility companies shop drawings, cutsheets, calculations, or installation drawings for the emergency lighting and exit sign system, life safety/fire alarm system, or any other system or installation element that are required by these agencies, for their approval. F. Maintenance Manuals: Submit two copies of maintenance manuals in hard bound covers containing shop drawings and manufacturers' repair manuals, guarantees, operating instructions, wiring diagrams and parts lists to Area Construction Manager. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 2 G. Instruction Manuals: Submit two complete instruction manuals for any specialty system installed to Area Construction Manager. H. Field Record Drawings: Submit field record drawings for the work in accordance with the General Conditions to Area Construction Manager. 1.8 CODE COMPLIANCE A. Comply with NFPA 70. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. All OSHA and safety code requirements. D. Materials and installation shall comply with codes, laws and ordinances of Federal, State, local goveming bodies having jurisdiction. E. In every installation where regulations of electric utility and telephone companies apply, conformance with their regulations is mandatory and any costs involved shall be included in the Contract. F. In case of differences between building codes, State and Federal laws, local ordinances and utility company regulations and the Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govem. G. In case of differences between means, materials, or methods indicated in these specifications and those indicated in the construction documents, the more stringent shall govem. H. Should work be performed which does not comply with the requirements of the applicable building codes, State and Federal laws, local ordinances, industry standards and utility company regulations, changes for compliance shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner. I. Notify the Architect/Engineer/Area Construction Manager of any materials or apparatus believed to be inadequate, unsuitable, in violation of laws, ordinances, rules or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.9 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: This special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owners acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.' 1.10 ALTERNATES A. Altemate Materials, fixtures, apparatus or equipment installed without written approval shall be removed by the Contractor and replaced with specified equipment at the direction of the Architect/Engineer/Area Construction Manager and without recourse for additional compensation. B. Acceptance of alternates shall include provisions necessary to alter, adjust or otherwise modify work affected by the alteration. C. Field record drawings shall include altemate work and shall reflect changes necessitated to other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials, equipment and accessories shall be new, UL listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended us, and shall bear the manufacturer's name, model number and other identification marking. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 3 B. Materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of the required type of material or equipment for at least five years (unless specifically exempted by the Architect/Engineer) and shall be the manufacturer's latest design with published properties. C. Equipment and materials of the same general type shall be of the same manufacture throughout the project to provide uniform appearance, operation and maintenance. D. Equipment and materials shall be without blemish or defect and shall not be used for temporary light or power purposes, including lamps, without the Architect's/Engineer/Area Construction Manager's written authorization. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A. All listed materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with their listing. B. The drawings for work under Division 26 are diagrammatic and are intended to convey the scope of work and indicate the general arrangement of conduit, boxes, equipment, fixtures and other work included in the Contract. C. Location of items required by the drawings or specifications not definitely fixed by dimensions are approximate only and exact locations necessary to secure the best conditions and results shall be determined at the site and shall be subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer/Area Construction Manager. D. Follow drawings in laying out work, check drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which work will be installed, and maintain maximum headroom and space conditions at all points: 1. Where headroom or space conditions appear inadequate, the Architect/Engineer/ Area Construction Manager shall be notified before proceeding with installation. 2. Minor conduit rerouting and changes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Coordinate the mounting heights of electrical equipment and raceways to clear the opening heights of doors, the heights of vehicles (cars, trucks) and the heights of equipment which needs to be removed and replaced. E. Perform all work with skilled mechanics of the particular trade involved in a neat and workmanlike manner. F. Perform all work in cooperation with other trades and the construction schedule. G. Fumish other trades advance information on locations and sizes of frames, boxes, sleeves and openings needed for the work, and also furnish information and shop drawings necessary to permit trades affected to install their work properly and without delay. H. Where there is evidence that work of one trade will interfere with the work of other trades, all trades shall assist in working out space allocations to make satisfactory adjustments. I. With the approval of the Architect/Engineer/Area Construction Manager and without additional cost to the Owner, make minor modifications in the work as required by structural interferences, by interferences with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work. J. Work installed before coordinating with other trades so as to cause interference with the work of such other trades shall be changed to correct such condition without additional cost to the Owner and as directed by the Architect/Engineer/Area Construction Manager. K. Minor changes in the locations of outlets, fixtures and equipment shall be made prior to rough -in at the direction of the Architect/Engineer/Area Construction Manager and at no additional cost to the Owner. L. Electrical Contractor shall cooperate with other trades and coordinate work so that conflicts with other work are eliminated. M. Equipment shall be installed with adequate space allowed for removal, repair or changes to equipment. Ready accessibility to removable parts of equipment and to wiring shall be provided without moving other equipment that is to be installed or which is in place. Electrical Contractor shall verify measurements. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 4 Discrepancies shall be brought to the Architect/Engineer/Area Construction Manager's attention for interpretation. N. Determine temporary openings in the buildings that will be required for the admission of apparatus fumished under this Division, and notify the Architect/Engineer/Area Construction Manager accordingly. In the event of failure to give sufficient notice in time to arrange for these openings during construction, assume all costs of providing such openings thereafter. O. Sequence, coordinate and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. P. No work shall be concealed until after inspection and approval by proper authorities. If work is concealed without inspection and approval, the contractor shall be responsible for all work and costs required to open and restore the concealed areas in addition to all required modifications. Q. Electrical Contractor shall refer to contract documents for details, reflected ceiling plans, and large scale drawings; will also verify any conflicts between various trades. R. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. S. Coordinate connection/shut-off and disconnection of electrical service with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Also coordinate with owner and utility. Comply with requirements of goveming regulations, franchised service companies and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. T. Install systems, materials and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces. U. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. V. Verifications of Points of Connection: 1_ Before submitting his bid, Contractor shall visit site and contact city, owner and all utilities to verify location, size, depth and operating characteristics of points of connection. 2. If Contractor fails to notify Area Construction Manager in writing, it will be assumed that his bid includes everything required to provide proper connections to all present points of connection as they actually exist or as they will be provided by city or utilities, and will pay for all utility point of connection modifications, relocations, replacements, additional runs and extensions, without increase in contract price. 3. Electrical Contractor shall fumish all labor, material and equipment to completely install all work shown on drawings and specified herein, including: a. Installation of and final connections within HVAC control system supplied by others. b. Connection to mechanical equipment: HVAC power conductors and proper grounding conductors for HVAC equipment. c. Final connections to kitchen equipment. d. Complete and operable Telephone System. e. Complete and operable Cable TV system as required. f. Complete and operable Internet system as required 4. 3.2 COOPERATION A. Where jurisdictional rules require the assistance of electrical mechanics in the moving and setting of electrically powered equipment, provide such assistance. B. Where work covered by this section connects to equipment fumished under other sections, verify electrical work involved in the field and make proper connection to such equipment. 3.3 ALTERATIONS AND DEMOLITION A. Confer with the manufacturers of existing equipment that is to be revised or extended. B. Where existing electrical work prevents proper construction of new work as indicated, remove, reroute, relocate, or in other ways alter existing work in order to accommodate new work requirements. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 5 C. Remove suspended acoustical ceiling tiles necessary to facilitate the installation of the electrical work and restore the ceiling tiles after completion of the electrical work. Replace ceiling tiles damaged during the work with new tiles to match the existing in every respect. D. Where existing conduit, wire, supports, hangers, and other electrical work must be removed as a result of the alterations, they shall be completely removed, back to the first outlet which is left unaffected by the revision. Conduit which is buried in concrete or otherwise inaccessibly positioned may be abandoned. In such cases, wire shall be pulled out of conduit and the conduit itself plugged at each end. E. Existing electrical materials and equipment, including lighting fixtures, switches, receptacles, signal lights, speakers, intercom equipment, controls, conduit outlets, fittings, wire, cable, and other devices which are removed as a result of the alterations shall remain the property of the "Owner' and shall be stored on the site as directed. F. Existing electrical materials and equipment with the exception of wire and cable, as generally outlined in the previous paragraph, shall be re- used as completely as is found practicable. Examine the condition of such materials and equipment and make a prior determination of whether it is suitable for re -use. Present findings periodically to the Architect/Engineer/Area Construction Manager who in tum will make the final decision regarding re -usability. All wire and cable shall be new. G. In order to coordinate the work of the mechanical and electrical trades, completely remove all existing electrical work in and above ceilings of these areas (as defined on the Drawings), after which install new work and re -install existing work to remain, as shown on the Drawings. Existing lighting fixtures, clocks, speakers, signals, and other equipment shall be re -used except as otherwise noted. If fixtures must be utilized in areas with new ceiling tile, make arrangements for cutting new tile to accommodate fixtures. Some exceptions may arise wherein equipment, either in altered areas or other areas, must be kept in service, requiring that feeders, signal conductors, conduits, boxes, etc. serving same also be kept in service. In such cases, those electrical feeders, signal conductors, conduits, etc. shall be re-routed and re -connected before present work is removed. If this is not possible, temporary wiring shall be provided to allow for installation of mechanical work, after which new work shall be installed and temporary wiring removed. H. Various signal, communications, and other services shall remain in service to provide continuous operation for the Owner's functions. No interruption of any service will be allowed without written approval of the Owner. Remove or reroute all electrical feeders, risers, branch circuits, and other wiring as required by the alterations. Wiring extending through remodeled areas but serving loads which must remain shall be rerouted as required, and reconnected to those loads. 3.4 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING A. Excavating, bracing and shoring, testing, disposition of excess excavated material, provision of borrow, and placing of backfill shall be in accordance with Section Utilities Excavating and Backfilling. 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Do drilling, cutting, fitting, and patching necessary for the installation of conduits, wireways, and other electrical equipment, and provide supports necessary for the same and for bracing and anchorage of work. No cutting of structural work or of fireproofing shall be done without the written consent of the Architect/Engineer. B. Conduits passing through roofs or other surfaces exposed to weather shall be properly flashed as specified in roofing and waterproofing sections. This flashing work shall be part of this division of work. 3.6 CLEAN UP A. The Contractor shall, at all times, keep the premises free from the accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by his work and, at the completion of the work, shall remove his rubbish, tools, equipment and surplus materials; and shall leave his work clean and ready for use. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 6 • 3.7 EQUIPMENT NOISE LIMITATION A. Noise levels of electrical devices and equipment shall be within acceptable limits as established by NEMA or other valid noise rating agencies. Noise levels shall be subject to the Architect/Engineer/Area Construction Manager's acceptance, based on practical and reasonable considerations of occupancy requirements. B. Check and tighten the fastenings of sheet metal plates, covers, doors, trims, bus bars and all electrical connections to prevent vibration and chatter under normal conditions of use. C. Transformers, reactors, dimmers, lamp ballasts, and solenoids shall be designed and rated for "quiet" operation. D. Remove and replace any individual electrical item or device that is found to produce a sound energy output exceeding that of other identical devices installed at the project. 3.8 TRANSMISSION OF VIBRATION A. Electrical equipment, conduit, and fittings shall not be mounted to or supported by elements subject to vibration except by methods which will prevent transmission thereof. Where flexible lengths of conduit are utilized as a means of isolating equipment and conduit systems vibration, care shall be exercised to assure continuity of ground throughout. 3.9 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Mounting heights of electrical items shall be as listed on the drawings, unless otherwise required by local code requirements, the Americans with Disabilities Act, or by the Architect/Engineer's field instructions. Dimensions are above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. B. No switch, circuit breaker, fuse handle, disconnect or other similar device shall be mounted so that it is higher than 6'-7" AFF or working platform to comply with the readily accessible requirements of the code. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Protect conduit and wireway openings against the entrance of foreign matter by means of plugs or caps. Cover fixtures, materials, equipment and devices furnished or installed under this section or otherwise protect against damage, both before and after installation. Fixtures, materials, equipment, or devices damaged prior to final acceptance of the work shall be restored to their original condition or replaced. B. Equipment shall be inherently safe and moving parts shall be covered with guards. 3.11 TEMPORARY UTILITIES, LIGHTING AND HEAT A. Contractor's attention is directed to Division 01, which sets forth respective responsibilities of all concemed with fumishing temporary water, electricity, lighting and heat for use during construction of the Project. 3.12 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT OF DOCUMENTS A. In the event that conflicts, if any, cannot be settled promptly and amicably between the affected trades, with work proceeding in a workmanlike manner, then the Architect/Engineer/Area Construction Manager shall decide which work is to be relocated and their judgment shall be final and binding on this Contractor. 3.13 INSTRUCTIONS AND ADJUSTMENT A. The primary adjustments and operational instructions of the system(s) shall be accomplished by the Contractor to the complete satisfaction of the Owner and Architect/Engineer at the time of completion of the installation. END OF SECTION 260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 7 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 260510 — BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Supporting devices for electrical components. 2. Anchors, sleeves, inserts, hangers and supports. 3. Manholes 4. Access Panels 5. Electrical identification. 6. Electricity -metering components. 7. Concrete equipment bases. 8. Vibration isolation 9. Electrical demolition. 10. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. 11. Touchup painting. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow. 1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured -in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural components as they are constructed. B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building. C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components fumished by utility companies. 1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and services, including provision for electricity -metering components. 2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company providing electrical power and other services. D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished surfaces. E. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field -finished surfaces, coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface. F. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical ceilings and similar finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260510 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. See Division 05 "Metal Fabrications". 2.2 ANCHORS, SLEEVES, INSERTS, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts, hangers and supports required for the Electrical work shall be fumished and installed under Division 26. B. See Division 05 "Metal Fabrications" for additional requirements. C. Hangers and Supports: 1. Provide hangers, angles, channels, and other supports required by field conditions to install items of electrical equipment. Design of supports and methods of fastening to building structure shall be acceptable to the Architect/Engineer/ acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Provide spring hangers for vertical raceway supports. 2. No electrical items shall rest on, or depend for support on, suspended ceiling media (tiles, lath, plaster, splines, etc). 3. In suspended ceilings, support conduits directly from structural slabs, decks (or framing members). Do not support conduits on ceiling suspension members. 4. Support surface or pendant lighting fixture: a. From an outlet box by means of an interposed metal strap, where weight is less than 5 lbs. b. From an outlet box by means of a hickey or other direct threaded connection, where weight is from 5 to 50 Ib. c. Directly from structural slab, deck or framing member, where weight exceeds 50 lbs. 5. In addition to the above, provide cushioned, swivel type hangers with appropriate outlet boxes for pendant fixtures in mechanical areas. Such hangers shall have a support rating at least twice that of the load supported. 6. Provide weight -distribution facilities, where required so as not to exceed the load-bearing capabilities of floors or walls that bear the weight of, or support, electrical items. 7. Hangers and supports shall be hot dipped galvanized, unless noted otherwise. 8. Equipment shall not be held in place by its own dead weight. Provide base anchor fasteners in each case. 9. Trapeze type hangers may be used where several conduits are to be installed at the same elevation. The spacing of such trapeze hangers shall be in accordance with the NEC for the smallest conduit in the run. D. Sleeves and Openings: 1. Provide sleeves and wireways where they pass through walls or floors. 2. Sleeves shall be not less than 1" larger than outside dimension of raceways. 3. Floor sleeves shall be galvanized steel pipe or plastic, as approved by code and stubbed 3" above floor. Unused sleeves shall be capped. 4. Provide 3" high concrete curbs around openings through floors. 5. Sleeves through kitchen or storage areas, and customer dining or other similar quiet area shall have the net openings packed with glass fiber insulation and both ends of sleeve caulked with waterproof mastic to prevent noise, dirt, air and water transmission. The utility companies shall pack the inside of their sleeves. 6. Where conduits pass through floors or exterior walls, caulk sleeves with appropriate sealant at both ends to insure waterproofing around pipe. 7. Where conduits pass through foundation walls, provide entrance seals. 8. After the completed work is in place pack or fill sleeves and openings to prevent leakage of liquid and the spread of fire and smoke. 9. Fire rated walls/floors shall be firestopped to match rating of original construction. Materials and methods shall comply with Underwriters Laboratories Directory "Fire Resistance - Vol. 1 and Vol. 11". E. Inserts: 1. Inserts for suspended items in poured concrete construction shall be malleable -iron concrete inserts, adjustable type with insert nut. 2. Inserts for surface mounted items shall be suitable for the composition of the slab, wall, or structure on which installation is to be made. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260510 - 2 2.3 CABLE SUPPORTS A. Cable supports shall be compatible with wire and cable type and conduit size. 2.4 CABLE LUBRICANT A. The lubricant shall contain no waxes, greases, silicones or polyalkylene glycol oils or waxes. B. The lubricant shall have less than 6% solids residue after drying for 24 hours at 105°C. 2.5 CONDUCTIVE COMPOUNDS A. Copper base anti -corrosive conductive compound for conduit connections in earth or concrete in contact with earth. 2.6 MANHOLES A. Manholes shall be prefabricated reinforced concrete type suitable to sustain 100,000 lbs. live load of uniform distribution. B. The manholes shall include the following items: 1. Manhole cover and frame, heavy duty, U.S. Govemment standard design, clear opening 27"/30", approximate weight /600/800 lbs. Lids shall be lettered for respective service, either "Electric" or 'Telephone". Cover shall be bolted to frame with 2 pentagon head special monel security bolts. Fumish "Owner' one special wrench/Neenah R-1640 Series. 2. Pulling -in irons hot -dipped galvanized, placed one at each side. 3. Cable support brackets, hot -dipped galvanized, place vertically at each side of manhole 24" on center. 4. Sump - 8" soil pipe, 15" long and lightweight bar grate. 5. 12" wide manhole steps spaced 12" apart. 6. Ground rod 3/4" O.D. by 10'0" long/copper clad steel/stainless steel. Ground rod shall extend 4" above manhole floor. 2.7 ACCESS PANELS A. Panels shall be flangeless hinged type with vandal proof fasteners. B. Panels shall be fumished under Division 26 and shall be tumed over to the contractor who will install them. 2.8 IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL ITEMS A. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, and these Specifications. B. Raceway and Cable Labels: Comply with ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for legend and minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size: 1. Type: Pretensioned, wraparound plastic sleeves. Flexible, preprinted, color -coded, acrylic band sized to suit the diameter of the item it identifies. 2. Type: Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive, vinyl. Legend is overlaminated with a dear, weather- and chemical -resistant coating. 3. Color. Black letters on orange background. 4. Legend: Indicates voltage. C. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape, not Tess than 1 inch wide by 3 mils thick. D. Underground Waming Tape: Permanent, bright -colored, continuous -printed, vinyl tape with the following features: 1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. 2. Compounded for permanent direct -burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend that indicates type of underground line. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260510 - 3 E. Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl -doth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters. F. Color -Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme. G. Engraved -Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1/16 -inch minimum thickness for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8 -inch (3.2 - mm) minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on white background. H. Interior Waming and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. Preprinted, aluminum, baked -enamel -finish signs, punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application. I. Exterior Warning and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. Weather -resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose -acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396 -inch, galvanized -steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application. 1/4 -inch grommets in comers for mounting. J. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self -tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. 2.9 EQUIPMENT FOR UTILITY COMPANY'S ELECTRICITY METERING A. Current -Transformer Cabinets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company. Enclosure: NEMA Type 3R. B. Meter Sockets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company. C. Modular Meter Centers: Factory -coordinated assembly of a main meter center circuit -breaker unit with wireways, tenant meter socket modules, and tenant branch circuit breakers arranged in adjacent vertical sections, complete with interconnecting buses. 1. Housing: NEMA 250, Enclosure: Indoor. Type 1, Outdoor. Type 3R. 2. Tenant Branch Circuit Breakers: Series combination rated to protect circuit breakers in downstream panelboards that have 10,000-A interrupting capacity, minimum. 2.10 CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete Forms and Reinforcement Materials: As specified in Division 03 "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 2.11 VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Suspended vibration producing equipment shall have spring elements in the hanger rods or isolation pads under the equipment. 2.12 TOUCHUP PAINT A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc -rich paint recommended by item manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Different / Additional requirements will be necessary in areas requiring seismic restraints for electrical equipment and components. See Division 26 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems". 3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot -dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U -channel system component. B. Dry Locations: Steel materials. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260510 - 4 C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click -type clamp system. D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturers written instructions. E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future Toads, times a safety factor of at least four, minimum of 200 -Ib design load. 3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components. B. Raceway Supports shall comply with NFPA 70, other applicable codes, and manufacturer's requirements. C. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U -bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods and conduits. D. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket -type hangers. E. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in the future. F. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable -iron pipe hangers or clamps. G. Install 1/4 -inch (6 -mm) diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated. H. Spring -steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used instead of malleable -iron hangers for 1 -1/2 -inch (38 -mm) and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports. I. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals. J. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors. K. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheet - metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches from the box. L. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength. M. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core -drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire -rated gypsum walls and of all other fire -rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls. N. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are indicated: 1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails. 2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry units. 3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts. 4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts. 5. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers may be used in existing concrete if approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 6. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring -tension clamps on steel: a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 7. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps, or other items. 8. Light Steel: Sheet -metal screws. 9. Fasteners: Select so the Toad applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof -test load. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260510 - 5 3.4 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS PANELS A. Where items such as pull boxes, junction boxes, other specialties, or any piece of equipment or device requiring adjustment or service, are concealed in the construction, fumish an access panel for ceilings or walls to permit adjustment or service of concealed item. Design to be suitable for installation in the material forming the finished surface in which panel is mounted. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION FITTINGS A. At each building expansion joint and in each straight uninterrupted run of surface mounted conduit and vertical risers in excess of 100' an appropriate expansion fitting shall be provided, and the distance between fittings as installed shall not exceed 100 linear feet. 3.6 UTILITY COMPANY ELECTRICITY -METERING EQUIPMENT A. Install equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide grounding and empty conduits as required by utility company. 3.7 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to achieve fire - resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.8 CONCRETE BASES A. The Contractor shall provide concrete pedestals, bases, pads, curbs, anchor blocks, anchor bolts, slab inserts, hangers, channels, cradles, saddles, etc. for installation of equipment and apparatus. B. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger, in both directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's anchorage recommendations and setting templates for anchor -bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise indicated. II 3.9 DEMOLITION A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity, quality, and functionality. B. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be demolished, in their entirety. C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in place, 2 inches below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to match existing finish. D. Remove demolished material from Project site. E. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for relocation. 3.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved. B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work. Repair or replace as necessary; including the following: BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260510 - 6 1. Raceways. 2. Wire and Cable -600 Volt. 3. Supporting devices for electrical components. 4. Anchors, sleeves, inserts, hangers and supports. 5. Contractors 6. Lighting Contractors -Multiple Poles. 7. Metalic Conduit and Fittings. 8. Bushings. 9. Conduit Seals. 10. Expansion Fittings. 11. Cable Supports. 12. Cable Lubricant. 13. Conductive Compounds. 14. Cable and Feeder Taps and Splices. 15. Junction and Pullboxes. 16. Outlet Boxes. 17. Non-Metalic Conduit and Fittings -PVC. 18. Manholes. 19. Access Panels. 20. Time Switches and Photo Controls. 21. Wiring Devices. 22. Wiring Devices Plates. 23. Electrical Identification. 24. Electricity -Metering Components. 25. Concrete Equipment Bases. 26. Vibration Isolation. 27. Electrical Demolition. 28. Cutting and Patching for Electrical Construction. 29. Touchup Painting. 3.12 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 "Painting": 1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location. 2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive coats. 3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. 3.13 CLEANING CONDUITS AND DUCTS A. After conduits (ducts) and accessories have been installed, and concreting operations are completed, conduit runs shall be satisfactorily cleared of obstructions and foreign matter. Defects which might damage cable upon installation shall be corrected. Where conduits (ducts) installed are connected to conduits (ducts) installed by others, the entire run to the nearest box, manhole, or other termination point shall be cleaned. Clearing and cleaning shall be done by pulling through each conduit (duct) a flexible cylindrical mandrel having an outside diameter 1/4" less than the inside diameter of the conduit (duct). Defects and stoppages occurring in portions of the conduit (duct) run shall be corrected. 3.14 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris. B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 260510 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260510 - 7 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 260519 - LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600V or Less) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EPDM: Ethylene -propylene -diene terpolymer rubber. B. NBR: Acrylonitrile -butadiene rubber. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Field quality -control test reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor. Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with latest edition of NFPA 70. D. Manufacturer's Seismic Qualification Certification: As required, submit certification that enclosures, cabinets, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems°. Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on a calculation. 2. Dimensioned outline drawings of equipment unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1 • • 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of conductors and cables with other installations. B. Set sleeves in cast -in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Aluminum and Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70. B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THW, THHN-THWN, and XHHW. C. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal -clad cable, Type MC with ground wire in lengths not exceeding 72 inches for use as final connection for lighting fixtures. 2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Description: UL Listed Factory -fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and lass for application and service indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Service Entrance, from C/T Meter to Main Circuit Breaker. Copper. B. Transformer to C/T Meter Cabinet: Copper or Aluminum. C. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller, stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. D. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance: Type THW, single conductors in raceway, Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway, Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway; or use - RHW insulated single conductors in raceway. B. Exposed Feeders: Type THW, single conductors in raceway, Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THW, use - RHW, or XHHW-2 insulated single conductors in raceway, Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on -Grade, and Underground: Type THW, single conductors in raceway. E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THW or THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THW or THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on -Grade, and Underground: Type THW or THHN- THWN, single conductors in raceway. H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire - mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application. LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 2 I. Class 1 and Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, single insulated conductors in raceway. J. Fire Alarm Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, single insulated conductors in raceway or power limited, fire protective, signaling circuit cable as allowed by local authority having jurisdiction. K. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway, Power -limited cable, concealed in building finishes, Power -limited tray cable, in cable tray. L. Metal Clad (MC) Cable: Where permitted by local codes, Type MC consisting of THHW/THWN single insulated conductors and integral ground wire in lengths not exceeding 72 inches may be utilized for final connections to lighting fixtures within accessible ceiling spaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Install wires and cables as indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions, and NECA's "Standards of Installations." B. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. C. All wiring shall be installed in raceway unless otherwise indicated. D. Use manufacturer -approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. E. Examine raceways and building finishes receiving conductors and cables for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. F. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. G. Remove existing wire and cable from raceway before pulling in new wire and cable. All conductors shall be pulled into raceway simultaneously where more than one wire or cable is being installed within the same raceway. H. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. I. Branch circuit homeruns for 120 volt circuits over 80'-0" long and for 277 volt circuits over 120'-0° long shall be one standard wire size larger than the ampere rating of protective device before the application of any NEC de -rating factors. J. Wiring at receptacles and switches: Install conductors at each receptacle and switch, with at least 12 inches of slack. Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and train the conductors to tenninal points with no excess. Make terminations so that no bare conductor is visible at the terminal. K. Support cables according to Manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. L. Feeder cable runs consisting of 4 more parallel conductors per phase shall have cable limiter lugs installed. Limiter lugs shall be provided on both ends of each phase cable. Lugs shall be installed per manufacturer's instructions. M. Identify and color -code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." N. Seal around cables penetrating fire -rated elements according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 4866. LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 3 B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors. C. Splices and taps in wires up to No. 8 shall be made with "Shotch-lok" or T&B PT Series or Ideal Wing Nut insulated electrical connectors. For wires No. 8 and larger, use copper solderless connectors covered with electrical putty and then wrapped with electrical tape. Use twist -on wire connectors for connecting lighting fixtures and small motor leads up to No. 8 wire. D. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack. E. Terminal lugs for wires No. 8 and larger shall be compression type, unless noted otherwise. One -hole lugs for 4/0 AWG and smaller. Two -hole lugs for all sizes 250 KCMIL AWG and larger. Lug tang shall have full overlap contact at termination. 3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core -drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness: 1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. 2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch. E. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces. G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4 -inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance. I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies, or appropriate caulking as required by local Health Department. J. Interior Penetrations of Non -Fire -Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." K. Fire -Rated -Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." L. Roof -Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot -type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. M. Aboveground Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1 -inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. N. Underground Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron 'Wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1 -inch annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 4 3.6 SLEEVE -SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install to seal underground exterior -wall penetrations. B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.7 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire - resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test conductors and cables for. a. Electrical continuity. b. Insulation integrity. c. Demonstrate proper functioning of equipment. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 260519 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 5 McDonald's' USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Diawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other sections. B. Applications of electrical grounding and bonding work to be furnished and installed by the contractor in this section shall include, but not be limited to the following (as a minimum): 1. Underground metal water piping electrode. 2. Ground rod electrode. 3. Concrete encased electrodes. 4. Metal building frame electrodes. 5. Electrical power systems. 6. Other grounding electrodes. 7. Isolated grounding. 8. Telephone equipment. 9. CCTV equipment 10. CATV equipment. 11. Security equipment 12. Gas piping bonding. 13. HVAC ductwork bonding. 14. Raceways. 15. Service equipment. 16. Enclosures. 17. Equipment. 18. Lighting standards. 19. Landscape lighting. 20. Signs. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit detailed drawings, calculations, and/or test results to the authorities having jurisdiction where required for approval, showing all grounding details, grounding installation and material specifications. The woiic shall not proceed until this approval has been obtained. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Cornply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. C. Electrical System grounding and individual equipment grounding shall in all instances conform to the minimum requirements of NFPA 70, The National Electric Code, local codes or regulations, and regulations of the serving utilities, except where McDonald's corporate standards exceed those minimum requirements. D. Comply with latest NFPA 70. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1 • PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Grounding Conductors: 1. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables." 2. Material: Copper. 3. Equipment Grounding Conductors: 600 Volt Insulated copper with green -colored insulation. 4. Isolated Ground Conductors: 600 Volt Insulated copper with green -colored insulation with yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, altemating bands of green and yellow Tape to provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow. 5. !Grounding Electrode Conductors: 600 Volt stranded copper insulated conductors. 6. Feeder Grounding Conductors: 600 Volt stranded copper insulated conductors, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows: a. Bonding Conductor. No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor, unless otherwise indicated. b. Bonding Jumper. Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inches thick. 8. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulators. 2.2 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic -welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. 2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper -clad steel 5/8 in diameter by 96 inches long. B. Concrete encased ground (Ufer). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 8 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated. B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. 1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade. C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green -colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with altemating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow. D. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Bolted or Welded connectors. GROUNDING AND [BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 2 3.2 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements. B. Pad -Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and ground ring around the pad. Ground pad -mounted equipment and noncurrent -carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinned -copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for taps to equipment grounding terminals. Bury ground ring not Tess than 6 inches from the foundation. 3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated. B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. C. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Metal -clad cable runs. 8. Computer and Rack -Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch -circuit runs from equipment -area power panels and power -distribution units. D. Air -Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct -mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. E. Water Heater, Heat -Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat -tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. F. Technology/POS Isolated Ground/Dedicated Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor (green) and an insulated isolated grounding conductor (green with yellow strip) in a separate dedicated branch -circuit conduit run from subpanel to the junction box containing the isolated ground receptacle serving said equipment. Bond one end of the equipment grounding conductor (green) at the ground bus in source subpanel and the other to the junction box housing the isolated ground receptacle. Bond the isolated grounding conductor to the isolated ground bus in the source subpanel and the other to the isolated ground receptacle's isolated ground terminal. G. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. 1. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. H. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Provide a grounding electrode in addition to installing a separate equipment grounding conductor with supply branch -circuit conductors. Metal pole, grounding electrode, and equipment grounding conductor shall be bonded together to form a common ground point at the grounding lug of metal pole. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 3 protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit. C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any. 2. For grounding electrode system, install at least two rods spaced at least one -rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic -welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect -type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug -type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting or water meter is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided -type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. F. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. G. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each comer column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart. Bond exposed steel to building grounding system. H. Ufer Ground (Concrete -Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70, using a minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG. 1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet long, coil excess conductor within base of foundation. 2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building grounding system at service entrance. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: C. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground -resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall -of -potential method according to IEEE 81. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 4 3. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. D. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Engineer of Record promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 5 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing. C. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. D. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. E. LF MC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. F. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. G. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by .9 testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. The following wiring methods SHALL NOT be used: Non -Metallic sheathed cable (Romex, NM, NMC and NMS), Armored Cable Type AC (BX), Electrical Non -Metallic Tubing, Type ENT (Smurf-Tube). 1.5 COORDINATION: A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system and partition assemblies. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide conduit and fittings of types, grades sizes and wall thickness for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection to fulfill wiring requirements listed within this specification and to comply with the applicable portions of the NEC and local, state and federal codes for raceways and installations. B. Provide complete raceway systems and enclosures for all wiring throughout the extent of the systems specified. RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1 2.2 METAL. CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. RMC: Provide rigid steel, zinc coated, threaded type conforming to ANSI C80.1 and UL6. B. IMC: Rigid intermediate grade hot -dip galvanized, threaded type conforming to ANSI C80.6 and UL124Z. C. EMT and Fittings: Zinc coated steel conforming to ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. 1. Fittings: Set -screw or compression type by application and requirements listed in raceway application section. Indenter type and cast fittings shall not be utilized. D. FMC: Formed from continuous length of spirally wound, interlocked zinc -coated steel conforming to UL1. E. LFMC: Constructed with single strip, flexible, continuous, interlocked and double wrapped flexible steel; galvanized inside and outside; coated with liquid tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sunlight and UV resistant. F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquid Tight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. G. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity. 2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. RNC: Heavy wall conduit: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC, 90° C UL -rated, constructed of polyvinyl chloride and suitable for direct burial use. Sunlight and UV resistant. B. RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; compatible with conduit type and suitable for use and location. 2.4 METAL WIREWAYS, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES A. Material and Construction: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated; Indoor. NEMA 1 Outdoor. NEMA 3R. B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. C. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70. D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type or as indicated in Construction Documents. E. Finish: Manufacturers standard enamel finish. 2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap -on covers. Manufacturers standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect. B. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selectecl by Architect from manufacturers standard colors. C. Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that match and mate with raceways. 2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. B. Cast -Meatal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover. C. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2. RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 2 D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. E. Cast -Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover. F. Hinged -Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous -hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. G. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized -steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: (for specific applications and appropriate fittings, see table 3.0 this section) 1. Exposed Conduit: RMC, IMC. 2. Concealed: RMC, IMC. 3. Below Grade, Single Run: RNC, RMC. 4. Below Grade, Grouped: RNC, RMC. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R or 4. B. Indoors: (for specific applications and appropriate fittings, see table 3.0 this section) 1. Exposed Conduit RMC, IMC. 2. Concealed: EMT, IMC. 3.. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 4. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows: a. Damp, Wet or kitchen Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel. C. T,abe 3.0 — Application of raceways and fittings, unless otherwise specified. RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 3 LOCATION 208V. 480V. LOW ENERGY* EXPOSED Indoors <1" EMT compress. ftgs. >1.25" IMC threaded ftgs. IMC threaded ftgs. EMT compr. ftgs. Outdoors RMC or IMC threaded ftgs. RMC or IMC threaded ftgs. RMC or IMC threaded ftgs. CONCEALED Walls <2" EMT set screw ftgs. >2.5" IMC threaded ftgs. <2" EMT set screw. ftgs. X2.5" IMC threaded ftgs. EMT +/_ - 2" set screw ftgs 2.5° — 4° compr. ftgs. Air Handling Ceil•- ing/Space <2" EMT compr. ftgs. >2.5" IMC threaded. ftgs. <2" EMT compr. ftgs. >2.5" IMC threaded. ftgs. EMT compr. ftgs. Non Air Handling Ceiling/Space <2" EMT set screw ftgs. >2.5" IMC threaded. ftgs. <2" EMT compr. ftgs. >2.5" IMC threaded. ftgs. EMT +/° - 2° set screw ftgs 2.5° — 4" compr. ftgs. BELOW GRADE Interior IMC threaded ftgs. or Sched- ule 40 or 80 PVC IMC threaded ftgs. IMC threaded ftgs. Schedule 40 or 80 PVC Exterior Schedule 40 or 80 PVC or RMC threaded ftgs Schedule 40 or 80 PVC or RMC threaded ftgs Schedule 40 or 80 PVC or RMC threaded ftgs D. Install low energy conductors in designated conduit and fittings as required by code and authority having jurisdiction. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter. B. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve. C. Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete. D. Keep raceways at least 12 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. E. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. F. Support raceways as specified in accordance with NFPA 70. G. Arrange stub -ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. H. Install no more than the equivalent of four 90 -degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. I. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. J. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 4 1. Run conduit larger than 1 -inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. 2- Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3- Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC -40 -PVC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above the floor. K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. M. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200 - Ib tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. N. Raceways for Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: 1. Install with a maximum of two 90 -degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements. O. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. P. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 6' whip of flexible conduit for recessed and semi -recessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. Installation shall include an intergral equipment grounding conductor. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. Q. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw -cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Direct -Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe Tess than 6 inches in nominal diameter. 2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete. b. For stub -ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 5. Waming Planks: Bury waming planks approximately 12 inches above direct -buried conduits, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of conduit. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 5 B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2 -inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade. D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the frost line. E. Field -cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. 3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core -drilled holes or formed openings are used. Ilnstall sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness: 1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. 2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch. E. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4 -inch annular dear space between sleeve and raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance. I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry. J. Interior Penetrations of Non -Fire -Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation. K. Fire -Rated -Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply with Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." L. Roof -Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot -type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work and architectural drawings. M. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. N. Underground, Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1 -inch annular clear space between raceway and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 3.6 SLEEVE -SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations. RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 6 B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.7 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire - resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 3.8 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 7 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 260548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Isolation pads. 2. Channel support systems. 3. Restraint cables. 4. Hanger rod stiffeners. 5. Anchorage bushings and washers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The IBC: International Building Code. B. ICC -ES: ICC -Evaluation Service. C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of Califomia. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with seismic restraint requirements in IBC, BOCA, California Building Code/Code of Regulations of OSHPD, SBC, and UBC, unless requirements in this Section are more stringent. B. If location of this electrical installation requires seismic considerations, seismic design and Shop Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a qualified professional or structural engineer. 1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints as required. 2. Detail assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device. 2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic -restraint component used. B. Delegated -Design Submittal: For seismic -restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators and seismic restraints. a. Coordinate design calculations with wind -load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 26 Sections for equipment mounted outdoors. 2. Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and anchorage devices. 3. Field -fabricated supports. 4. Seismic -Restraint Details: a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads. b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 1 Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints. D. Welding certificates. E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with seismic -restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent. B. Seismic -restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage pre -approval OPA number from OSHPD, pre -approval by ICC -ES, or pre -approval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic -restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If pre -approved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile Toads) to support seismic -restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. C. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SEISMIIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES A. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and application requirements shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Structural Safety Factor. Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected. B. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field -fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion -resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces. C. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized -steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement. D. Hanger Rod Stiffener. Steel tube or steel slotted -support -system sleeve with intemally bolted connections reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods. E. Bushings for Floor -Mounted Equipment Anchor. Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs. F. Bushing Assemblies for Wall -Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices. G. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face. H. Mechanical Anchor. Drilled -in and stud -wedge or female -wedge type in zinc -coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter. Adhesive Anchor. Drilled -in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate - based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc -coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 2 2.2 FACTORY FINISHES A. Finish: Manufacturers standard prime -coat finish ready for field painting. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory -assembled and -tested equipment before shipping. 1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot -dip galvanize metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color -code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic -control devices to indicate capacity range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and equipment to receive seismic -control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing -in of reinforcement and cast -in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces. C. Strength of Support and Seismic -Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits. 3.3 SEISMIC -RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints: 1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment. 2. Install resilient, bolt -isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch. 3. Install seismic -restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component. B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall -mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment -mounting channels are attached to wall. C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. D. Drilled -in Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive. 5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc -coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications. VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 3 3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage as required by Authority having jurisdiction a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. END OF SECTION 260548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 4 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground -line waming tape. 5. Waming labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. D. Adhesive -attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 UNDERGROUND -LINE WARNING TAPE A. Tape: 1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. 2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. B. Color and Printing: 1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1 m 2.2 2. Inscriptions for Red -Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE. 3. Inscriptions for Orange -Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE. WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self -Adhesive Waming Labels: Factory -printed, multicolor, pressure -sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. C. Baked -Enamel Waming Signs: 1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2. 1/4 -inch grommets in comers for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches. D. Metal -Backed, Butyrate Waming Signs: 1. Weather -resistant, non -fading, preprinted, cellulose -acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396 -inch galvanized -steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2. 1/4 -inch grommets in comers for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches. E. Waming label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Waming: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Waming: 'WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 2.3 INSTRUCTION SIGNS A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with letter and face colors indicated on design documents or as required by code. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV - resistant seal for label. 2.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV - resistant seal for label. B. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark -gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. 2.5 CABLE TIES A. General -Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color. Black except where used for color -coding. B. UV -Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 2 C. Plenum -Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi. 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F. 5. Color. Black. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self -tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self -Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. F. Underground -Line Waming Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground -line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench exceeds 16 inches overall. G. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. Emergency Power. B. Power -Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: 1. Color -Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch -circuit conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral: White. 5) Ground: Green. 6) Isolation Ground: Green with Yellow Strip. c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. 4) Neutral: Gray. 5) Ground: Green. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 3 d. Field -Applied, Color -Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half -lapped tums for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two tums of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. C. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write -on tags or marker tape to conductors and list source. D. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field -installed alarm, control, and signal connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory -installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. E. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground -line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 1. Install underground -line waming tape for both direct -buried cables and cables in raceway. F. Waming Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive warning labels. 1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with extemal control power connections. G. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. H. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8 -inch high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer load shedding. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label, or as indicated on drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2 -inch high letters on 1 -1/2 -inch high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchgear. e. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. f. Enclosed switches. g. Enclosed circuit breakers. h. Enclosed controllers. i. Push-button stations. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 4 j. Power transfer equipment. k. Contactors. I. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. m. Battery -inverter units. n. Monitoring and control equipment. END OF SECTION 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 5 McDonald's Corporation Project Manual SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices: 1. Time switches. 2. Outdoor or indoor photoelectric switches. 3. Indoor occupancy sensors. 4. Lighting contactors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall -box dimmers, wall -switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. LED: Light -emitting diode. B. PIR: Passive infrared. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light -level sensors. 1. Interconnection diagrams showing field -installed wiring. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling -mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire -suppression system, and partition assemblies. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 TIME SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements as shown on Construction Documents. B. Electronic Programmable Time Switches: Electronic, solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917. 1. Contact Configuration: Form -C contacts for normally open and closed circuits. LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 1 2. Contact Rating: 20-A ballast Toad, 120/240-V ac. 3. Programs: channels; each channel shall be individually programmable with 8 on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation on holidays. 4. Program: according to restaurant schedule. 5. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a program. 6. Astronomic Time: channels. 7. Battery Backup: For schedules and time clock. 8. Four (4) independently controlled outputs. 2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES A. Description: Solid state, with SPDT dry contacts rated for, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A. 1. Light -Level Monitoring Range: 0 to 3500 fc, with an adjustment for tum -on and tum -off levels. 2. Time Delay: 15 -second minimum, to prevent false operation. 3. Surge Protection: Metal -oxide varistor, complying with IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2, and IEEE 62.45 for Category Al locations. 4. Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base -and -stem mounting or stem -and - swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky exposure. 2.3 INDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES A. Ceiling -Mounted Photoelectric Switch: Solid-state, Tight -level sensor unit, with separate relay unit, to detect changes in lighting levels that are perceived by the eye. Cadmium sulfide photoresistors are not acceptable. 1. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the associated relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit. 2. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast Toad at 120- and 277-V ac, for, and for 1/2 hp at 120- V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70. 3. Light -Level Monitoring Range: 10 to 200 fc, with an adjustment for tum -on and tum -off levels within that range. 4. Time Delay: Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds to prevent cycling, with deadband adjustment. 5. Indicator. Two LEDs to indicate the beginning of on-off cycles. ® 2.4 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. General Description: Wall- or ceiling -mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit. 1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, tum lights on when covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied; with a time delay for tuming lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. 2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit. 3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast Toad at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70. 4. Mounting: a. Sensor. Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2 -inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure. c. Time -Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door. 5. Indicator. LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation of the sensor. 6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure. 7. Automatic Light -Level Sensor. Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; keep lighting off when selected lighting level is present. B. PIR Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a combination of heat and movement in area of coverage. 1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6 -inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. 2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96 -inch high ceiling. 3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet when mounted on a 10 -foot high ceiling. LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 2 C. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a change in pattern of reflected ultrasonic energy in area of coverage. 1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. 2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 600 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96 -inch high ceiling. 3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96 -inch high ceiling. 4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 2000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96 -inch high ceiling. 5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet when mounted on a 10 - foot high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet. D. Dual -Technology Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by using a combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular technology or combination of technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in the field by operating controls on unit. 1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6 -inch minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. 3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96 -inch high ceiling. 2.5 LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as specified on drawings. C. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically or electrically held, as defined on Drawings, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508. 1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high -inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current). 2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of installation. 3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250. 4. Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings, matching the NEMA type specified for the enclosure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structure-bome vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory -installed vibration isolators. 3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch. B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power -limited and non -power -limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions. C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturers written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 3 D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor. B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements. 2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays. B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work. Connect deficiencies, make necessary adjustments and retest. Verify that specified requirements are met. 3.6 CLEANING A. Cleaning: Clean equipment and devices intemally and externally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturers, and repair damaged finishes. END OF SECTION 260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 4 • m McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 262200 - LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of dry -type transformers rated 600 V and Tess, with capacities up to 1000 kVA: 1. Distribution transformers. 2. Buck -boost transformers. 3. Control and signal transformers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: If required submit certification that transformers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term 'withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Energy Efficient Transformers rated 15 kVA and larger. Certified as meeting NEMA TP -1, Class 1 efficiency levels when tested according to NEMA TP -2. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, 'Test Code for Dry -Type Distribution and Power Transformers." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated -type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. B. Coordinate installation of wall -mounting and structure -hanging supports with actual transformer provided. LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS A. Description: Factory -assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60 -Hz service. B. Cores: Grain -oriented, non -aging silicon steel. C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps. 1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2. Coil Material: Copper. 2.2 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561. B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Division 26 Section 'Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." C. Cores: One leg per phase. D. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2. 1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air. E. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, nonventilated, NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4X, stainless steel as indicated in Construction Documents. 1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air. F. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250, for outdoor and indoor corrosion protection. 1. Finish Color. Gray. G. Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kVA: None. H. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below normal full capacity. I. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger. Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity. J. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger. 1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels. 2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2. K. K -Factor Rating if required on Construction Documents: Transformers indicated to be K -factor rated shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for nonsinusoidal Toad current -handling capability to the degree defined by designated K -factor. 1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full -load current with harmonic distortion corresponding to designated K -factor. 2. Indicate value of K -factor on transformer nameplate. L. Electrostatic Shielding if required on Construction Documents: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full -width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance. 1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and output terminals. 2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield. 3. Shield Effectiveness: a. Capacitance between Primary and Secondary Windings: Not to exceed 33 picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz. b. Common -Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 120 dBA at 0.5 to 1.5 kHz; minimum of minus 65 dBA at 1.5 to 100 kHz. c. Normal -Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 52 dBA at 1.5 to 10 kHz. M. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets. LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 2 N. Low -Sound -Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91. Low -sound Level Requirements: Maximum sound level, when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91 as follows: 1. NEMA ST 20 sound levels are as follows: Up to 9 kVA: 40 dBA; 30 to 50 kVA: 45 dBA; 51 to 150 kVA: 50 dBA; 151 to 300 kVA: 55 dBA; 301 to 500 kVA: 60 dBA. 2.3 BUCK -BOOST TRANSFORMERS A. Description: Self -cooled, two -winding dry type, rated for continuous duty and with wiring terminals suitable for connection as autotransformer. Transformers shall comply with NEMA ST 1 and shall be listed and labeled as complying with UL 506 or UL 1561. B. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2. 1. Finish Color. Gray. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient -temperature requirements for each transformer. B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions. C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed. D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install wall -mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer. 1. Brace wall -mounting transformers as specified in Division 26 Section 'Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems. B. Construct concrete bases and anchor floor -mounting transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions , seismic codes applicable to Project, and requirements in Division 26 Section 'Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 3 • exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results_ B. Connect buck -boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being served, plus or minus 5 percent, at secondary terminals. C. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings. 3.5 CLEANING A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. END OF SECTION 16461 LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 4 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 262413 - SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less. 2. Transient voltage suppression devices. 3. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. 4. Instrumentation. 5. Control power. 6. Accessory components and features. 7. Identification. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, ground -fault protector, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Detail short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Detail utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company. 6. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 7. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. An employer of workers qualified as defined in NEMA PB 2.1 and trained in electrical safety as required by NFPA 70E. 2. Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components and accessories from approved suppliers. B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchboards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with NEMA PB 2. SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 1 E. Comply with NFPA 70. F. Comply with UL 891. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path. B. Store indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage. C. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover switchboards to provide protection from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchboards; install electric heating (250-W per section) to prevent condensation. D. Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NEMA PB 2.1. E. Use only factory installed lifting provisions. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify dimensions by field measurements. B. Switchboards shall be located to meet or exceed all code clearance repair requirements. C. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift -out panels, and structures to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place. D. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above switchboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. E. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 2, usual service conditions, as follows: 1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet. F. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect, Area Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's, Area Construction Manager's and Owner's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SWITCHBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Approved Suppliers. B. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings. C. Front -Connected, Front -Accessible Switchboards: 1. Main Devices: Panel mounted. 2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted. 3. Sections front and rear aligned. D. Nominal System Voltage: Per Construction Documents. E. Main -Bus Continuous: Per Construction Documents. F. Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1. G. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory -applied finish in manufacturer's custom color finish over a rust - inhibiting primer on treated metal surface. H. Outdoor Enclosures: Type 3R. 1. Finish: Factory -applied finish in manufacturer's custom color; undersurfaces treated with corrosion - resistant undercoating. 2. Enclosure: Downward, sloping roof for each section, with provisions for padlocking. I. Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections. J. Insulation and isolation for main and vertical buses of feeder sections. K. Utility Metering Compartment: Fabricated, barrier compartment and section complying with utility company's requirements; hinged sealed door, buses provisioned for mounting utility company's current transformers and potential transformers or potential taps as required by utility company. If separate vertical section is required for utility metering, match and align with basic switchboard. Provide service entrance label and necessary applicable service entrance features. L. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compartments. M. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated. 1. Phase- and Neutral -Bus Material: Hard -drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity or tin-plated, high- strength, electrical -grade aluminum alloy. 2. Load Terminals: Insulated, rigidly braced, runback bus extensions, of same material as through buses, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit conductors. Provide load terminals for future circuit -breaker positions at full -ampere rating of circuit -breaker position. 3. Ground Bus: 1/4 -by -2 -inch -Minimum -size required by UL 891, hard -drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with compression connectors for feeder and branch -circuit ground conductors. For busway feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run. 4. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends. 5. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus extensions for busway feeder neutral bus. 6. Isolation Barrier Access Provisions: Permit checking of bus -bolt tightness. N. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of circuit -breaker compartment. O. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components including instruments and instrument transformers. SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 3 P. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. Q. Panelboard Short -Circuit Current Rating: 1. UL label indicating series -connected rating with integral or remote upstream devices. Include size and type of upstream device allowable, branch devices allowable, and UL series -connected short- circuit rating. Circuit breakers in branch panelboards shall have a minimum 10 kAIC rating. Upstream devices shall be rated at 65 kAIC minimum. 2. Clearly and legibly mark on the doors of all panelboards "Caution — Series rated system A. available. Identified replacement components required." R. Panelboard Short -Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. 2.2 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, as specified on drawings: B. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings. C. Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41 -compliant, integrally mounted, wired -in, solid-state, parallel -connected, non -modular type, with sine -wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the switchboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories: 1. Fuses, rated at 200 -kA interrupting capacity. 2. Fabrication using bolted compression Tugs for intemal wiring. 3. Integral disconnect switch. 4. Redundant suppression circuits. 5. Redundant replaceable modules. 6. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. 7. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 8. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 9. Form -C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed, for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current -limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system. D. Minimum Single -Impulse Current Rating: 80 kA per phase. E. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR Second Edition Revision 2.5 Effective February 2007 for grounded wye circuits with 208Y/120 -V, three-phase, four -wire circuits shall be as follows: 1. Line to Neutral: 330 V for 208Y/120. 2. Line to Ground: 330 V for 208Y/120. 3. Neutral to Ground: 330 V for 208Y/120. 4. Line to Line: 600 V for 208Y/120. 2.3 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series -connected rating or interrupting capacity ton meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit - breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous -Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front -mounted, field - adjustable trip setting. 3. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two -pole configurations with Class A ground -fault protection (5-6- mA trip). 4. Ground -Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground -fault protection (30-mA trip). 5. Molded -Case Circuit -Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical or Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 4 c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits and Type HACR for heating, air conditioning and refrigerant equipment. d. Ground -Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time -delay settings, push -to -test feature, and ground -fault indicator. e. Zone -Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground -fault protection function. f. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit. B. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle. C. Fuses are specified in Division 26 Section "Fuses." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NECA 400. B. Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged or physically damaged. C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NOMA PB 1.1, NEC, NECA Standards and Manufacturer's written instructions. B. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, specified in Construction Drawings. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section. 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 2. For supported equipment, install epoxy -coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions fumished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards. C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components. D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section 'Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." E. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of switchboards. F. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel -mounted sections. G. Install overcurrent protective devices and transient voltage suppression devices. 1. Set field -adjustable switches and circuit -breaker trip ranges. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 5 B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. 3. Tighten all connections prior to energizing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. controls and equipment. C. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Set field -adjustable switches and circuit breakers trip ranges. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat, to maintain temperature according to manufacturers written instructions, until switchboard is ready to be energized and placed into service. END OF SECTION 262413 SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 6 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Distribution panelboards rated 600-V and less. 2. Lighting and appliance branch -circuit panelboards rated 600-V and less. 3. Electronic -grade panelboards rated 600-V and Tess. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating. B. GFCI: Ground -Fault Circuit Interrupter. C. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. D. RMS: Root Mean Square. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Indude dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Indude evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. D. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Install final versions after load balancing. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: 1. Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components and accessories from approved suppliers. PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1 B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with NEMA PB 1. E. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation. B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify dimensions by field measurements. B. Panelboards shall be located to meet or exceed all code clearance requirements. C. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. D. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: 1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet. E. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect, Area Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect, Area Construction Manager and Owner's written permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS A. When required fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section 'Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface -mounted cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. PANELBOARDS 262416 - 2 b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. c. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4 or Type 4X, stainless steel. 2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface -mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush -mounted fronts, overlap box. 3. Hinged Front Cover. Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. 4. Skirt for Surface -Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. 5. Gutter Extension and Barrier. Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. 6. Finishes: a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two -coat, baked -on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. 7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover. C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom. D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 1. Bus: Tin Plated Aluminum Temp Rated or Copper Temp Rated as required. Provide 750 A per sq. inch Al or 1000 A per sq. inch Cu per local jurisdiction requirements. Bus shall be sequence phased from left to right. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch -circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box. 3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch -circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated from box. E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression or Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus -Configured Terminators: Compression or Mechanical type. 4. Feed -Through Lugs: Compression or Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Compression or Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 6. Gutter -Tap Lugs: Compression or Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. H. Panelboard Short -Circuit Current Rating: 1. UL label indicating series -connected rating with integral or remote upstream devices. Include size and type of upstream device allowable, branch devices allowable, and UL series -connected short- circuit rating. Circuit breakers in branch panelboards shall have a minimum 10 kAIC rating. Upstream devices shall be rated at 65 kAIC minimum. 2. Clearly and legibly mark on the doors of all panelboards "Caution — Series rated system A. available. Identified replacement components required." I. Panelboard Short -Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. 2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, as specified on drawings: B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type. C. Doors: Secured with vault -type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike. D. Mains: Circuit breaker or as specified on drawings. PANELBOARDS 262416 - 3 E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for all Circuit -Breaker Frame Sizes: Bolt -on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive -locking device requires mechanical release for removal. F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches. 2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH -CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, as specified on drawings: B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch -circuit type. C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only. D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt -on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. F. Column -Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses. 2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, as specified on drawings: B. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series -connected rating or interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit - breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous -Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front -mounted, field - adjustable trip setting. 3. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two -pole configurations with Class A ground -fault protection (5-6- mA trip). 4. Ground -Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground -fault protection (30- mA trip). 5. Arc -Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFC!) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single -pole configuration. 6. Molded -Case Circuit -Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Compression or Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning and refrigeration equipment. d. Ground -Fault Protection: Integrally mounted or Remote -mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time -delay settings, push -to -test feature, and ground -fault indicator. e. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at [55] [75] percent of rated voltage. f. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit -breaker handle in off position. g. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit -breaker handle in on position. C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle. 1. Fuses, and Spare -Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Fuses." 2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and number of poles. 2.5 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, as specified on drawings: B. Surge Protection Device: IEEE C62.41 -compliant, integrally mounted, non -modular type, with sine -wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, short-circuit current rating complying with UL 1449, second PANELBOARDS 262416 - 4 edition, and matching or exceeding the panelboard short-circuit rating, redundant suppression circuits, with individually fused metal -oxide varistors. 1. Accessories: a. Fuses rated at 200 kA interrupting capacity. b. Integral disconnect switch. c. Redundant suppression circuits. d. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. e. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. f. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. g. Form -C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally dosed, for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current -limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system. 2. Peak Single -Impulse Surge Current Rating: 80 kA per phase. 3. Minimum single -impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec. waveform described in IEEE C62.41.2. a. Line to Neutral: 40,000 A. (minimum) b. Line to Ground: 40,000 A. (minimum) c- Neutral to Ground: 60,000 A. (minimum) d. Line to Line: 80,000 A. (minimum) 4. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR Second Edition Revision 2.5 Effective February 2007 for grounded wye circuits with 208Y/120 -V, three-phase, four -wire circuits shall be as follows: a. Line to Neutral: 330 V for 208Y/120. b. Line to Ground: 330 V for 208Y/120]. c. Neutral to Ground: 330 V for 208Y/120. d. Line to Line: 600 V for 208Y/120. e. Mcov: 150 V for 208Y/120. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1., NEC, NECA Standards and Manufacturer's written instructions. B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation. C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around full perimeter of base. 2. For panelboards, install epoxy -coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions fumished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards. 5. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard. C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards. D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section 'Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." PANELBOARDS 262416 - 5 E. Mount top of trim 79 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. F. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. G. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. H. Install filler plates in unused spaces. I. Stub three 1 -inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. J. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing. K. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit Toads [after balancing panelboard Toads]; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." ® 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. C. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but prior restaurant opening, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. 1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load -balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. 3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records. 4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement. PANELBOARDS 262416 - 6 3.6 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION 262416 PANELBOARDS 262416 - 7 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Twist -locking receptacles. 3. Wall -box motion sensors. 4. Isolated -ground receptacles. 5. Wall -switch and exterior occupancy sensors. 6. Communications outlets. 7. Pendant cord -connector devices. 8. Cord and plug sets. 9. Floor service outlets, poke -through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet assemblies. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground -fault circuit interrupter. C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch -circuit conductor. D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label wamings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NFPA 70. D. All devices used shall be UL listed and installed in compliance with its listing. E. All wiring devices shall be of specification grade or greater. Residential grade products shall not be utilized. WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1 • • F. All wiring devices shall be as specified within the construction documents and/or as contained herein. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Receptacles for Owner-Fumished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: As specified on drawings. 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. General: Each receptacle shall be constructed to include a grounding pole from which a wired connection to ground shall be provided. B. Straight -Blade -Type Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, DSCC W -C -596G, and UL 498. 1. Receptacles: 15 Amp, 120 Volt NEMA 5-15R, side wired: Hubbell series 5262. 2. Receptacles: 20 Amp, 120 Volt NEMA 5-20R, side wired: Hubbell series 5362. C. Locking Receptacles: Heavy -Duty grade, applicable NEMA and UL standards. D. GFCI Receptacles (with 4-6mA personnel protection): Straight blade, feed -through type, Heavy -Duty grade, with integral NEMA WD 6, duplex receptacle; complying with UL 498 and UL 943. Design units for installation in a standard 2 -3/4 -inch deep outlet box without an adapter. 1. GFCI Receptacles: 15 Amp, 120 Volt, NEMA 5-15R GFCI side wired: Hubbell series GF5252. 2. GFCI Receptacles: 20 Amp, 120 Volt, NEMA 5-20R GFCI side wired: Hubbell series GF5352. E. Tamper Resistant GFCI Receptacle: Straight blade, "Safelock" protection. 1. 15 Amp, 120 Volt, NEMA 5-15R, Pass & Seymour series 1595 - TRICC4 (Ivory) 2. 20 Amp, 120 Volt, NEMA 5-20R, Pass & Seymour series 2095 - TRI (Ivory) 3. 15 Amp, 120 Volt, NEMA 5-15R, Pass & Seymour series 1595 - TRWCC4 (White) 4. 20 Amp, 120 Volt, NEMA 5-20R, Pass & Seymour series 2095 - TRW (White) F. Isolated -Ground Receptacles: Straight blade and twist lock, Heavy -Duty grade, single or duplex receptacle, with isolated equipment grounding conductor connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device, with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap, integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts. 1. IG Receptacles: 15 Amp, 120 Volt NEMA 5-15R IG simplex, side wired: Hubbell series 105261. 2. IG Receptacles: 15 Amp, 120 Volt NEMA 5-15R IG duplex, side wired: Hubbell series 1G5262 or CR525210. 3. IG Receptacles: 20 Amp, 120 Volt NEMA 5-20R IG simplex, side wired: Hubbell series IG5361. 4. IG Receptacles: 20 Amp, 120 Volt NEMA 5-20R IG duplex, side wired: Hubbell series 1G5362 or CR535210. 5. IG Receptacles (Twist lock): 15 Amp, 120 Volt NEMA L5 -15R IG simplex, side wired: Hubbell series 104710. 6. IG Receptacles: (Twist -lock) 15 Amp, 120 Volt NEMA L5 -15R IG duplex, side wired: Hubbell series 1G4700A. G. Industrial Heavy -Duty Pin and Sleeve Devices: Comply with IEC 309-1. H. Enclosures: NEMA 1 unless otherwise noted. 2.3 WIRING DEVICE PLATES A. Provide plates for all outlets with opening configuration suitable for devices to be covered. B. Plates shall be Type 302 brushed satin finish stainless steel. Plates shall be secured in place with screws finished to match the plates. WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 2 • C. Plates for receptacles and switches in finished areas shall match hardware in room. D. Design and finish of switch and receptacle plates in the same area shall match in all respects. 2.4 PENDANT CORD/CONNECTOR DEVICES A. General Description: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 1449, with integral TVSS in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground. 1. Body: Nylon with screw -open cable -gripping jaws and provision for attaching external cable grip. 2. External Cable Grip: Woven wire -mesh type made of high-strength galvanized -steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector. 2.5 CORD AND PLUG SETS A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected. 1. Cord: Rubber -insulated, stranded -copper conductors, with Type SOW -A jacket; with green -insulated grounding conductor and equipment -rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent. 2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable -clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection. 2.6 TOGGLE SWITCHES AND DIMMERS A. Single- and Double -Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W -C -896F and UL 20. B. Toggle switches shall be 120-277 Volt, 20 Amp, side wired with grounding connection: Hubbell series HBL1221. C. Snap Switches: Heavy -Duty grade, quiet type, UL 20. D. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full -wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on/off switches and audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters. 1. Control: Continuously adjustable slider, with single -pole or three-way switching to suit connections. 2. Wattage rating shall exceed connected load by 30 percent minimum, except as otherwise indicated. 3. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular, 120 V, 60 Hz with continuously adjustable slider, single pole with soft tap or other quiet switch; EMI/RFI filter to eliminate interference; and 5 -inch wire connecting leads. 4. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular, compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer -ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness. Wattage and voltage ratings as indicated, and electromagnetic filters to minimize noise and R8 and TV interference. Anodized heat sinks, 5° wire connecting leads. 2.7 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate -Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035 -inch thick, satin -finished type 302 stainless steel, except as otherwise indicated. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Outdoor Wet Locations: Provide UL listed and labeled enclosure that is weatherproof whether or not an attachment plug cap is inserted in the receptacle. 5. Plates for Isolated Ground / Dedicated Circuit Receptacles shall be Hubbell PJ8C0 (1 GANG) and PJ82C0 (2 Gang). 2.8 WALL JACKS A. Telephone Jack: Compatible for use with phone system and intended use. B. Computer Jack: Compatible for use with computer system and intended use. WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 3 • • 2.9 FINISHES A. Color. 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70. 2. Isolated -Ground Receptacles: Orange or as specified above, with orange triangle on face. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wiring devices and accessories as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding -head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal -to -metal contact. 10. Install all switches in compliance with ADA requirements. E. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra -deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. F. Dimmers: 1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions. G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 4 H. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and fumishings. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black -filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. B. Switches: Where 3 or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere where indicated, identify each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. B. When available, connections shall be made to terminal screws of wiring devices in lieu of utilizing spring or compression back -stab type connections. Connections shall be made utilizing solid copper conductors. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 5 percent or higher is not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 262726 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 5 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 262813 - FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits, enclosed switches, panelboards, modular switchgear and enclosed controllers. 2. Spare -fuse cabinets. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material, dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare -fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings. a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating. b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based. 2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings. 3. Current -limitation curves for fuses with current -limiting characteristics. 4. Time -current coordination curves (average melt) and current -limitation curves (instantaneous peak let -through current) for each type and rating of fuse. 5. Coordination charts and tables and related data. B. Submit Fuse Operation and Maintenance Data: Including emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals to Owner. 1. Provide a listing of fuse types and models installed by application to Building Owner/Operator for cross reference in replacement applications. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses. D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings. FUSES 262813 - 1 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARTRIDGE FUSES A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged. B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features. C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment. D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS A. Cartridge Fuses: 1. Service Entrance: 800 Amperes or Greater, Class L, time delay or Class T, fast acting or Class RK or as specified on drawings. 2. Main Feeders 601 Amperes or Greater. Class L, time delay, Class RK5, fast acting, Class RK5, time delay, Class J, fast acting, Class J, time delay or as specified on drawings_ 3. Main Feeders 400 - 600 Amperes: Class J, time delay or as specified on drawings. 4. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay or as specified on drawings. 5. Other Branch Circuits Less Than 600 Amperes: Class RK1, time delay or as specified on drawings. 6. Control Circuits: Class CC, time delay or as specified on drawings. 7. Individual Fluorescent Ballast Protection: GLR/HLR type. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install fuses in fusible devices. B. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse. C. All fuses shall be of a common manufacturer and of a common type within any fusible device. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused device and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder. END OF SECTION 262813 FUSES 262813 - 2 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Receptacle switches. 4. Shunt trip switches. 5. Molded -case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 6. Molded -case switches. 7. Enclosures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. NC: Normally closed. B. NO: Normally open. C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: 1. Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Only use approved suppliers. B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1 B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect, Area Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect, Area Construction Manager and Owner's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Smaller. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 or 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral IGt: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 4. Class R Fuse Kit Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 5. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. 6. Lugs: Mechanical or Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 7. Service -Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. 2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 or 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Intemally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Intemally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Intemally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 4. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. 5. Lugs: Mechanical or Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 2.3 MOLDED -CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products only from approved suppliers. B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents. ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 2 C. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. D. Adjustable, Instantaneous -Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front -mounted, field -adjustable trip setting. E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field -replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field - adjustable settings: 1. Instantaneous trip. 2. Long- and short -time pickup levels. 3. Long- and short -time time adjustments. 4. Ground -fault pickup level, time delay, and 12t response. F. Current -Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let -through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK -5. G. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal -magnetic trip element with integral limiter -style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door. H. Ground -Fault, Circuit -Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two -pole configurations with Class A ground -fault protection (5-mA). Personnel protection sensitivity or 30-mA trip equipment protection sensitivity, as required by application. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical or Compression type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting Toads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits. 4. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil -clearing contact. 2.4 MOLDED -CASE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products only from approved suppliers. B. General Requirements: MCCB with fixed, high -set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating. C. Features and Accessories: 1 Standard frame sizes and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical or Compression type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil -clearing contact. 2.5 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4 or Type 4X or stainless steel as required. 4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 3 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install individual wall -mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. D. Install fuses in fusible devices. E. Comply with NECA 1. F. Install disconnect switches and per local utility requirements. Provide suitable supports. G. Install disconnect switches and circuit breakers level and plumb. H. Connect disconnect switches and circuit breakers and components to building wiring system and ground as indicated in construction documents and as instructed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Installation shall comply with all requirements of the National Electrical Code. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated -plastic nameplate. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. 3.6 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint splatters and other spots and burrs. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces, chips, scratches, and abrasions to match original finish. END OF SECTION 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 4 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 262913 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less: 1. Full -voltage manual. 2. Full -voltage magnetic. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CPT: Control power transformer. B. MCCB: Molded -case circuit breaker. C. MCP: Motor circuit protector. D. N.C.: Normally dosed. E. N.O.: Normally open. F. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device. G. SCR: Silicon -controlled rectifier. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip settings. 3. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field -adjustable overload relays. 4. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reduced -voltage solid- state controllers. 5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal and control wiring differentiate between Manufacturers installed and field installed wiring. B. Load -Current and Overload -Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full -load currents. C. Load -Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 1 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage. B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers; install temporary electric heating, with at least 250 W per controller. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect, Area Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical systems. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without Architect, Area Construction Manager or Owner's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. D. Coordinate features of enclosed controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices and control circuits to which they connect. E. Coordinate features, accessories and functions of each enclosed controller with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor and Toad. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FULL -VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS A. General Requirements for Full -Voltage Non Reversing Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A. B. Motor -Starting Switches: "Quick -make, quick -break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off or on. 1. Configuration: Non -reversing or as specified on Construction Documents. 2. Surface mounting. C. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick -make, quick -break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped. 1. Overload Relays: Inverse -time -current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full -load current of actual protected motor, extemal reset push button; bimetallic type. 2. Surface mounting. ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 2 • D. Integral Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick -make, quick -break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped. 1. Configuration: Non -reversing or as specified on Construction Drawings]. 2. Overload Relays: Inverse -time -current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping characteristics; heaters and sensors in each phase, matched to nameplate full -load current of actual protected motor and having appropriate adjustment for duty cycle; external reset push button; bimetallic type. 3. Surface mounting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Wall -Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural -steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." El. Floor -Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on 4 -inch nominal -thickness concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 2. For supported equipment, install epoxy -coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions fumished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. C. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. E. Install fuses in each fusible -switch enclosed controller. F. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Fuses." G. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full -load amperes after motors have been installed. H. Install, connect, and fuse thermal -protector monitoring relays fumished with motor -driven equipment. I. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide waming signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure -mounted control and pilot device. ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 3 • • 3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Control -Voltage Electrical Power Cables." B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. C. Connect selector switches and other automatic -control selection devices where applicable. 1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic -control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual -control position. 2. Connect selector switches with enclosed -controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety -type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment. 2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed -controller element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. 3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Architect, Area Construction Manager and Owner before starting the motor(s). 5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 8. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Set field -adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time -delay relays, timers, and overload -relay pickup and trip ranges. B. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal -magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full -load ampere ratings and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cooldown between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full -load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Architect before increasing settings. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service. B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion. ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 4 • 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean enclosed controllers intemally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. END OF SECTION 262913 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 5 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 4. Lighting fixture supports. 5. Retrofit kits for fluorescent lighting fixtures. El. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BF: Ballast factor. B. CRI: Color -rendering index. C. CU: Coefficient of utilization. D. HID: High-intensity discharge. E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating. F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. G. RCR: Room cavity ratio. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. Ballast. 4. Energy -efficiency data. 5. Life, output, and energy -efficiency data for lamps. 6. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each lighting fixture type, outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. a. Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring. INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 1 C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Lighting fixtures. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached. 4. Other items in finished ceiling including the following: a. Air outlets and inlets. b. Speakers. c. Sprinklers. d. Smoke and fire detectors. e. Occupancy sensors. f. Access panels. 5. Perimeter moldings. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: This special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery -powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Eight (8) years from date of Substantial Completion. Full Warranty shall apply for first three (3) years, and prorated warranty for the remaining five years. C. Special Warranty for Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: One (1) year from date of Substantial Completion. D. Special Warranty for Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps that fail in materials or workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: One (1) year from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Fumish extra materials described below that match products, installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Fumish at least one of each type. INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 2 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacture specified. 2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A. C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B. E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated, 22 Gauge minimum. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. H. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic, Al2 pattem. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness is indicated. b. UV stabilized. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated. 3. All panels shall be destaticized at the factory before shipping. 4. Provide non-irridescent type louvers for fixtures using T8 or compact fluorescent lamps. 5. Metal halide lighting fixtures shall have a tempered glass lens to contain a lamp failure and the associated hot quartz and shattered glass. 2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Electronic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.11; instant -start type, unless otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi- level control is indicated. 1. Sound Rating: A. 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent 3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 4. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 5. Lamp Current Crest Factor. 1.5 or less. 6. BF: 0.85 or higher. 7. Power Factor. 0.95 or higher. 8. Ballast shall not contain polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB's) 9. Lamp and ballast characteristics shall be matched. INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 3 • • B. Ballasts for Low -Temperature Environments: 1. Temperatures 0 Deg F and Higher. Electronic or electromagnetic type rated for 0 deg F starting and operating temperature with indicated Tamp types. 2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F and Higher. Electromagnetic type designed for use with high -output lamps. C. Ballasts for Low Electromagnetic -Interference Environments: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for consumer equipment. D. Ballasts for Dimmer -Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type. 1. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated Tamp lumens. 2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and lamp type indicated. E. Ballasts for Bi -Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type. 1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off. a. High -Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens. b. Low -Level Operation: 30 percent of rated lamp lumens. 2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and lamp type indicated. 2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Description: Electronic programmed rapid -start type, complying with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated: 1. Lamp end -of -life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Automatic Tamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor. 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated. 9. Power Factor. 0.95 or higher. 10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 11. Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum. B. Ballasts for Dimmer -Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type. 1. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated Tamp lumens. 2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and lamp type indicated. 2.5 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery -inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924 and NFPA 101. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate two outer fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 600 - 700 lumens each. If required connect unswitched circuit to battery -inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast. 2. Night -Light Connection: Operate all fluorescent lamps continuously. 3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space. a. Push Button: Push -to -test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. b. Indicator Light LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 4. Battery: 1-1/2 Hour Sealed, maintenance -free, nickel -cadmium type with minimum seven (7) year nominal life. Battery shall have a suitable rating and capacity to supply and maintain at not less than INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 4 • • 87.5% of the nominal voltage for the lamp load associated with the unit for a period of at least 1-1/2 hours. 5. Charger. Fully automatic, solid-state, constant -current type with sealed power transfer relay. B. Extemal Type (retrofit applications only): Self-contained, modular, battery -inverter unit, suitable for powering one or more fluorescent lamps, remote mounted from lighting fixture. Comply with UL 924. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate two outer fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 600 - 700 lumens each. If required connect unswitched circuit to battery -inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast. 2. Night -Light Connection: Operate all fluorescent lamps in a remote fixture continuously. 3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, nickel -cadmium type, with minimum seven year nominal life. Battery shall have a suitable rating and capacity to supply and maintain at not less than 87.5% of the nominal voltage for the lamp Toad associated with the unit for a period of at least 1-1/2 hours. 4. Charger. Fully automatic, solid-state, constant -current type. 5. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, plenum rated where required. 6. Test Push Button: Push -to -test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. 7. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 2.6 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS A. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal -Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029. Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ballast Circuit: Constant -wattage autotransformer or regulating high -power -factor type. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F for single -lamp ballasts. 3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F. 4. Open -circuit operation that will not reduce average life. 5. Low -Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy -encapsulated models designed to minimize audible fixture noise. B. Electronic Ballast for Metal -Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 1. Lamp end -of -life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Sound Rating: A. 3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 15 percent. 4. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 5. Lamp Current Crest Factor. 1.5 or less. 6. Power Factor. .90 or higher. 7. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for non -consumer equipment. 8. Protection: Class P thermal cutout. 9. Retain subparagraph and associated subparagraphs below for bi-level ballasts. 10. Bi -Level Dimming Ballast: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output of the associated fixture between high- and low-level and off. a. High -Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens. b. Low -Level Operation: 50 percent of rated lamp lumens. c. Compatibility: Certified by ballast manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and lamp type indicated. Certified by Tamp manufacturer that ballast operating modes are free from negative effect on lamp life and color -rendering capability. 11. Continuous Dimming Ballast: Dimming range shall be from 100 to 35 percent of rated lamp lumens without flicker. a. Ballast Input Watts: Reduced to a maximum of 50 percent of normal at lowest dimming setting. b. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and lamp type indicated. Certified by Tamp manufacturer that ballast operating modes are free from negative effect on Tamp life and color -rendering capability. C. Auxiliary Instant -On Quartz System: Factory -installed feature automatically switches quartz lamp on when fixture is initially energized and when power outages occur. System automatically turns quartz Tamp off when HID Tamp reaches approximately 60 percent Tight output. D. High -Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type, with solid-state igniter/starter. Igniter -starter shall have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90 deg C. 1. Instant -Restrike Device: Integral with ballast, or solid-state potted module, factory installed within fixture and compatible with lamps, ballasts, and mogul sockets up to 150 W. INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 5 • • a. Restrike Range: 105- to 130-V ac. b. Maximum Voltage: 250-V peak or 150-V ac RMS. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F. 3. Open -circuit operation shall not reduce average Tamp life. 2.7 EXIT SIGNS A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2. Self -Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack. a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, nickel -cadmium type. b. Charger. Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. d. Test Push Button: Push -to -test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 2.8 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924. 1. Battery: 1-1/2 hour, sealed, maintenance -free, lead -acid type with minimum 10 -year normal life and special warranty. Battery shall have a suitable rating and capacity to supply and maintain at not less than 87.5% of the nominal battery voltage for the lamp load associated with the unit for a period of at least 1-1/2 hours. 2. Charger. Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically tums lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep -discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 4. Test Push Button: Push -to -test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. 5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 6. Wire Guard: Heavy -chrome -plated wire guard protects Tamp heads or fixtures as indicated on Drawings. 7. Integral Time -Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when power is restored after an outage. Time delay permits HID lamps to restrike and develop adequate output. 8. Provide remote head(s), weatherproof for outdoor applications, as indicated on plans. 2.9 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Low -Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1. B. T8 rapid -start low -mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. C. T5 rapid -start low -mercury lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 2900 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. D. T5HO rapid -start, high -output low -mercury lamps, rated 54 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 5000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 6 • E. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4 -Pin, low mercury, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, and suitable for use with dimming ballasts, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum). 2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum). 3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum). 4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). 5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum). 2.10 HID LAMPS A. High -Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 22 (minimum), color temperature 1900 K, and average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum. 1. Dual -Arc Tube Lamps: Arranged so only one of two arc tubes is lighted at one time and, when power is restored after an outage, the cooler arc tube, with lower intemal pressure, lights instantly, providing an immediate 8 to 15 percent of normal light output. B. Metal Halide and High Pressure Sodium lamps shall be of the dear type unless noted otherwise. C. Metal -Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, with a minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K. D. Low wattage HID lamps shall be provided with an inner arc tube to prevent rupture of lamp. E. Pulse -Start, Metal -Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K. F. Ceramic, Pulse -Start, Metal -Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 3500 K. 2.11 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Single -Stem Hangers: 1/2 -inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. B. Twin -Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2 -inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture. C. Wires: ASTM A 641, Class 3, soft temper, zinc -coated steel, 12 gage minimum. D. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580, or A 580 M Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage minimum. E. Rod Hangers: 3/16 -inch minimum diameter, cadmium -plated, threaded steel rod. F. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking -type plug. G. Aircraft Cable Support: Use cable, anchorages and intermediate supports recommended by fixture Manufacturer. 2.12 RETROFIT KITS FOR FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Comply with UL 1598 listing requirements. 1. Reflector Kit: UL 1598, Type I. Suitable for two- to four -lamp, surface -mounted or recessed lighting fixtures by improving reflectivity of fixture surfaces. 2. Ballast and Lamp Change Kit: UL 1598, Type II. Suitable for changing existing ballast, lamps, and sockets. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture. B. Support for Lighting Fixtures in or on Grid -Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a support element. INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 7 • • 1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture comers. 2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture comer with clips that are UL listed for the application. 3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4 -inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. 4. In seismic areas, install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3. C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem -Mounted, Single -Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin -stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. D. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities. E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." F. Fumish and install all lamp required, including replacements for bumed-out lamps, until final acceptance of the completed work. No lighting fixture or sign will be installed without lamps. G. If permanent lighting fixtures are to be used in lieu of temporary lighting facilities during the construction period, this shall be done only as permitted by the Architect/Engineer, who may require that new lamps be installed and fixtures cleaned at the time of tum -over to the "Owner". H. Downlight reflectors and parabolic louvers shall be installed in place after the project is completed and dust - free. Installer shall wear white gloves to preclude smudging the reflector surface. I. Install tubular quartz and HID (mercury vapor, metal halide and high pressure sodium) lamps in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions with regard to handling and lamp burning position. J. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities. K. Bond all fixtures to electrical grounding system in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and the National Electrical Code. L. Install and position emergency lighting unit lamps and remote lamps (as required) to provide foot candle levels required by authority having jurisdiction. M. Shielding such as plastic shields, plastic sleeves with end caps, shatterproof bulbs and/or other approved devices shall be provided for all artificial lighting fixtures located in areas where there is exposed food; clean equipment, utensils, and linens; or unwrapped single -service and single -use articles. N. Clean all fixtures after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. 3.2 DESIGN A. Indoor lighting shall be designed primarily for the safety and convenience of the customer and the staff and crew and, at the same time, create an attractive indoor environment. Indoor maintained lighting levels shall be as follows: 1. Maintained footcandle schedule (at 30 inches above finished floor) a. Kitchen: 60 — 80 F.C. b. Kitchen Support Area: 50 F.C. c. Customer Service 50 F.C. d. Dining Area: 35 — 45 F.C. e. Crew Room 40 F.C. f. Toilets 40 F.C. g. Stockroom Area: 35 F.C. h. Manager's Office: 45 F.C. i. Training Room: 45 F.C. j. General Office Space: 45 F.C. k. Remote Kitchen Support Areas: 35 F.C. INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 8 • I. Mechanical/Electrical Rooms: 30 F.C. m. Janitor's Closet: 25 F.C. n. Storage other than Stockroom: 25 F.C. o. Emergency Lighting: 1 F.C. in path of egress (minimum) p. PlayPlace: 50 — 80 F.G. B. The F.C. levels in the above schedule may be decreased for compliance with local energy codes. However, they shall not be less than 50 foot candles maintained at a surface where a food employee is working with unpackaged potentially hazardous food or with food, utensils, and equipment such as knives, slicers, grinders, or saws where employee safety is a factor. Areas where fresh warewashing, and equipment and utensil storage; and in toilet rooms shall be provided with at least 20 foot candles of light measured at a distance of 30° from the floor. A Tight intensity of at least 10 foot candles (110 lux) shall be provided in all areas and rooms during periods of cleaning (measured at a distance of 30° from the floor). 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. END OF SECTION 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 9 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. 2. Poles and accessories. 3. Luminaire lowering devices. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CRI: Color -rendering index. B. HID: High-intensity discharge. C. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. D. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination. E. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters. 2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. 3. Details of installation and construction. 4. Luminaire materials. 5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories. a. Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. 6. Photoelectric relays. 7. Ballasts, including energy -efficiency data. 8. Lamps, including life, output, and energy -efficiency data. 9. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles. 10. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for components involved. 11. Anchor bolts for poles. 12. Manufactured pole foundations. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Anchor -bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. 2. Design calculations, certified by a qualified professional engineer, indicating strength of screw foundations and soil conditions on which they are based. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring. C. Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of poles, certifying that products are designed for indicated load requirements in AASHTO LTS-4 and that load imposed by luminaire has been included in design. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 1 D. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures. E. Field quality -control test reports. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code." D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General Wan-anty: This special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the owner may have under other provisions of the contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660. C. Store poles on decay -resistant -treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation. Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation. D. Retain factory -applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage. 1. Wan-anty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: five years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: five years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Lamps: Replace lamps and fuses that fail within 24 months from date of Substantial Completion; furnish replacement lamps and fuses that fail within the second 24 months from date of Substantial Completion. 5. Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in finish, materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In Exterior Lighting Device Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by approved supplier as shown on drawings. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 2 2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with IESNA RP -8 for parameters of lateral light distribution pattems indicated for luminaires. C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp comers and edges. D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion -resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Fomi and support to prevent warping and sagging. E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light -tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires. F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens. G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel. H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field. J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging -resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors. L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory -assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials as indicated on drawings. 2.3 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS AND LAMPS A. Low -Temperature Ballast Capability: Rated by its manufacturer for reliable starting and operation of indicated lamp(s) at temperatures minus 20 deg F and higher. B. Ballast Characteristics: 1. Power Factor. 90 percent, minimum. 2. Sound Rating: A, except B for T12/HO ballasts. 3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 4. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1, energy-saving, high power factor, Class P, automatic -reset thermal protection. 5. Case Temperature for Compact Lamp Ballasts: 65 deg C, maximum. 6. Transient -Voltage Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 Category A or better. C. Fluorescent Lamps: Low -mercury type. Comply with the EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1. 2.4 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open -circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ballast Circuit: Constant -wattage autotransformer or regulating high -power -factor type. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 3 • 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F. 3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F. 4. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer. B. Auxiliary, Instant -On, Quartz System: Factory -installed feature automatically switches quartz lamp on when fixture is initially energized and when momentary power outages occur. System automatically tums quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent of light output. C. High -Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type with solid-state igniter/starter and capable of open - circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Igniter/starter shall have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90 deg C. 1. Instant -Restrike Device: Integral with ballast, or solid-state potted module, factory installed within fixture and compatible with lamps, ballasts, and mogul sockets up to 150 W. a. Restrike Range: 105- to 130-V ac. b. Maximum Voltage: 250-V peak or 150-V ac RMS. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F. 2.5 HID LAMPS A. High -Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), color temperature 1900 K, and average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum. 1. Dual -Arc Tube Lamp: Arranged so only one of two arc tubes is lighted at one time and, when power is restored after an outage, the cooler arc tube, with lower intemal pressure, lights instantly, providing an immediate 8 to 15 percent of normal light output. B. Metal -Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, with a minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K. C. Pulse -Start, Metal -Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K. D. Ceramic, Pulse -Start, Metal -Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000 K. 2.6 POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4. 1. Wind -Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure, permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in Part 1 "Structural Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article, with a gust factor of 1.3. 2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole selection strength analysis. B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts, unless otherwise indicated. C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion -resistant items compatible with support components. 1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, unless stainless-steel items are indicated. 3. Anchor -Bolt Template: Plywood or steel. D. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole -base flange. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." E. Power -Installed Screw Foundations: Factory fabricated by pole manufacturer, with structural steel complying with ASTM A 36 and hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123; and with top -plate and mounting bolts to match pole base flange and strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION A. Install lamps in each luminaire. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 4 B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports. 1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer. C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. 3.2 GROUNDING A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 1. Install grounding electrode for each pole, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding system. B. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 1. Install grounding electrode for each pole. 2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector. 3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations. 3.3 DESIGN A. Lot lighting levels are as follows: 1. Standard Lighting Levels: a. Entrance and Exit Drives: 8 F.C. b. Menu Board Area: 8 F.C. c. Trash Area: 8 F.C. d. Parking: 8 F.C. e. Balance of Site: 8 F.C. 2. Hi -Security Lighting Levels: a. Entire Site: 12 — 15 F.C. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source. 1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls. C. Illumination Tests: 1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST standards. Comply with the following IESNA testing guide(s): a. IESNA LM -64, "Photometric Measurements of Parking Areas." b. IESNA LM -72, "Directional Positioning of Photometric Data." D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. END OF SECTION 265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 5 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 271300 — VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes wire, cable, connecting devices, installation, and testing for wiring systems to be used as signal pathways for voice and high-speed data transmission. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. C. LAN: Local area network. D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. E. STP: Shielded twisted pair. F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Include data on features, ratings, and performance for each component specified. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views. Show equipment assemblies, method of field assembly, workspace requirements, and access for cable connections. C. Product Certificates: 1. For each type of cable, connector, and terminal equipment, signed by product manufacturer. D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that distribution racks and their components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work" when required by authority having jurisdiction. Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Base certification on the maximum number of components capable of being mounted in each rack type. Identify components on which certification is based. Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation: a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity of each rack -mounted component and of each assembled rack type, and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For •voice and data communication cabling to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS CABLING 271300 - 1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: As a minimum the installer must be certified by the termination manufacturer or by Building Industry Consulting Service International (BISCSI). B. Source Limitations: Obtain all products except twisted -pair and fiber cables through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of voice and data communication cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local exchange carrier. 1. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local exchange carrier representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces. 2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute to other participants. 3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames and cross -connect and patch panels in equipment rooms and wiring closets to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. General Requirements: Coordinate the features of materials and equipment so they form an integrated system. Match components and interconnections for optimum future performance. B. Expansion Capability: Unless otherwise indicated, provide spare fibers and conductor pairs in cables, positions in cross -connect and patch panels, and terminal strips to accommodate 20 percent future increase. As a minimum, provide 10 pair or more TeICo service entrance cable. 2.2 MOUNTING ELEMENTS A. Cable Supports: Comply with Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." B. Raceways and Boxes: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes." C. Backboards: 3/4 -inch, interior -grade, fire -retardant -treated plywood. D. Distribution Racks: Freestanding and wall -mounting, modular -steel units designed for telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported. 2.3 TWISTED -PAIR CABLES, CONNECTORS, AND TERMINAL EQUIPMENT A. Tables: Listed as complying with Category 3 and 5 of TIA/EIA-568-A. B. Conductors: Solid copper. C. UTP Cable: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-A. Four, thermoplastic -insulated, individually twisted pairs of conductors; No. 24 AWG, color -coded; enclosed in PVC jacket. D. STP Cable: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-A. Two, thermoplastic -insulated, individually twisted pairs of conductors; No. 22 AWG, color -coded, overall aluminum and polyester shield and No. 22 AWG, tinned - copper drain wire; enclosed in PVC jacket. VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS CABLING 271300 - 2 E. UTP and STP Plenum Cable: Listed for use in air -handling spaces. Features are as specified for cables, conductors, UTP cable, and STP workstation cable except materials are modified as required for listing. F. UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-A. IDC type, using modules designed for punch -down caps or tools. 1. IDC Terminal Block Modules: Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated. 2. IDC Connecting Hardware: Consistent throughout Project. G. STP Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-A for connectors, plugs, and jack assemblies. H. Cross -Connect Panel: Modular array of IDC terminal blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables. 1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables. 2. Mounting: Backboard or Rack. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple -numbered jack units with IDC -type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables. 1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four -pair conductor group of indicated cables, plus spares and blank positions adequate to satisfy specified expansion criteria. 2. Mounting: Backboard or Rack. J. Jacks and Jack Assemblies for UTP Cable: Modular, color -coded, RJ -11 or RJ -45 receptacle units with integral IDC -type terminals. Use keyed jacks for data service. K. UTP Patch Cords: Four -pair cables in 48 -inch lengths, terminated with RJ -45 plug at each end. Use keyed plugs for data service. L. STP Patch Cords: Two -pair cables in 48 -inch lengths, terminated with STP plug connectors at both ends. Match plug connectors with patch -panel connectors. M. Data Outlets: Dual jack -connector assemblies mounted in single or multi -gang faceplate. 1. Faceplate: High -impact plastic. 2. Mounting: Flush, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Legend: Factory labeled, "Voice" and "Data," by silk-screening or engraving. 2.4 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE, CONNECTORS, AND TERMINAL EQUIPMENT A. Cables: Factory fabricated, jacketed, low loss, glass type, fiber optic, multimode, graded index, operating at 850 and 1300 nm: 1. Data, Strands per Cable: Two. 2. Backbone, Strands per Cable: 12, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Dimensions: 62.5 -micrometer core diameter, 125 -micrometer cladding diameter. 4. Maximum Attenuation: Minus 3.75 dB/km at 850 nm; minus 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm. 5. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz/km at 850 nm; 500 MHz/km at 1300 nm. 6. Operating Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 70 deg C. B. Plenum Cable: Listed for use in plenums. C. Cable Connectors: Quick -connect, simplex- and duplex -type SC couplers with self -centering, axial alignment mechanisms. Insertion loss not more than 0.7 dB. D. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple -numbered, duplex cable connectors. 1. Permanent Connection: Permanently connect one end of each connector module to installed cable fiber. 2. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field, plus spares and blank positions adequate to satisfy specified expansion criteria. 3. Mounting: Backboard or Rack. E. Patch Cords: Dual fiber cables in 36 -inch lengths: 1. Terminations: Two duplex connectors arranged to mate with patch -panel connectors, one at each end of each fiber in cord. VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS CABLING 271300 - 3 F. Data Outlets: Flush dual fiber-optic connector assemblies mounted in two -gang faceplate with flush dual RJ -45 jack assembly. 1. Faceplate: High -impact plastic. 2. Mounting: Flush, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Legend: Factory labeled, fiber-optic connectors "Data" and RJ -45 jacks "Voice/Data," by engraving. 2.5 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and the following: 1. Cable Labels: Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl -doth wraparound tape markers, machine printed with alphanumeric cable designations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways, cable trays, cable supports, and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces where unenclosed wiring supports method may be used. Use UL -listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. B. Install cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with Category 5 rating of components and that ensure Category 5 performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end. C. Install cables without damaging conductors, shield, or jacket. D. Do not bend cables, in handling or in installing, to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. E. Pull cables without exceeding cable manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. 1. Pull cables simultaneously if more than one is being installed in same raceway. 2. Use pulling compound or lubricant if necessary. Use compounds that will not damage conductor or insulation. 3. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire or cable grips, that will not damage media or raceway. F. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members and follow surface contours where possible. G. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. H. Wiring within Wiring Cabinets and Enclosures: Provide conductors of adequate length. Train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Use lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. I. Separation of Wires: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A rules for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cabling from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines, conduits, lighting fixtures, motors, transformers, and other electrical equipment. J. Make splices, taps, and terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross -connect and patch panels. K. Use splice and tap connectors compatible with media types. VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS CABLING 271300 - 4 3.3 GROUNDING A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding." B. Ground cable shields, drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common -mode retums, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. C. Bond shields and drain conductors to ground at only one point in each circuit. D. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate in each cabinet and enclosure; isolate from power system and equipment grounding. 3.4 INSTALLATION IN EQUIPMENT ROOMS A. Install plywood backboards on wall of equipment room(s). B. Mount patch panels, terminal strips, and other connecting hardware on backboards, unless otherwise indicated. C. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields. D. Use patch panels to terminate cables entering the space, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 INSTALLATION STANDARDS A. Comply with requirements in TIA/EIA-568-A and TIA/EIA-569-A. 3.6 IDENTIFICATION A. In addition to requirements in this Article, comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems " and TIA/EIA-606. B. Data jack location: Label cables within outlet boxes. C. Distribution Cabinets, Racks, Enclosures and Frames: Label each unit and field within that unit. D. Within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable - terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service. E. Cables, General: Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. F. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet. G. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and dear plastic cover. H. Use jacket color coding standard for cabling serving different functions such as voice, data, security, and video. 3.7 CLEANING A. On completion of system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips, scratches, and abrasions. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS CABLING 271300 - 5 1. Operational Test: After installation of cables and connectors, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. Test each signal path for end-to-end performance from each end of all pairs installed. Remove temporary connections when tests have been satisfactorily completed. 2. Copper Cable Procedures: Inspect for physical damage and test each conductor signal path for continuity and shorts. Use Class 2, bi-directional, Category 5 tester. Test for faulty connectors, splices, and terminations. Test according to TIA/EIA-TSB67, "Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing of Unshielded Twisted -Pair Cabling Systems." Link performance for UTP cables must meet minimum criteria of TIA/EIA-568-A. 3. Fiber -Optic Cable Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test, including optional procedures, stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.25. Certify compliance with test parameters and manufacturer's written recommendations. Test optical performance with optical power meter capable of generating light at all appropriate wavelengths. B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 271300 VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS CABLING 271300 - 6 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 271500 — CONTROUSIGNAL TRANSMISSION MEDIA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes premises wiring for telephone distribution, including installations for service by local telephone exchange carrier. B. This Section also includes the following types of control and signal transmission media: 1. Coaxial cable. 2. Twisted -pair cable. 3. Video -pair cable. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems". 2. Division 27 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Basket Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of wire mesh bottom and side rails. B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. C. Channel Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of a one-piece, ventilated -bottom or solid -bottom channel. D. Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into fumiture pathways. E. Cross -Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross - connection. F. Distribution Circuit: Circuit from the network interface device to a distribution device, such as a terminal block or junction box. G. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. H. Exchange Access Line: Circuit carrying telephone service into the premises. i. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. J. Ladder Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of two longitudinal side rails connected by individual transverse members (rungs). K. LAN: Local area network. L. Local Exchange Carrier. Telephone utility or other entity that provides an access line from a local exchange into the premises. M. MUTOA: Multi-user telecommunications outlet assembly, a grouping in one location of several telecommunications outlet/connectors. CONTROUSIGNAL TRANSMISSION MEDIA 271500 -1 N. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable terminates. O. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. P. Solid -Bottom or Non -ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of longitudinal side rails and a bottom without ventilation openings. Q. Station Circuit: Circuit from a distribution device to a telecommunications outlet. R. Telecommunications Outlet: Telephone jack for connecting equipment to communication circuits. S. Trough or Ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of longitudinal side rails and a bottom having openings for the passage of air. T. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for control/signal transmission media. C. Product certificates, acknowledged by the communication system manufacturers, certifying that the cables are suitable for the connected equipment as described in "Quality Assurance" Article below. D. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results. E. Maintenance data for cables to include in the "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in Division 01. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Connected Equipment Manufacturer Certification: Where cables specified in this Section are used to provide signal paths for systems specified in other Sections of these Specifications, or for systems fumished under other contracts, obtain review of the cable characteristics and certification for use with the connected system equipment by the connected equipment manufacturers. B. Testing Firm Qualifications: In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Control Services," an independent testing firm shall meet OSHA criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories, Title 29, Part 1907, or shall be a full member company of the International Electrical Testing Association (NETA). C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by an approved testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended use. D. Meet performance requimients specified in ANSIE/EIATTIA 568A and EIA/TIA 570. E. Comply with latest edition of NFPA 70. F. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed and Labeled": As defined in the "National Electrical Code," Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910. G. Single -Source Responsibility: All cable of each kind shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate premises wiring with requirements of local telephone exchange carrier. B. Coordinate premises wiring with requirements of telephone equipment supplier. CONTROUSIGNAL TRANSMISSION MEDIA 271500 - 2 • PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRONIC CABLE A. Single Conductor Coaxial: 50 -ohm characteristic impedance, cellular polyethylene core, 97 percent coverage, bare copper -braid shield, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket; conforming to MIL -C-17, Type RG -58/U. B. Single Conductor Coaxial: 75 -ohm characteristic impedance, solid polyethylene core, 97 percent coverage, copper -braid shield, polyethylene jacket; conforming to MIL -C-17, Type RG-6A/U. C. Direct Burial Coaxial: Single conductor, 75 -ohm characteristic impedance, 18 AWG copper -clad, steel - center conductor, solid polyethylene dielectric, 34 AWG bare copper -braid outer conductor shield with 95 percent coverage, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket. D. Aerial Coaxial: Single conductor, 75 -ohm characteristic impedance, 18 AWG copper -clad, steel -center conductor, cellular expanded polyethylene dielectric, 34 AWG bare copper -braid outer conductor shield with 95 percent coverage, ultraviolet -resistant polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket. E. Single Conductor Plenum Coaxial: 75 -ohm characteristic impedance, solid bare copper central conductor, foamed Teflon dielectric, 100 percent coverage tinned -copper, double -braid shield, Teflon jacket, suitable for installation in air -handling spaces; conforming to MIL -C-17, Type RG -11/U. F. Twin Lead: Bare copper -covered steel, 2 -conductor parallel, 300 -ohm characteristic impedance, polyethylene insulation and web between conductors, cellular polyethylene oval jacket. G. Multiconductor Cable: Quantity of conductors indicated; 18 AWG tinned -copper conductors; color coded, low -loss polyvinyl chloride (PVC) insulation; aluminum/mylar shield and 22 AWG tinned -copper drain wire; PVC jacket. H. Twisted Pair. Single twisted pair of 22 AWG tinned -copper conductors; color -coded, low -loss polyethylene insulation; unshielded. I. Twisted Pair. Quantity of twisted pairs indicated; 22 AWG tinned -copper conductors; color -coded, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) insulation; overall aluminum/polyester shield and 22 AWG tinned -copper drain wire; PVC jacket. J. Twisted -Pair Plenum: Quantity of twisted pairs indicated; 24 AWG, 7 -strand, tinned -copper conductors; Teflon insulation; overall aluminum/polyester shield and 22 AWG tinned -copper drain wire; Teflon jacket; suitable for use in air -handling spaces. K. Video Pair. Balanced pair coaxial cable, 125 -ohm characteristic impedance, 16 AWG soft -drawn, bare copper conductors twisted to form pairs, expanded polyethylene core insulation, copper shielding tape, expanded polyester film covering. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Comply with EIA/TIA 568A and EIA/TIA 570. B. Telecommunications and Auxiliary Disconnect Outlets: Four -position modular, latching, plug -type, jack -in, flush -mounting wall plate, unless otherwise indicated. C. Wall Plates: Designed for telephone service. Match those indicated for power receptacle outlets in same spaces for materials and finish. For wall telephone units, include provision for support of unit. D. Distribution and Station Cable: Four -pair, No. 24 AWG, solid -copper, unshielded, twisted -pair construction in PVC sheath. 1. Comply with ICEA S-80-576. 2. Plenum cable listed for use in plenums where required. E. Cabinets: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" Fumish cabinets with backboard. F. Backboard: 3/4 -inch interior grade plywood. CONTROUSIGNAL TRANSMISSION MEDIA 271500 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine raceways and other elements to receive cable for compliance with installation tolerances and other adverse conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install cable as indicated, according to manufacturers written instructions. 1. Install transmission media without damaging conductors, shield, or jacket. 2. Do not bend cable, in handling or installation, to smaller radii than minimum recommended by manufacturer. B. Pull cables without exceeding cable manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. 1. Pull cables simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. 2. Use pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. 3. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire/cable grips that will not damage media or raceway. C. Install exposed cable parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. D. Use splice and tap connectors that are compatible with cable material. 1. Make no splices except at indicated splice points. E. Bond shields and drain conductors to ground at only one point in each circuit. F. Connect components to wiring system and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturers published torque -tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A. G. Telephone Service: Comply with local telephone exchange carriers requirements for details of telephone service. Provide a complete and fully functional telephone service for restaurant. H. Install 10 pair or more multiconductor telephone cable in underground raceway, as required in Division 27 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling", between restaurant and telephone demarcation point. I. Existing Telephone Outlets and Wiring: Maintain fully operational until new system has been tested and is operational. As new outlets are installed, label them "Not in Service" with temporary labels. J. Install outlet boxes and telecommunications outlets. K. Install cable without damaging conductors and jacket. 1. Do not bend cable to a smaller radius than minimum recommended by manufacturer. L. Install premises wiring in raceways, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install cables in raceway and terminate raceway with a bushing in ceiling space above outlet. 2. Use pulling methods that will not damage cable or raceway, including fish tape, cable, rope, and wire -cable grips. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. 3. Pull cables simultaneously where more than one is being installed in the same raceway or at the same location. 4. Conceal raceway, except in unfinished spaces and as indicated. M. Secure cable to independent supports at intervals as required to prevent sagging between supports. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment. 1. Install ground terminal at local exchange carrier service location and connect according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" and "Identification for Electrical System". CONTROUSIGNAL TRANSMISSION MEDIA 271500 - 4 2. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturers published torque -tightening values. If manufacturers torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify components and circuits according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems". B. Identify telephone system backboards and cabinets with the legend "Telephone." C. Identify terminals at terminal strips, telecommunications outlets, and pull -and -junction boxes with approved designations. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Upon installation of cable and before energizing, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1. Copper Cable Procedures: Inspect for physical damage and test cable for continuity and shorts. Use time domain reflectometer with strip chart recording capability and anomaly resolution to within 12 inches in runs up to 1000 feet in length. Test cable segments for faulty connectors, splices, terminations, and the integrity of the cable and its component parts. 2. Test continuity of each circuit pair loop. B. Correct malfunctioning units at site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest. 3.6 CLEANING A. Upon completion of system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips, scratches, and abrasions. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Operate control/signal systems to demonstrate proper functioning. Replace malfunctioning cable with new materials, and then retest and recommission until satisfactory performance is achieved. END OF SECTION 271500 CONTROUSIGNAL TRANSMISSION MEDIA 271500 - 5 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 283111 - FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire -alarm control panel. 2. Manual stations. 3. Detectors. 4. Signal Equipment. 5. Controls. 6. Devices. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door closers/holders/smoke detectors, electric door locks, and release devices that interface with fire alarm systems. 2. Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems". 3. Division 27 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. FACP: Fire alarm control panel. B. LED: Light -emitting diode. C. Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Noncoded, zoned system with manual and automatic alarm initiation; and hard -wired for signal transmission, using separate individual circuits for each zone of alarm initiation and notification appliances, or an addressable type system, per building requirements, and the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General Submittal Requirements: 1. Construction documents indicate design intent for the fire alarm system only. Contractor shall provide all required submittals and drawings to Authority Having Jurisdiction meeting local requirements and requirements listed below. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Show details of graphic enunciator at FACP. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems differentiating between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. 3. Include battery -size calculations. 4. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits. 5. Device Address List (Addressable Systems): Coordinate with final system programming. FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 1 • 6. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable. 7. Voltage drop calculations. 8. Operating Instructions: For mounting at the FACP. 9. Identify terminals, wire designation, and wiring color -codes to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance. 10. Indicate types and sizes of field installed system wiring. D. Coordination Drawings: Plans, sections, and elevations drawn to scale and coordinating installation of smoke detectors in ducts and access to them. Show the following near each duct smoke provision of detector installation: 1. Size and location of ducts, including lining. 2. Size and location of piping. 3. Size and an-angement of structural elements. 4. Size and location of duct smoke detector, including air -sampling elements. E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of system components certifying that products fumished comply with requirements. F. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with requirements. G. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. Comply with NFPA 72. H. Maintenance Data: For fire alarm systems to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01. Comply with NFPA 72. Submissions to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for Submittals specified in Division 01 Section "Submittals," make an identical submission to authorities having jurisdiction. Include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations to facilitate review. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Area Construction Manager for review. J. Certificate of Completion: Comply with NFPA 72. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing code compliant fire -alarm systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. 1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer or qualified fire alarm system designer, as required by the local authority having jurisdiction. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a minimum five year record of successful in-service performance. C. Source Limitations for Fire -Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire -alarm system from single source from single manufacturer. D. Coordinate fire alarm system design with fire suppression system as required. E. Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with applicable building code, local ordinances and regulations, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. F. Comply with NFPA 72. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Existing Fire -Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 2 • Remove labels from new equipment when put into service and label existing fire -alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building. B. Installer's responsibilities include designing fabricating, and installing code compliant fire alarm systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibilities, or as required by authority having jurisdiction. C. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire -alarm system, remove existing disconnected fire -alarm equipment and wiring and restore damaged surfaces. 1. Package operational fire alarm and detection equipment that has been removed and deliver to Owner/Area Construction Manager. 2. Remove from site and legally dispose of existing material not designated for other disposition. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A. Control of System: By the FACP. B. System Supervision: Automatically detect and report open circuits, shorts, and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and notification -appliance circuits. C. Priority of Signals: Automatic alarm response functions resulting from an alarm signal from one zone or device are not altered by subsequent alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals. An alarm signal is the highest priority. Supervisory and trouble signals have second- and third -level priority. Higher -priority signals take precedence over signals of lower priority, even when the lower -priority condition occurs first. Annunciate and display all alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals regardless of priority or order received. D. Noninterference: A signal on one zone shall not prevent the receipt of signals from other zones. E. System Reset: All zones are manually resettable from the FACP after initiating devices are restored to normal. F. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically route alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station by means of a digital alarm communicator transmitter and telephone lines or radio frequency where required by Authority Having Jurisdiction. G. System Alarm Capability during Circuit Fault Conditions: System wiring and circuit arrangement shall not prevent alarm capability when a single ground occurs in an initiating device circuit, signal line circuit, or notification -appliance circuit. H. Loss of primary power at the FACP initiates a trouble signal at the FACP. The FACP indicates when the fire alarm system is operating on the secondary power supply. Basic Alarm Performance Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, operation of a manual station, automatic alarm operation of a smoke, heat, duct, or flame or heat detector, activation of fire suppression unit, or operation of a sprinkler flow device initiates the following: 1. Notification -appliance operation. 2. Identification at the FACP of the zone originating the alarm. 3. Identification at the FACP of the device originating the alarm (Addressable Systems). 4. Transmission of an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 5. Unlocking of electric door locks in designated egress paths. 6. Release of fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. 7. Shutdown of fans and other air -handling equipment serving zone when alarm was initiated. 8. Closing of smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving zone where alarm was initiated. 9. Recording of the event in the system memory. J. Alarm Silencing, System Reset and Indication: Controlled by switches in the FACP: 1. Silencing -switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and activates an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is retained. 2. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification appliances until silencing switch is operated again. 3. When alarm -initiating devices retum to normal and system reset switch is operated, notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset. FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 3 • K. Water -flow alarm switch operation initiates the following: 1. Notification -appliance operation. 2. Flashing of the device location -indicating light for the device that has operated. L. Sprinkler valve -supervisory (tamper) switch operation initiates the following: 1. A supervisory, audible, and visible "valve -tamper" signal indication at the FACP. 2. Flashing of the device location -indicating light for the device that has operated. 3. Transmission of supervisory signal to remote alarm receiving station. M. Low -air -pressure switch operation on a dry -pipe or preaction sprinkler system initiates the following: 1. A supervisory, audible, and visible "sprinkler trouble" signal indication at the FACP. 2. Flashing of the device location -indicating light for the device that has operated. 3. Transmission of trouble signal to remote central station. N. Remote Detector Sensitivity Adjustment (Addressable Systems): Manipulation of controls at the FACP causes the selection of specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display of their current status and sensitivity settings, and control of changes in those settings. Same controls can be used to program repetitive, scheduled, automated changes in sensitivity of specific detectors. Sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity -adjustment schedule changes are recorded in system memory. O. Removal of an alarm -initiating device or a notification appliance initiates the following: 1. A 'trouble" signal indication at the FACP for the device or zone involved. 2. Transmission of trouble signal to remote alarm receiving station. P. FACP Alphanumeric Display: Plain -English-language descriptions of alarm, supervisory, and trouble events; and addresses and locations of alarm -initiating or supervisory devices originating the report. Display monitoring actions, system and component status, system commands, programming information, and data from the system's historical memory. 2.2 MANUAL PULL STATIONS A. Description: Fabricated of metal or plastic, and finished in red with molded, raised -letter operating instructions of contrasting color, acceptable to authority having jurisdiction: 1. Single-action mechanism initiates an alarm. 2. Double -action mechanism requires two actions, such as a push and a pull, to initiate an alarm (where required by Authority Having Jurisdiction). 3. Station Reset: Key or wrench operated; double pole, double throw; switch rated for the voltage and current at which it operates. 4. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory -fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery -powered audible horn intended to discourage false alarm operation. 5. Integral Addressable Module (Addressable Systems): An-anged to communicate manual -station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP. 2.3 SMOKE DETECTORS A. General: Include the following features: 1. Operating Voltage: To match voltage of fire alarm system. 2. Self -Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. 3. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components are mounted in a module that connects in a tamper-resistant manner to a fixed base with a twist -locking plug connection. Terminals in the fixed base accept building wiring. 4. Integral Visual -Indicating Light: LED type. Indicates detector has operated. 5. Sensitivity: Can be tested and adjusted in-place after installation. 6. Integral Addressable Module (Addressable Systems): Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP. 7. Remote Controllability (Addressable Systems): Unless otherwise indicated, detectors are analog - addressable type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP. B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: Include the following features: 1. Sensor. LED or infrared light source with matching silicon -cell receiver. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 4 • • 2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A. 3. Integral Thermal Detector. Fixed -temperature type with 135 deg F setting. C. Ionization Detector. Include the following features: 1. Responsive to both visible and invisible products of combustion. 2. Self -compensating for changes in environmental conditions. D. Beam -Type Smoke Detector: Each detector consists of a separate transmitter and receiver with the following features: 1. Adjustable Sensitivity: More than a six -level range, minimum. 2. Linear Range of Coverage: 600 feet , minimum. 3. Tamper Switch: Initiates trouble signal at the central FACP when either transmitter or receiver is disturbed. 4. Separate Color -Coded LEDs: Indicate normal, alarm, and trouble status. Any detector trouble, including power loss, is reported to the central FACP as a composite "trouble" signal. E. Duct Smoke Detector. Ionization type: 1. Sampling Tube: Design and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 2. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor -control circuit. 2.4 OTHER DETECTORS A. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or rate of rise of temperature that exceeds 15 deg F per minute, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke detector bases. 2. Integral Addressable Module (Addressable Systems): Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP. B. Heat Detector, Fixed -Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 190 deg F. 1. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke detector bases. 2. Integral Addressable Module (Addressable Systems): Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP. C. Flame Detector. Ultraviolet type with solid-state amplifier -switching circuit set for 10 -second delay, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke detector bases. 2. Integral Addressable Module (Addressable Systems): Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP. 2.5 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Description: Equip for mounting as indicated and have screw terminals for system connections. 1. Combination Devices: Factory -integrated audible and visible devices in a single -mounting assembly. B. Bells: Electric -vibrating, 24-V dc, under -dome type; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind the bell. When operating, bells provide a sound -pressure level of 94 dB, measured 10 feet from the bell. 10 -inch size, unless otherwise indicated. Bells are weatherproof where indicated. C. Chimes, Low -Level Output: Vibrating type, 75 dB minimum rated output. D. Chimes, High -Level Output: Vibrating type, 81 dB minimum rated output. E. Homs: Electric -vibrating -polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Homs produce a sound -pressure level of 90 dB, measured 10 feet (3 m) from the hom. F. Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971 with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens. Mount lens on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1 -inch- high letters on the lens 1. Rated Light Output: 75 candela. G. Tone Speakers: FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 5 • • 1. High -Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W. 2. Low -Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W. 3. Mounting: Flush, semirecessed, surface, or surface -mounted; bidirectional as indicated. 4. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to the acoustical environment of the speaker location. 2.6 REMOTE DEVICE LOCATION -INDICATING LIGHTS AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES A. Description: LED indicating light near each smoke or duct detector that may not be readily visible, and each sprinkler water -flow switch and valve -tamper switch. Light is connected to flash when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp is flush mounted in a single gang wall plate. A red, laminated, phenolic -resin identification plate at the indicating light identifies, in engraved white letters, device initiating the signal and room where the smoke detector or valve is located. For water -flow switches, the identification plate also designates protected spaces downstream from the water -flow switch. 2.7 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with matching door plate. 1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-Ibf (111-N) holding force. 2. Wall -Mounted Units: Flush mounted, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Rating: To match fire alarm system. B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware. 2.8 CENTRAL FACP A. Cabinet: Lockable steel enclosure. An-ange interior components so operations required for testing or for normal maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than one unit is required to form a complete control panel, fabricate with matching modular unit enclosure to accommodate components and to allow ample gutter space for field wiring and interconnecting panels. 1. Identify each enclosure with an engraved, red, laminated, phenolic -resin nameplate with lettering not less than 1 inch high. Identify individual components and modules within cabinets with permanent labels. 2. Mounting: Flush or Surface per application. B. Alarm and Supervisory Systems: Separate and independent in the FACP. Alarm -initiating zone boards consist of plug-in cards. Construction requiring removal of field wiring for module replacement is unacceptable. C. Control Modules: Include types and capacities required to perform all functions of fire alarm systems. D. Indications: Local, visible, and audible signals announce alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions. Each type of audible alarm has a different sound. E. Indicating Lights and System Controls: Individual LED devices identify zones transmitting signals. Zone lights distinguish between alarm and trouble signals, and indicate the type of device originating the signal. Manual switches and push -to -test buttons do not require a key to operate. Controls include the following. 1. Alarm acknowledge switch. 2. Alarrn silence switch. 3. System reset switch. 4. LED test switch. F. Resetting Controls: Prevent the resetting of alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals while the alarm or trouble condition still exists. G. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at the FACP and addressable system components, including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu. 1. Display: Liquid -crystal type, 40 characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands. H. Instructions: Printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless- steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions. FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 6 • 2.9 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY A. General: Components include nickel -cadmium battery, charger, and an automatic transfer switch: 1. Battery Nominal Life Expectancy: 20 years, minimum. B. Battery Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72. 1. Magnetic door holders are not served by emergency power. Magnetic door holders are released when normal power fails. C. Battery Charger. Solid-state, fully automatic, variable -charging -rate type. Provide capacity for 150 percent of the connected system load while maintaining batteries at full charge. If batteries are fully discharged, the charger recharges them completely within four hours. Charger output is supervised as part of system power supply supervision. D. Integral Automatic Transfer Switch: Transfers the load to the battery without loss of signals or status indications when normal power fails. 2.10 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a multiplex system address for listed fire and sprinkler alarm -initiating devices with normally open contacts. 2.11 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER A. Utilized where required by Authority Having Jurisdiction. B. Listed and labeled under UL 864 and NFPA 72. C. Functional Performance: Unit receives an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from the FACP panel, and automatically captures one or two telephone lines and dials a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with the central station(s), the signal is transmitted. The unit supervises up to two telephone lines. Where supervising two lines, if service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, the unit initiates a local trouble signal and transmits a signal indicating Toss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. When telephone service is restored, unit automatically reports that event to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, the local trouble signal is initiated. D. Secondary Power. Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. Battery capacity is adequate to comply with NFPA 72 requirements. E. Self Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station or as required by NFPA 72 and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 2.12 WIRE A. Non -Power -Limited Circuits: Solid -copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color -coded insulation. 1. Low -Voltage Circuits: No. 14 AWG, minimum. 2. Line -Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum. B. Power -Limited Circuits: NFPA 70, Types FPL, FPLR, or FPLP, as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire -alarm equipment. B. Connect the FACP with a disconnect switch with lockable handle or cover. C. Manual Pull Stations: Mount semiflush in recessed back boxes. D. Water -Flow Detectors and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each sprinkler valve station required to be supervised. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 7 • • E. Ceiling -Mounted Smoke Detectors: Not less than 4 inches from a side wall to the near edge. For exposed solid -joist construction, mount detectors on the bottom of joists. On smooth ceilings, install not more than 30 feet apart in any direction. F. Wall -Mounted Smoke Detectors: At least 4 inches , but not more than 12 inches , below the ceiling. G. Smoke Detectors near Air Registers: Install no closer than 60 inches. H. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with manufacturers written instructions. 1. Verify that each unit is listed for the complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air -handling system is operating. 2. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of the duct. I. Audible Alarm -Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. Install bells and homs on flush -mounted back boxes with the device -operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Combine audible and visible alarms at the same location into a single unit. J. Visible Alarm -Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm hom per the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Mount at 80" AFF per ADA requirements or at least 6 inches below the ceiling, whichever is lower. K. Device Location -Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor. L. FACP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor. 3.2 WRING INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems". Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces and as indicated. B. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power -limited and non -power -limited conductors as recommended by the manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp - on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors. C. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made. D. Color -Coding: Color -code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color -code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color -code for supervisory circuits. Color -code audible alarm -indicating circuits differently from alarm -initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm - indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from the FACP. C. Paint power -supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM." 3.4 GROUNDING A. Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's written instructions to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common -mode retums, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power system and equipment grounding. FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 8 • • C. Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields. For audio circuits, minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common -mode retums, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Provide 5 - ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground resistance. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -assembled components and connections and to supervise pretesting, testing, and adjustment of the system. Report results in writing. B. Pretesting: After installation, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform complete pretesting. Determine, through pretesting, the compliance of the system with requirements of Drawings and Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones, and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic recording of acceptance test results. C. Report of Pretesting: After pretesting is complete, provide a letter certifying the installation is complete and fully operable, including the names and titles of witnesses to preliminary tests. D. Final Test Notice: Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing by Area Construction Manager and Authority Having Jurisdiction. E. Minimum System Tests: Test the system according to procedures outlined in NFPA 72. Minimum required tests are as follows: 1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. 2. Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation -testing device. 3. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the circuit resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit on record drawings. 4. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual. 5. Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission under open circuit conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of initiating and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to Bass of wiring used. 6. Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response at the control unit per manufacturer's testing requirements. 7. Test the system for all specified functions according to the approved operation and maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified functional performance items at each station, including making all possible alarm and monitoring initiations and using all communications options. For each item, observe related performance at all devices required to be affected by the item under all system sequences. Observe indicating lights, displays, signal tones, and annunciator indications. 8. Test Both Primary and Secondary Power. Verify by test that the secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the period and in the manner specified. F. Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets Specifications and complies with applicable standards. G. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed test results in the form of a test log. Submit log on the satisfactory completion of tests. H. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily completed. 3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and marred finish to match original finish. Clean unit intemally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 283111 FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 9 11 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Protecting existing trees to remain. 2. Removal of designated trees and other vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above- and below -grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities. 7. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 02 Section "Structure Demolition" for demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface -soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter, and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other non -soil materials. B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site -clearing operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide altemate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract. 1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Area Construction Manager. C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place. SITE CLEARING 311000 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when satisfactory soil materials are not available on- site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. 3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL •- . 3 A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil - bearing water runoff or airbome dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to a sediment and erosion control plan, specific to the site, complying with EPA 832/R-92-005 or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. TREE PROTECTION A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete. 1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area. 2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area. 3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash. B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated. C. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow -tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected and covered with soil. 3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches in diameter with an emulsified asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. 4. Backfill with soil as soon as possible. D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1. Employ an arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs. 2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full -growth status, as determined by arborist. 3.4 UTILITIES A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. 1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. SITE CLEARING 311000 - 2 • • B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving adjacent facilities unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not Tess than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architects written permission. C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. :3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. 1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone. 5. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site. B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. 3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. 1. Remove subsoil and non -soil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials. C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones. 3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil. 3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS A. Remove existing above and below -grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated. 1. Unless existing full -depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw -cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw -cut faces vertically. 2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion. 3.8 DISPOSAL A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other non -recyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. END OF SECTION 311000 SITE CLEARING 311000 - 3 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING IPART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing subgrades for slabs -on -grade, walks, pavements, lawns and grasses, and exterior plants. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for slabs -on -grade. 4. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements. 5. Subbase and base course for asphalt paving. 6. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 7. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches. 8. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits for buried utility strictures. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for granular course if placed over vapor retarder and beneath the slab -on -grade. 2. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures, site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above and below grade improvements and utilities. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low -strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot -mix asphalt paving. C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. E. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab -on -grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water. F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume that exceed a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches when tested by an independent geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586. E4RTH MOVING 312000 - 1 I. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. J. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot -mix asphalt pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot -mix asphalt walk. K. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. L. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. 3. Contact utility -locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups. 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1 -inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse -aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. EARTH MOVING 312000 - 2 • I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse -aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1 -inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. J. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand. K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Waming Tape: Acid and alkali -resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing." C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing," during earthwork operations. 3.2 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. 3.3 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. 3.4 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. - 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross-sections, elevations and subgrades. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. 1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. Provide 12 inch clearance at each side of pipe or conduit. EARTH MOVING 312000 - 3 • • C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. 1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple -duct conduit units, hand -excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. 2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. 3. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. 3.7 SUBGRADE INSPECTION A. Proof -roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic -tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof -roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. Completely proof -roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof -rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting and replace with compacted backfill or fill. B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation. 3.8 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28 -day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect. 3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.10 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.11 IJTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. C. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in - Place Concrete." D. Provide 4 -inch thick, concrete -base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase. EARTH MOVING 312000 - 4 E. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation. G. Install waming tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.12 SOIL FILL A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.13 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.14 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand - operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent. 4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent. 3.15 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. EARTH MOVING 312000 - 5 C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10 -foot straightedge. • 3.16 A. Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. • SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows: 1. Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross -slope grades. 2. Place subbase and base course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 3. Place subbase and base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. 4. Compact subbase and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. 3.17 DRAINAGE COURSE A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under concrete slabs -on -grade as follows: 1. Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 2. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. 3. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality -control testing. B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect. 1. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.19 PROTECTION A. Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.20 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END 01= SECTION 312000 EARTH MOVING 312000 - 6 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING FART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hot -mix asphalt paving. 2. Asphalt surface treatments. 3. Pavement -marking paint. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for aggregate subbase and base courses and for aggregate pavement shoulders. 1.3 DEFINITION A. Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. 1. Job -Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix proposed for the Work. 13. Shop Drawings: Indicate pavement markings, lane separations, and defined parking spaces. Indicate, with intemational symbol of accessibility, spaces allocated for people with disabilities. C. Material Certificates: For each paving material, from manufacturer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving -mix manufacturer registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of state in which Project is located. 13. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of applicable State DOT for asphalt paving work. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to hot -mix asphalt paving including, but not limited to, the following: a. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location of plant that will manufacture hot -mix asphalt. b. Review condition of subgrade and preparatory work. c. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic during installation period and for remainder of construction period. d. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 1 • • 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pavement -marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of manufacture, and directions for storage. B. Store pavement -marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location within temperature range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following conditions are not met: 1. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F. 2. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of placement. 3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of placement. B. Pavement -Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 55 deg F for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AGGREGATES A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations. B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or cured, crushed blast - furnace slag. C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073, sharp -edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, gravel, cured blast - furnace slag, or combinations thereof. 1. For hot -mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total aggregate mass. D. Mineral Filler. ASTM D 242, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material. 2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Asphalt Binder. AASHTO M 320 or AASHTO MP 1 a, PG 64-22. B. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977 emulsified asphalt, or ASTM D 2397 cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application. C. Water. Potable. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA. Provide in granular, liquid, or wettable powder form. B. Pavement -Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with FS TT -P-1952, Type II, with drying time of less than three minutes. 1. Color. Yellow, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. C. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1. D. Wheel Stops: Precast, air -entrained concrete, 2500 -psi minimum compressive strength, 4-1/2 inches high by 9 inches wide by 72 inches long. Provide chamfered comers, drainage slots on underside, and holes for anchoring to substrate. 1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4 -inch diameter, 10 -inch minimum length. ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 2 • • 2.4 MIXES A. Hot -Mix Asphalt Dense, hot -laid, hot -mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having jurisdiction and complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located. 2. Base Course: 2 -inches, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.. 3. Surface Course: 1-1/2 inches, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving. B. Proof -roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic -tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof -roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. Completely proof -roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof -rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 COLD MILLING A. Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross sections indicated. 1. Mill to a depth of 2 -inches. 2. Mill to a uniform finished surface free of excessive gouges, grooves, and ridges. 3. Control rate of milling to prevent tearing of existing asphalt course. 4. Repair or replace curbs, manholes, and other construction damaged during cold milling. 5. Excavate and trim unbound -aggregate base course, if encountered, and keep material separate from milled hot -mix asphalt. 6. Transport milled hot -mix asphalt to asphalt recycling facility. 7. Keep milled pavement surface free of loose material and dust. 3.3 PATCHING A. Hot -Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound -aggregate base course to form new subgrade. 13. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot -mix asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot -mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. C. Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot -mix asphalt base mix for full thickness of patch and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface. 3.4 REPAIRS A. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot -mix asphalt surface course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch in existing pavements. 1. Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 3 inches thick. B. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of 1/4 inch. 1. Clean cracks and joints in existing hot -mix asphalt pavement. 2. Use emulsified -asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than 1/4 inch wide. Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess. ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 3 •I • 3. Use hot -applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than 1/4 inch wide. Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess. 3.5 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted -aggregate base before applying paving materials. 1. Mix herbicide with prime coat if formulated by manufacturer for that purpose. C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot -mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. 3.6 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PLACING A. Machine place hot -mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted. 1. Place hot -mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated. 2. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F. 3. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of one-way slopes unless otherwise indicated. 4. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in asphalt -paving mat. B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required. 1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course. C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot -mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface. 3.7 COMPACTION A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot -mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot -mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory -plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F. B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements. C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot -mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot -mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density: 1. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent. D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot -mix asphalt is still warm. E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly. F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot -mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness. ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 4 G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. 3.8 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances: 1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10 -foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1. Base Course: 1/4 inch. 2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch. 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch. 3.9 PAVEMENT MARKING A. Do not apply pavement -marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect. B. Allow paving to age for 30 days before starting pavement marking. 0. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils. 1. Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 Ib/gal. 3.10 WHEEL STOPS A. Securely attach wheel stops to pavement with not less than two galvanized -steel dowels embedded at one- quarter to one-third points. Securely install dowels into pavement and bond to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 13. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot -mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549. C. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot -mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances. D. In -Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979. 1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from four samples of hot -mix asphalt -paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job -mix specifications. 2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726. a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement, with no fewer than 3 cores taken. b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726. E. Replace and compact hot -mix asphalt where core tests were taken. ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 5 F. Remove and replace or install additional hot -mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. III, 3.12 DISPOSAL A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA -approved landfill. 1. Do not allow milled materials to accumulate on-site. • • END OF SECTION 321216 ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 6 Page 1 of 1 Greg Viillanueva - 152/ TIB STREETLIGHT From: Scott Bates To: Dave Stuckle Date: 03/03/2009 2:15 PM Subject: 152/ TIB STREETLIGHT CC: Greg Villanueva; Stan Anderson I took a quick look today at this project and found these items: Pole conductors were incorrect, should be pole and bracket cable. Supply conductors were THHN, should be USE -2 or better per NEC wet location/earth contact. Pole didn't have fuse kits. (SEC) Wiring splice connecters were unknown type/non-waterproof. Conduit installed into NE corner type -3 box is too close to lid. Cut down min 6" below lids. I would prefer all new current carrying conductors to be continuous from the new SL pole fuse kits to the connection point of existing pole on the NE corner. Green grounding wire can be THHN per NEC and spliced/bonded to every box entered. Bonding connections can be made by C -crimp non -insulated connection. file://C:\temp\XPgrpwise\49AD3B68tuk-mail6300-po 1001776D6C 189E31 \GW } 00001.... 03/04/2009 DEVELOPMENT GUIDELINES AND DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 13. Luminaires - Hubbel or General Electric (GE). 0. Wattage per RS -24. GE Cutoff # MDCL SOAZZFC32F Drop Lens # MDRL SOAZZRMS32F HUBBEL Cutoff # RLCD S38032035F0M53 Drop Lens # RLGD S38072035F0M53 D. Junction Boxes — per WSDOT/APWA Standards with 48" bond straps between the traffic bearing lid and frame, labeled per Labor and Industries standard. E. Conduit - 2 -inch 1. Most applications - schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with bell ends, unless capped for non-use. 2. Roadway application - schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with bell ends, unless capped for non-use. F. Circuit conductors - #6 or #8 type USE 2 stranded copper with green #8 THHN stranded copper ground. G. Pole wiring - #10 AWG Rome pole and bracket cable. H. Fuse kits - Homac #SLK -M or SEC #1791 -SF. I. Fuses - FMN -5. J. Putty tape - Scotchmast electrical insulation. K. Electrical tape - 3M Super 33 or better. L. Photocell M. Shorting cap 4.3.3 INSTALLATION A. J -boxes - Install so the top of the box is at grade and positioned so that all conduits are 4 inches from the inside walls. Fill with clean drainage gravel, leaving at least 6 inches of free space between the conduit and the top of the box. B. Wire splice 1. Two -wire splices - Crimp the butt splice with 4 -inch minimum length of thick-walled shrink tube. 2. Three or more wire splices — Use split bolt and cover with one wrap of electrical tape, followed by one wrap of Scotchmast electrical insulation putty tape and two wraps of 3M Super 33 or better electrical tape. 38 DEVELOPMENT GUIDELINES AND DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS C. Install one photocell per lighting system and shorting caps on remaining luminaires. 4.4 TRAFFIC SIGNALS 4.4.1 GENERAL A. A licensed engineer experienced in traffic signal design shall prepare all traffic signal design and modifications. The Director shall approve all traffic signal system equipment. B. When a proposed street or driveway design will interfere with existing traffic signal facilities, the developer shall modify or relocate the signal. (TMC 11.12.160) 4.4.2 MATERIALS A. Signal heads — Signal heads shall be painted yellow. The faces of the back plates and the inside of the tunnel risers shall be painted flat black. 1. Pedestrian Signal heads - ICC, Model # 4092 LED with Z crate visors, Type E (clamshell) mounting. 2. Bimodal signal heads - Dialight with a 12 -inch LED display capable of alternately displaying a yellow and green arrow. 3. Red and Green signals - DuraLED 12 -inch display. B. Signal poles - Valmont or Ameron. All poles shall have an aluminum terminal cabinet. C. Preemption device 1. Discriminator - Series 700 with 3M #138 detector cable. 2. Preemption detectors - 3M Opticom Model 700 Series. 4.4.3 INSTALLATION Install detector cable from preemption detector to controller with no splices. 4.5 VEHICLE DETECTOR LOOPS 4.5.1 MATERIALS A. Loop wire per APWA Section 9-29.3. B. Lead-in cable per APWA Section 9-29.3. C. Wire 1. Loop wire - # 12 USE stranded copper conductor Class B, with chemically cross-linked polyethylene type RHH-RHW, thickness of code. 2. Shielded loop lead-in wire - #18 stranded tinned copper, twisted pair, 2 conductor cable with polyethylene insulation, conductor cabled, and shall have aluminum polyester foil shield furnished in 100% coverage, stranded tinned -copper drain wire and an overall chrome -vinyl jacket. 39 The Riley Group Inc. February 20, 2009 Mr. Doug Bates McDonald's USA, LLC - Northwest Region 12131 - 113th Avenue NE, Suite 103 Kirkland, WA 98034 RE: Final Inspection Report Proposed McDonald's 15210 Pacific Highway South Tukwila, WA 98188 Riley Project #2008-340 Dear Mr. Bates: As requested, The Riley Group, Inc. (Riley) has been retained by McDonald's USA, LLC to provide intermittent earthwork observation and testing services during the construction of the above -referenced project between September 10, 2008 and February 20, 2009. Our services were based on the City of Tukwila's inspection requirements. The general services included soil bearing verification, structural fill and compaction, excavation monitoring, subsurface drainage installation, erosion control, and other related earthwork. Riley reviewed the design plans approved by the City of Tukwila for construction and the city's inspection requirements. Overall, the earthwork construction has been completed in substantial conformance with the city approved plans and the inspection requirements. The following briefly • summarizes the actual services that we have performed. 1. SOIL BEARING CAPACITY The building was supported on a perimeter spread footing foundation and a series of isolated column footings. The foundation subgrade consisted of well -compacted structural fill after over -excavation. Based on our observations, the subgrade should be able to provide the design bearing capacity, which is 2,500 psf. 2. STRUCTURAL FILL AND COMPACTION During the construction, Riley verified the compaction of structural fills placed for footings, utility trenches, and parking area using a nuclear gauge. The testing results indicated that all the structural fills had been placed in lifts and compacted to 95 percent of the soil's maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D-1557 (Modified Proctor). Serving the Pacific Northwest Seattle Office: 17522 Bothell Way NE, Suite A, Bothell, WA 98011 Tel (425) 415-0551 o Fax (425) 415-0311 M,'•. Doug Bates Proposed McDonald's, Tukwila, WA Pcgy 2 3. EXCAVATION OBSERVATIONS Riley observed excavations for site grading, perimeter wall foundation, utility vaults and trenches during the construction. Our observations indicated that all of the excavations were performed in medium dense to dense native soil. The temporary cutslopes were observed to be in stable condition. Soil Stockpiles were covered by plastic sheeting. 4. SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE INSTALLATION Riley observed the installation of perimeter footing drain. The drainage consists of perforated pipes buried around drainage gravel and wrapped with fabrics. The drainage pipes were discharged to the approved stormwater system. 5. EROSION CONTROL Riley did not observe any erosion or sediment loading to the streets, the public stormwater system, or adjoining properties during the construction. Water samples were collected from catch basins on construction site for turbidity testing. The test results indicate that the water quality has met the city's requirement. Al: our last site visit on February 20, 2009, the major earthwork has been completed. The permanent erosion control measure has not been established. Further inspection will be needed. This letter will be updated as soon as the permanent erosion control measure is complete. In summary, the earthwork was performed in general accordance with the City of Tukwila's approved plans and specifications. With the exception of final erosion controls, geotechnical inspection work for the site is substantially complete. We trust that the above information will satisfy your current need. Please call us if you have any questions or need additional information at (425) 415-0551. Sincerely, THE RILEY GROUP, INC. Chien -Lin (Johnny) Chen, P.E. Project Engineer 02.7 10/07 cc: Mr. George Kobory, Spectrum Enterprises, LLC THE RILEY GROUP, INC. D.R. STRONG CONSULTING ENGINEERS October 23, 2008 Scott Bates/Greg Villanueva City Inspector City of Tukwila 6300 :Southcenter Boulevard Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188-2544 Re: Field revisions to CB 105 Tukwila McDonald's Do S-2-443 RECEIVeD OCT2M08 - -- IoPUBLC wh Project No. 07052.300 Dear Mr. Bates and Mr. Villanueva: This letter is in support of the field revisions for CB 105 for the new McDonald's project, also known as Tukwila permit number D08-243. Due to the complexity of -existing drainage features, the contractor was required to provide a non-standard knock -out, and backfill with concrete to support the existing pipes and new structure walls. Attached is the contractor's explanation of the situation and his solution, as inspected by you in the field. Based upon review of these revisions, and contractor's discussions with City staff in the field and with your confirmation that the contractor's explanation of the installed solution is correct, we are satisfied that this field revision is sufficient to meet the City's requirements. Should you have any questions regarding this matter, please do not hesitate to contact me. Sincerely yours, D. R. S1,ONG Consulting Engineers Inc. Richard D. Olson, P.E. Principal, Senior Vice -President TWP/adb Enclosures E-mail correspondence with Contractor T:107101070521 Letters I L081023_inspector. doc Engineers \xi"' 10604 N.S. Slat(' 101 Kirkland, WA 98033 7903 Phone: (425) 827-3(163 Fax: (42S) 827-2473 Toll Free: (800) 06? -1402 w•ww.drstrony.corr Planners Surveyors Page 1 of 1 Travis Price From: George Kobory [George@spectrumenterprises.us] Sent: Friday, October 17, 2008 11:59 AM To: Travis Price Subject: Tukwila MCD Travis: Scope of work for CB installation: After setting pipes into structure at CB 105. We excavated around all the pipes to the structure base, between structure and bank. The 24" pipe is 8" above base, to which we place concrete around all three pipes (2-12 and 1- 24") and filled cavity to top of section pipes protrude through. The concrete was also spread beyond the sides of the pipe to incorporate the weak wall section for support. This concrete was sustained in place by the dirt bank on the west side of the structure. All pipes were set to the desired location and cut to allow the 24" pipe to flow freely. At this point protruding pipes were grouted to finish off pipes to a tight surface. 10/24/2008 Joanna Spencer - RE: Tukwila McDonald's Street lighting on 152nd Street Page 1 of 4 4110.4111.01.111100% n,,....Y+...._.... From: Joanna Spencer To: Travis Price Date: 10/17/2008 8:55 AM Subject: RE: Tukwila McDonald's Street lighting on 152nd Street CC: Dave Stuckle; Greg Villanueva Attachments: Dave Stuckle; Greg Villanueva Travis, Per Bob Giberson, City Engineer Public Works will accept 30 ft mounting height for 100 watt luminaire. Joanna Spencer Developrnent Engineer City of Tukwila Public Works Department 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188-2544 phone: 206-431-2440 fax: 206-431-3665 jspencer@ci.tukwila.wa.us »> 'Travis Price" <travis.price@drstrong.com> 10/01/2008 10:00 PM »> Joanna, I have received word from the field that the public works department has now required that the streetlight you are requiring on S 152nd Street is 1:o be a 40 -foot pole with a 400 watt lamp. It is in complete contradiction to your e-mail below, and our discussions regarding this issue. Per detail RS -24 this street is classified sits in between Residential Local Street and Residential Arterial, but based upon observation, I would tend to lean towards the Residential Local Street Classification. Based upon that criteria, this would only require a 30 mounting height with an 100 watt luminare, matching the conversation you and I had regarding this. This roadway is by no means a Major Arterial, which by the city's standard details is the only classification that requires a 400 watt on a 40 -foot pole. I had previously provided you with detailed information regarding our objection to even requiring the street light for numerous reasons. We had conceded to this requirement and are providing the street light, but I have to strongly object to this new requirement. This new requirement would be a determent to the welfare of the community. This would grossly and unnecessarily contribute to the light pollution for the surrounding residential properties and provide no additional benefit to the Site or community, and requires significant additional cost to the developer. Also note that the adjacent light poles are in the 30 -foot range, and a 40 -foot pole would not match the surrounding fixtures. Please discuss this new requirement with your Public Works team and respond. Thank you, D.R. STRONG DO'8-23 P (flb-os-3 file://C:\te:mp\XPgrpwise\48F852F4tuk-mail6300-po 10013136631 EEB81\GW} 00001.H... 10/17/2008 Page 2 of 4 Consulting Engineers Inc. CIVIL ENGINEERS PLANNERS SURVEYORS Travis W. Price, ASLA Senior Design Engineer 10604 N.E. 38th Place Suite #101 Kirkland, WA 98033 Office: (425) 827-3063 Cell: (425) 941-2120 Fax: (42.5) 827-2423 Please Note: The information in this E-mail message, and any files transmitted with it, is confidential and may be legally privileged. It is intended only for the use of the individual(s) named above. If you are the intended recipient, be aware that your use of any confidential or personal information may be restricted by state and federal privacy laws. If you, the reader of this message, are not the intended recipient, you are hereby notified that you should not further disseminate, distribute, or forward this E-mail message. If you have received this E-mail in error, please notify the sender and delete the material from any computer. Thank you. Original Message From: Joanna Spencer[mailto:jspencer@ci.tukwila.wa.us] Sent: Thursday, April 24, 2008 5:44 PM To: Travis Price Subject: Re: Tukwila McDonald's Street lighting on 152nd Street Travis, The decision has been made that the new street light needs to be installed. Per Bob Giberson, P.E. City Engineer @ (206)431-2457 the City Standard street light provides a M -C III distribution pattern (refer to Tukwila Standard Detail RS -24) that mainly only covers the roadway. There will be very little interference with other existing lights that surround this new light. Joanna Spencer Development Engineer City of Tukwila Public Works Department 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188-2544 phone: 206-431-2440 file://C:\temp\XPgrpwise\48F852F4tuk-mail6300-po 10013136631 EEB81 \GW} 00001.H... 10/17/2008 Page 3 of 4 fax: 206-431-3665 jspencer@ci.tukwila.wa.us »> 'Travis Price" <travis.price@drstrong.com> 04/17/2008 4:37 pm »> Joanna, Please review the attached letter regarding the requested light at the entrance onto S. 152nd Street. If there is a formal variance process '.required for such a request, please let me know what is needed and we can make it so. Thank you, D.R. STRONG Consulting Engineers Inc. CIVIL ENG]:NEERS PLANNERS SURVEYORS Travis W. Price, ASLA Landscape Architect/Senior Design Engineer 10604 N.E. 38th Place Suite #101 Kirkland, WA 98033 Office: (42.5) 827-3063 Cell: (425) 941-2120 Fax: (425) 827-2423 Please Noise: The information in this E-mail message, and any files transmitted with it, is confidential and may be legally privileged. It is intended only for the use of the individual(s) named above. If you are the intended recipient, be aware that your use of any confidential or personal information may be restricted by state and federal privacy laws. If you, the reader of this message, are not the intended recipient, you are hereby notified that you should not further disseminate, distribute, or forward this E-mail message. If you have received this E-mail in error, please notify the sender and delete the material from any computer. Thank you. isile://C:\ternp\XPgrpwise\48F852F4tuk-mail6300-po 10013136631 EEB 81 \GW } 00001.H... 10/17/2008 (10/07/2008) Greg Villanueva - Approved Traffic Control Plans from City of Sea -Tac Page 1 From: "Travis Price" <travis.price@drstrong.com> To: "George Kobory" <George@spectrumenterprises.us>, <doug.bates@us.mcd.com>... Date: 10/07/2008 9:43 AM Subject: Approved Traffic Control Plans from City of Sea -Tac Attachments: F2-3.pdf; F2.pdf All, Attached are both the stamped "approved" (Tukwila) and signed "approved" (Sea -Tac) traffic control drawings for the McDonald's on S 152nc1 Street and International Blvd. The City of Sea -Tac wanted a very minor change after copies were provided to Tukwila. The only difference between the plans are that there is no longer closure of the turn lanes within Int. Blvd. at the intersection of S 152nd Street. The signed copy from the city of Sea -Tac dated July 11, 2008 is the current construction drawing for this development. D.R. STRONG Consulting Engineers Inc. CIVIL ENGINEERS PLANNERS SURVEYORS Travis W. Price, ASLA Landscape Architect/Senior Design Engineer 10604 N.E. 38th Place Suite #101 Kirkland, WA 98033 Office: (425) 827-3063 Cell: (425) 941-2120 Fax: (425) 827-2423 Please Note: The information in this E-mail message, and any files transmitted with it, is confidential and may be legally privileged. It is intended only for the use of the individual(s) named above. If you are the intended recipient, be aware that your use of any confidential or personal information may be restricted by state and federal privacy laws. If you, the reader of this message, are not the intended recipient, you are hereby notified that you should not further disseminate, distribute, or forward this E-mail message. If you have received this E-mail in error, please notify the sender and delete the material from any computer. Thank you. (10/07/2008) Greg Villanueva - Approved Traffic Control Plans from City of Sea -Tac Page 2-1 (10/07/2008) Gree Villanueva - TEXT.htm Page 1' All, Attached are both the stamped "approved" (Tukwila) and signed "approved" (Sea - Tac) traffic control drawings for the McDonald's on S 152nd Street and International Blvd. The City of Sea -Tac wanted a very minor change after copies were provided to Tukwila. The only difference between the plans are that there is no longer closure of the turn lanes within Int. Blvd. at the intersection of S 152nd Street. The signed copy from the city of Sea - Tac dated July 11, 2008 is the current construction drawing for this development. D.R. STRONG Consulting Engineers Inc. CIVIL ENGINEERS PLANNERS SURVEYORS Please Note: Travis W. Price, ASLA Landscape Architect/Senior Design Engineer 10604 N.E. 38th Place Suite #101 Kirkland, WA 98033 Office: (425) 827-3063 Cell: (425) 941-2120 Fax: (425) 827-2423 The information in this E-mail message, and any files transmitted with it, is confidential and may be legally privileged. It is intended only for the use of the individual(s) named above. If you are the intended recipient, be aware that your use of any confidential or personal information may be restricted by state and federal privacy laws. If you, the reader of this message, are not the intended recipient, you are hereby notified that you should not further disseminate, distribute, or forward this E-mail message. If you have received this E-mail in error, please notify the sender arid delete the material from any computer. Thank you. (10/07/2008) Greg Villanueva - Mime.822 Return -path: Received: Received: Received: Content -class: Return -Receipt -To: MIME -Version: Content -Type: Subject: X-MimeOLE: Received: Message -ID: X -MS -Has -Attach: Thread -Topic: Thread -Index: From: To: Content -Type Content -Transfer -Encoding: Attachment <travis.price@drstrong.com> from mail4.atl.registeredsite.com ([64.224.219.78])by ci.tukwila.wa.us with ESMTP; Tue 07 Oct 2008' 09:39:33 -0700 from microw.org (r25-58-dsl.sea.lightrealm.net [216.122.58.25])by mail4.atl.registeredsite.com (8.12.11.20060308/8.12.11) with ESMTP id m97GdTfd007783,Tue, 7 Oct 2008 12:39:29 -0400 from kirkland_dc.drstrong.local (ip64.unkn-172.dsl- acs2.sea.iinet.com [207: 202.172 64].b microw.org (8.11.6/8.11.0) with ESMTP id m97Gcr.m80530;Tue, 7 Oct 2008 16:38:53 GMT(envelope-from travis.price@drstrong.com)_ urn:content-classes:message 'Travis Price" <travis.price@drstrong.com> 1.0 multipart/mixed;boundary=' ---- _= NextPart_001 "01C9289A.FA955E9C" Approved Traffic Control Plans from City of, Sea -Tac Produced By Microsoft Exchange V6.5 Tue, 7 Oct 2008 09:37:24 -0700 <0F69835BEDE7134B8A2AF58D6F09F98E056CFD@kirkland_d c.drstrong.local> yes Approved Traffic Control Plans from City of Sea -Tac AckomvoMl ECDJAvcRtGGZVXvItgI5w== 'Travis Price" <travis.price@drstrong.com>. "George Kobory" <George@spectrumenterprises.us>, <doug.bates@us.mcd.com>,<jmorrow@ci.tukwila.wa.us>, <bgilbertson@ci.tukwila.waus> text/html;charset="us-ascii" quoted -printable F2-3.pdf F2.pdf All, Attached are both the stamped "approved" (Tukwila) and signed "approved" (Sea - Tac) traffic control drawings for the McDonald's on S 152nd Street and International Blvd. The City of Sea -Tac wanted a very minor change after copies were provided to Tukwila. The only difference between the plans are that there is no longer closure of the turn lanes within Int. Blvd. at the intersection of S 152nd Street. The signed copy from the city of Sea - Tac dated July 11, 2008 is the current construction drawing for this development. D.R. STRONG Consulting Engineers Inc. CIVIL ENGINEERS PLANNERS SURVEYORS Travis W. Price, ASLA Landscape Architect/Senior Design Engineer 10604 N.E. 38th Place Suite #101 Kirkland, WA 98033 Office: (425) 827-3063 Cell: (425) 941-2120 Fax: (425) 827-2423 Page 1 TUKWILA MCDONALD'S 1RAMC CONTROL PLN 16010 PAOPIC MONWAY BOUfl TIBONA WASHINOTON TAX PARCELN O01000000 8 000000000 1a6ed 3P '£-ZJ - enenuell!A 69-19 (8002/L0/00 (1 0/07/2008) Greg Villanueva - F2.pdf Page 1 • SW 1/4 SEC 110N 22. TOWNSHIP 23 H. RANGE 4 E, TUIONILA McDONALD'S TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN LEGO.) 1.211.2.22.22.2.72=3.= 1.1.=11.101. Lurz=Tm.v.r.= - • --- :A.÷2.5%7•57-171.1.."EiEr7=" BWEB"Life-.7- ZAW-742:7-.7. 112114ANZIL... ESS-- CA.I.• KV/ 11•411111011310140.4.114111 IIPAS mamma OPIUM, YON CoNSIIIVCTION •41,0111021:0.1•101 • • ,,,,, 5., . 111 Me. Int VW MONIS .0.11•61.., OM. MO (2 to 3 21 1 1. George Kobory X08 -a`13 From: Steve Platt Sent: Monday, September 22, 2008 6:36 AM To: Ken Beaulaurier; George Kobory Subject: Fw: storm chambers tukwila Original Message From: Lawson Land Development, Inc <lawsonlanddevelopment@msn.com> To: Steve Platt Sent: Mon Sep 22 06:34:38 2008 Subject: FW: storm chambers tukwila Here is the news from my vendor on the contech system storm chambers. I have been trying to send it, but it isn't going through. Thank you, Kelly Lawson Land Development, Inc 26930 94th DR NW Stanwood, WA 98292 360-939-2400 - Office 360-939-2433 - Fax Subject: storm chambers @ Davidann Date: Thu, 18 Sep 2008 12:12:55 -0400 From: Jason.Stansberry@Ferguson.com To: lawsonlanddevelopment@msn.com Gentleman, After speaking with Kathi Jones of Contech, the chambers they are currently shipping are black. These are the same chambers that were approved by the city, and specified on the plans. On the 12" connection to the system, the industry standard is to cut to size, and grout the connection. Being that this is not a water tight system that should be an adequate connection. Please let me know if there are anymore questions. Jason F. Stansberry Branch Manager #1621 Washington KW 2010 Park Lane Burlington, Wa. 98233 Ph 360-70)-2030 Fx 360-70i-2059 2 Page 1 of 1 George Kobory From: Richard Olson [rick.olson@drstrong.com] Sent: Monday, September 22, 2008 3:26 PM To: George Kobory Cc: travis.price@drstrong.com; doug.bates@us.mcd.com Subject Tuckwila McDonalds Storm Chamber Connection Attachments: image.pdf; installation_stormchamber.pdf George, I received your faxed submittal on the Contech Storm Filter and the Contech StormChambers. As you can see from the attached PDF, this fax is not legible enough to properly review. Please have a clean original scanned and emailed to our office and followed by a hard copy original. We normally require submittal of 4 clean hard copies be delivered or mailed to us and at least one week for review of submittal information. In this case we will try to complete the review within a day or two of receipt of the clear submittal and respond to the review request. I did speak to Greg at the city regarding the connection. I suggest that you can provide him with a copy of the PDF that I downloaded from the Contech web site showing the side pipe connection instructions with photos of the installation method to assist him. Point out to him the information and photos on page 4 and 5. If Greg requires greater details of the connections, you will need to get those directly from Contech. I had indicated to Greg that I thought you would be able to get the installation guide emailed over to him this afternoon. This information needs to come from you after you confirm that what is shown is the method that you will use to make the connections. Travis Price will be back in the office tomorrow to assist you further in the review process. Thanks Rick D.R. STRONG Consulting Engineers Inc. CIVIL ENGINEERS PLANNERS SURVEYORS Please Note: Richard D. Olson P.E. Principal 10604 N.E. 38th Place Suite #101 Kirkland, WA 98033 Office: (425) 827-3063 Fax: (425) 827-2423 The information in this E-mail message, and any files transmitted with it, is confidential and may be legally privileged. It is intended only for the use of the individual(s) named above. If you are the intended recipient, be aware that your use of any confidential or personal information may be restricted by state and federal privacy laws. If you, the reader of this message, are not the intended recipient, you are hereby notified that you should not further disseminate, distribute, or forward this E-mail message. If you have received this E-mail in error, please notify the sender and delete the material from any computer. Thank you. 9/22/2008 8-rORMCI-1 MB a) /L-. . C) (0 -y) TM INSTALLATION BROCHURE STORMWATER MANAGEMENT BROUGHT TO YOU BY HYDROLOGIC SOLUTIONS www.hydrologicsolutions.com ••• BEFORE YOUR STORMCHAMBERST" ARRIVE 1. StorrnChambersTM will arrive either on a flat bed trailer or in an enclosed van. If in an enclosed van, we will try our best to have the driver load the pallets at the tail of the van. However, be prepared with a long chain, metal cable, or strong rope or straps to drag a pallet from the nose of the van. A forklift is the easiest way to unload pallets of StorrriChambersTM 2. A full pallet of StormChambersTM will weigh approximately 1,700 pounds, will be about 5' wide, 8.5' long, and approx- imately 8.5' high. MATERIALS NEEDED 1. Wire cutters to remove the metal bands that secure the StormChambersTM to their pallets. 2. Two 6'10' lengths of 2x4 studs to use as levers to separate the palletized StormChambersTM. 3. 3" drywall screws to close in the bases of the StormChambersTM until the stone is placed around them. 4. Light weight stabilization netting to go under the StormChambersTM to prevent movement of stone — shipped with the StormChambersTM 5. Heavy weight stabilization netting, to be centered below each inspection/clean out riser to prevent removal of stone and soil when vacuum — cleaned with a vacuum truck. Also to be placed under each StormChamberTM to receive storm water from storm drain inlet pipes, to func- tion as a "splash pan" to prevent erosion of underlying stone and soil — shipped with the StormChambersTM 6. 1"-2" !;rushed. washed, hard stone for the trench base and to backfill around the StormChambersTM' 7. 4 ounce non — woven filter fabric to be used at the inter- face between the stone and soil backfill and to cover trench side walls. Use Mirafi 140N, Mirafi 140NC, Synthetic Industries 401, or AMOCO 4545 or 4535 filter fabric. 8. 4' sections of 8" (unless otherwise specified), smooth walled Schedule 40 or SDR 35 or equivalent pipe for the interconnections between rows of StormChambersTM (check plans for number and location of interconnections). 9. Unless otherwise specified, 10" smooth walled Schedule 40 or SDR 35 or equivalent pipe for inspection/clean out risers (check plans for number and location of risers). 10.Three small angle irons and 0.5" screws for each inspec- tion/clean out riser to support riser onto top portals of StormChambersTM. 11.Cleanout caps or tops for inspection/clean out risers. 12.Unless otherwise specified, one casting for each inspec- tion/clean out riser in pavement (East Jordan V — 8450 or equivalent). 13.Unless otherwise specified, concrete and related materials to form 6' x 9' reinforced pads to hold castings for inspec- tion/clean out risers. EQUIPMENT NEEDED 1. Forklift or other type of equipment to unload StormChambersTM (see above). 2. Excavator to dig the trench from the sides and to place stone and soil backfill. 3. Two battery or power operated screw guns to connect bases of overlapping StormChambersTM. 4. Saws — All, router bit on a drill, or key hole saw to cut open side and top portals in StormChambersTM 5. Light weight, tracked dozer, not exceeding 1,100 Ibs/sf to grade backfill. 6. Hand — operated compactor, small roller, or tracked vehicle for fill compaction. Tracked vehicle must not exceed 1,100 Ibs/sf; hand operated compactor or vibratory roller must not exceed a dynamic force of 20,000 lbs. 7. Transit or laser. 8. Stone bucket. PLEASE NOTE THAT ALL PHOTOGRAPHS AND ILLUSTRATIONS ARE FOR ILLUSTRATIVE PURPOSES ONLY. PLEASE RELY ON WHAT THE ENGINEER SPECIFIES. 2 ••• www.hydrologicsolutions.com WHEN YOUR STORMCHAMBERST" ARRIVE 1. Unloading - see "Before Your StormChambersTM Arrrive", above. As a last resort, the pallets can be dragged off of the trailer and dropped on the ground. This will not injure the StormChambersTM TRENCH PREPARATION 2. Confirm the total number of StormChambers."" and contact HydroLogic Solutions immediately if the count is incorrect. 3. Confirm the number of Start, Middle and End StormChambersTM. Each pallet should be marked with the number of each. 1. Do not excavate trench until dry weather is forecast long enough to allow at least coverage of the StormChamberTM system with filter fabric prior to raining to avoid soil filling void spaces in the stone. 2. Excavate to a width and length sufficient to accommodate the number of StormChambersTm plus a minimum one foot border around the entire bed. The bottom of the bed must be level, unless otherwise specified. 3. If the StormChamberTM system was designed for infiltration and heavy clays are encountered, it is recommended that pea gravel and sharp concrete sand be tilled into the top one foot of trench bed prior to placing the stone base. 4. Do not use heavy equipment on the excavated trench bed in order to avoid soil compaction. 5. If use of heavy equipment on the excavated trench bed can not be avoided, scarify the trench bottom and break up soil clumps before adding the stone base. Line trench walls, Ea trench bottom, with 4oz, non - woven filter fabric. 6. Line trench walls with a 4 - ounce non - woven filter fab- ric such as Mirafi 140N or 140NC, Synthetic Industries 401, or AMOCCO 4545 or 4535. Overlap adjacent filter fabric by at least 2'. Do not place filter fabric under the StormChambersTM. The filter fabric will clog, restricting the infiltration capability of the StormChamberTMsystem. 7. Unless otherwise specified, place 6" of crushed washed, 1" to 2" hard stone on the bottom of the level and zero grade trench. 8. If it becomes impractical to level the stone base by hand, use a low pressure. tracked dozer, not exceeding 1,100 Ibs/sf, main- taining at least 6" of stone under the tracks at all times. 9. Do not use excavated trench as a sedimentation trap or basin during construction. The fine soil particles will accumulate at the soil boundary and restrict the infiltration capability of the system. www.hydrologicsolutions.com ••• 3 STORMCHAMBERTM INSTALLATION You may need to use 2x4's to separate chambers. 1. You may need assistance in separating the StormChambersTM. Based on weather and transit conditions, sometimes the StormChambersTM become tightly compacted. Separate StormChambersTM using two 2x4 studs along one of its sides for leverage. Do not use any damaged units — contact HydroLogic Solutions immediately. Row placernent begins at inflow end of chamber system with Start Model StormChambersT". 2. Start building the StormChamberTM system with the Start Model StorrnChamberTM at the inflow end of the StormChamberTM system. The Start Models are completely closed at the end with the two side portals. 4 ••• www.hydrologicsolutions.com Place lightweight stabilization netting under StormChambers'. 3. Roll out two rows of the light weight stabilization netting (provided with the StormChambersTM) perpendicular to the rows of where the Start StormChambersTM will be placed. Overlap the rows by approximately 1'. Keep the netting flat; if moved, re — straighten and flatten out. 0WWI titiWkiquggkN<irdOlfbtfqqpWHi gI�ltl• 1J__i4 a 04 *(11t q�bb�U�a�A ( 1, , , i��ii"r'v l,• i.,. pit H;\ ✓ul'• ` t 1 ii{fld���iC4�b�a�u MIDDLE CHAMBERS START CHAMBER Place heavyweight stabilization netting under chambers receiving storm drain inflow. 6X1 HEAVYWUGHT STABILIZATION NETTING (SUPPLIED) CATCH BASIN 4. Place one piece of the heavy weight stabilization netting (pro- vided with the StormChambersTM) perpendicular to and under each StormChamberTM that will be receiving inlet storm drain pipes. Place on top of the light weight netting and place one edge of the netting under, and slightly extending beyond, the closed end wall of the StormChamber m. Have the netting extend equally beyond both sides of the StormChamberTM. The purpose of the heavy weight stabilization netting is to function as a "splash pan," preventing excavation of the underlying stone and soil, while allowing infiltration to occur. STORMCHAMBERT" INSTALLATION (CONTINUED) ASPHALT SURFACE PAVEMENT BASE 90% COMPACTED CLEAN FILL OR 1° - 2' CRUSHED WASHED STONE FILTER •: ' , FABRIC AT i•, STONEISOIL' 18°MIN _ 6' MIN 1 INTERFACE ' — '�\1 ,i/..��,,,., re fes~ \ - . _ �/ \`` i(/ iii 1"`"T(� - (�\ ;FLOW PIPE 1°-2' ' '.:/il il 1111 �_ :i 11 Ln\,.',..1.n %11r 6°MIN CRUSHED - . L WASHED - g.9° - - 5 STONE 9" MIN - - - - 1' MIN FILTER FABRIC AGAINST TRENCH WALL 4' X 7 HEAVYWEIGHT STABILIZATION NETTING (SUPPLIED) Space StormChambersn at least 9" apart at the base at the end wall. 5. Place the Start Model StormChambersTM (completely closed at the end with the two side portals), spaced a minimum of 5' 9" apart at the center line of the end walls (9" apart at the base at the end walls). Position the closed ends at least 1' from the trench wall. Cut out side portals for smooth wall PVC inflow drainpipe and row connect- ing pipes. Cut out indentation guides are provided for 8°, 10° and 12° pipes. 6. Cut open the side portals for the inflow storm drain pipes (size and location specified on the plans) and lateral con- necting pipes between StormChamberTM rows (8" ID Schedule 40 or SDR 35 smooth walled PVC, unless other- wise specified) with a reciprocating saw, router bit on a drill, or keyhole saw along the defined indented circle. If the cut extends more than 0.5" beyond the indented circle, place a piece of the filter fabric over the hole, cut an X just short of the width of the opening, and insert the pipe. The connec- tion does not need to be water tight. 12" ID smooth walled pipe is the largest diameter pipe that can be inserted into the side portals. In order to facilitate placement, install the lateral connecting pipes in the specified StormChambersTM before attaching the next StormChamberTM in the row. 4'X7 HEAVYWEIGHT STABNZATIGN NETTING (SUPPLIED) ID' CLEAN-OUT RISER Insert smooth wall PVC row connecting pipes. 7. Mark the midpoints of 8" ID (unless otherwise specified) smooth wall pipe and insert into the adjacent StormChambersTM where specified so that the marked midpoint is centered between the two adjacent StormChambersTM. Pipe length should be sufficient to extend 6" — 12" into both adjacent StormChambersTM. OPTIONAL OUTFALL CATCH BASIN 4'X7 HEAVYWEIGHT STABBQATION NETTING (SUPPLIED) END CHAMBER MIDDLE CHAMBERS START CHAMBER 4'X7 HEAVYWEIGHT STABILIZATION NETTING (SUPPLIED) !r SEPARATION BETWEEN ROWS 4'X7 HEAVYWEIGHT STABILIZATION NETTING (SUPPLIED) CATCH BASIN Example of typical StormChambern' layout. 8. If the locations of row — connecting pipes are not specified, add 8" pipes across all rows directly opposite where the inflow storm drain pipe(s) is inserted. This will typically connect at least all the Start Model StormChambersTM of each row. Additional connections across all rows of StormChambersTM should be made so that the total diameter of pipe connections between any pair of rows is approximately equal to the total diameter of all inflow storm drain pipes. For example, a StormChamberTM system with one 12" inflow drain pipe would require 2, 8" pipes between each row of StormChambersTM www.hydrologicsolutions.com ••• 5 STORMCHAMBERT" INSTALLATION (CONTINUED) Place first rib of next chamber over last rib of previous chamber. 9. Roll out additional light weight stabilization netting, over- laying the previous sheet by 1' and place the first rib of a Middle Model (completely open at side portal end, partially open at top portal end) over the last rib of each of the Start Model StormChambersTM" Screw StorrnChamberT" together to prevent stone inflow. 10.Screw the Middle Model StormChambersTM to the Start Models near their base on both sides with regular 3" dry wall screws. One screw on each side should be sufficient to temporarily hold the StormChambersTM together until the stone is placed. The gap between the two StormChambersTM near their base must be closed enough to prevent stone from migrating into them to prevent the potential for fin- ished surface subsidence. 6 ••• www.hydrologicsolutions.com End each row with and end model StormChamber"' which is closed at the top portal end and open at the side portal end. 11.Continue placing and screwing the rest of the StormChambersTM, one at a time, as necessary, inserting any additional lateral — connecting pipes as specified, leaving at least 1' between the end of the End Model (completely open at the side portal end, completely closed at the top portal end) and the trench wall. • 111` :n •41tiu jtii 4 XT HEAVYWEIGHT STABIUZA11ON NETTING (SUPPLIED) 401-,Irtr- END CHAMBER 11 -'.. . 1/01 • MIDDLE CHAMBERS Place heavyweight stabilization netting under chambers with cleanout risers. 12. Place one piece of the heavy duty stabilization netting under the top portal end of each StormChamberTM that will be installed with a 10" PVC riser for access by a vacuum truck for clean out. Extend the netting equally beyond both sides of the StormChamberTM and extend about 1' beyond the end wall of the StormChambersTM. The purpose of the netting is to prevent the stone and soil from being sucked up by the vacuum truck. 13. For large StormChamberTM systems it may be necessary to install and backfill a few StormchambersTM of all rows at a time. STORMCHAMBERT" INSTALLATION (CONTINUED) CAST IRON FRAME WITH COVER 6' X 9' REINFORCED CONCRETE PAD COMPACTED CLEAN FILL OR1-Y INSPECTION COVER CRUSHED, WASHED, STONE ANGLE IRONS TO PAVEMENT SUPPORT INSERTED PIPE 6" OR 10' PVC PIPE RISER SCH40 OR DL35 1-? CRUSHED, WASHED, STONE 4' X 7' HEAVYWEIGHT STABILIZATION NETTING (SUPPLIED) IIN FILTER FABRIC ti MIN Install cleanout/inspection risers pipes. 14.Cut a hole in the top portal for a 10" ID smooth walled SDR 35 or PVC Schedule 40 riser — along the larger of the two indented circles, unless an 8" pipe is specified. If the cut extends more than 0.5" beyond the cut out, place a piece of the filter fabric over the hole, cut an X slightly shorter than the width of the opening, and insert the pipe. Attach three small angle irons equally spaced approximately 1' up from the end of the pipe. Use 0.5" screws on riser pipe to prevent restricting insert of vacu- um truck clean out tube. It is not necessary to screw the angle irons to the StormChamberTM. The purpose of the angle irons is simply to support the pipe until the backfill is placed. Insert the bottom 1' of pipe into the top portal and backfill. Attach top of riser pipe to a "Fernco Type" rubber cap, or to a cleanout cover assembly, as specified on the plans. Place an access casting in a concrete pad above, once all fill is placed, for risers in pavement. BACKFILLING Deposit 1" — 2" crushed, washed, hard stone directly along the centerline of the StormChambersTM. 15. Deposit 1" — 2" crushed, washed, hard stone directly along the centerline of the StormChambersTM to evenly flow down each side to keep the StormChambersTM in proper alignment. Do not place the stone directly against the closed end walls at the start and end of the rows. Let the stone fall in place at the StormChamberTM end from the top of the StormChamberTM. Add stone to at least 6" above the StormChambersTM. 16. Level the stone cover with a vibratory compactor, not to exceed a dynamic force of 10,000 lbs, or with a low pressure, tracked vehicle not exceeding 1,100 Ibs/sf. IMPORTANT: If low pressure, tracked dozer is used, do not run dozer on anything Tess than 6" of stone above the StormChambersTM. Spread stone in small piles to prevent movement of the StormChambersTM. Caution must be exercised when placing stone on top of the StormChambersT" so that excessive pressure is not applied directly on the StormChambers"' by equipment "buckets". 17.Cover the stone with 4 ounce non — woven filter fabric. Overlap adjacent sheets by at least 2'. 1. Backfill soil must be free from large stones and large organic material (e.g. tree limbs and root stumps), and must be capable of being compacted to at least 90% of the Standard Proctor Test (AASHTO Method T — 99). If not, crusher run or other suitable backfill material must be used. The same type of stone surrounding the StormChambersTM can also be extended up to the pavement sub grade, if desired. 2. Backfill and compaction of the soil backfill must be achieved in lifts 6" — 8" high. Grading of lifts should start in one corner of the system with a low pressure. tracked dozer, with a pressure not exceeding 1,100 Ibs/sf, keeping at least 1' of fill in front of the blade at all times. Compact lifts to 90% Standard Proctor with tracked vehi- cles not exceeding 1,100 Ibs/sf, or with a hand operated compactor or vibratory roller not exceeding a dynamic force of 20,000 lbs. 3. Restrict wheeled vehicles to a maximum axle load of 8,000 pounds with 6" of fill over the StormChambersTM and 16,000 pounds with 12" of fill. 4. Keep the StormChamberTM system closed or protected from receiving sediment until the site is completely stabilized. IMPORTANT: After compaction of backfill and setting of final grade, avoid parking on or traversing over the StormChamber"' installation with heavily loaded trucks and heavy equipment until paved. IMPORTANT: These instructions assume accepted construction procedures and loaded trucks that do not exceed specified DOT load limits. Uncustomary loads or improper load distributions in vehicles may require additional cover. Contact Hydrologic Solutions for installation under abnormal conditions. Installations not in compliance with these instructions will void the warranty. Contact HydroLogic Solutions for technical assistance at 1.877.426.9128 or email us at info@hydrologicsolutions.com. www.hydrologicsolutions.com ••• 7 CONTACT INFORMATION info@hydrologicsolutions.com (Email Us) PO Box 672, Occoquan, Virginia 22125 (877) 426-9126 (Toll -Free) (703) 491-9656 (Fax) (703) 492-0686 (Voice) www.hydrologicsolutions.com HYDROLOGIC SOLUTIONS LIMITED WARRANTY HydroLogic Solutions will warranty the structural integrity of each HydroLogic Solutions StormChamber"' in accor- dance with the installation instructions and is warranted to the original purchaser against defective materials and workmanship for 10 years from the date of purchase. It is the responsibility of the purchaser to inspect the StormChamberTM units prior to installation and to inform HydroLogic Solutions of any defect prior to installation. HydroLogic Solutions will only be responsible for supplying replacement StormChamberTM unit(s). HydroLogic Solutions' liability specifically excludes the cost of removal and/or installation of the units. There are no other warranties with respect to the units, including no warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. This warranty does not extend to inci- dental, consequential, special, or indirect damages. The company shall not be liable for penalties or liquidated dam- ages, including Toss of production and profits, labor and materials, overhead costs, or other loss or expense incurred by buyer. Specifically excluded from warranty coverage is damage to the units due to ordinary wear and tear, alter- ation, accident, misuse, abuse or neglect of the units, improper construction protocols, installation of the units not consistent with HydroLogic Solutions' installation instruc- tions, placement by buyer of improper materials into buyer's system, or any other event not caused by the company. HydroLogic Solutions shall not be responsible for any loss or damage to the buyer, the units, or any third party result- ing from its installation or shipment. Buyer shall be solely responsible for ensuring that installation of the system is completed in accordance HydroLogic Solutions' installation instructions and with all applicable laws, codes, rules and regulations. Inspect all shipment within 5 days of receipt of StormChambersTM. Failure to advise HydroLogic Solutions of defects on shipments within this period will constitute acceptance of the shipment. This warranty shall not apply to any party other than the original buyer. Furthermore, no company represen- tative has the authority to modify or change this warranty in any manner. The StormChamberT"" is protected by the folowing U.S. Patents: 6,361,248; 6,612,777; 469,187; 465,545. Canadian Patents: 2,356,592. Other U.S. and Canadian Patents Pending. 8 ••• www.hydrologicsolutions.com June 16, 2009 City of Tukwila Jim Haggerton, Mayor Department of Community Development Jack Pace, Director Spectrum Enterprises 10025 South Tacoma Way, 41-8 Lakewood, WA 98499-4667 RE: Refund McDonald's Restaurant —15210 Tukwila International BI Dear Sir: Enclosed please find a check in the amount of $2,250.00 for the above referenced project. This was an assignment of funds posted for the asphalt stamping at drive crossing that was not complete at the time of occupancy for the restaurant. The planning staff has inspected this area on June 8, 2009 and has approved the release of the funds. If you should have any questions, please contact our office at (206)431-3672. Sincerely, plot Brenda Holt Permit Coordinator encl xc: Permit No. D08-243, H:\Documents\Bond Release\D08-243 - Refund Letter.DOC bh 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206-431-3670 • Fax: 206-431-3665 MEMO June 8, 2009 To: Laurie Anderson From: Brenda Holt Re: D08-243 +oj F -. DERA'RTMENT OF;COMMUNIW\ DEVELOPMENT 'ERMIrCENER ir7 ° � s z63OO SOuTHCEI.J EF Tutwtl4;WA�9841�88r P.HONE..0.6 431_,3E Please refund $2,250.00 to Spectrum Enterprises. The asphalt stamping at the drive crossing for the property located at 15210 Tukwila International Blvd is complete and has been inspected and approved by the Planning Department. Please make the check out to: Spectrum Enterprises 10025 South Tacoma Way, #H-8 Lakewood, WA 98499-4667 Please send the check to my attention and I will forward it to them. Thank you. Xc: File No. D08-243 H:1Doc uments\Bond Release\D08-243 - refund memo.doc Jr 4. .-•` '..0 City of Tukwila• • _IP �� ��], 6300 Southcenter Blvd, Suite 100 ,V Tukwila, WA 98188 __.--% : 206-431-3670 1908 DEVELOPER'S PROJECT WARRANTY REQUEST FORM Section 1 — to be completed by Developer Name of Development: "it G 7.-/k/v4-12-4-Ai/ Date: IL/ Mataiip Address: t Z1 0 PA -c. /-/4f 7 Permit No.: ?DO g - Z43 Release should be sent to: Name: / G; ,Zvi16 /Z/' is Address: (9 i l> fit 7¢ Jd City/State/Zip t 4c-oiu A f Cv4 '446 Phone Number: Z 3 X35 - Description of items to be completed (reference plans/documents where items are described): �5p244 t. -T 57444 pi Ai, 4-7 b/2 Ju r3/Lo Ss /a, << OGc)MaAf% As the owner, or authorized agent of the owner, I hereby submit cash or cash equivalent in the amount of $ 2 Z (150% of value to complete work above) and attach support documentation for value of work. I will have this work carried out and call for a final inspection by this date: �j_r, - 3 ' o , or risk having the City use these funds to carry out the work with their own contractor or in-house mai' power. If I fail to carry out the work, I hereby authorize the City to go onto the property and carry out completion of the above deficiencies. I further agree to complete all work listed above prior to requesting inspection and release of the - un... Signed: �-49 Title: Signed: Amount. $�" 00 Cash/Check THIS FUND IS AUTHO ZED T. BE ACCEPTED Department Head: 1117 Deposited this Date: 6' NVQ, ",f1 ❑ Cash Assignment ❑ Bond City Receipt No.: V'0P1- DD'Ic Received By: Section 3 — to be completed by Developer All work identified in Section 1 of this form has now been mpleted and returned to department which authorized warranty. I hereby request inspection and release of my cash/cash equivalent/bond. Developer's Representative: - Date: LTo be com rev a /cas Inspector: City staff the above work and found it acceptable and therefore authorize the release of the above alent/bond. Date: l/l ZIr'i Authorized By: Section 4 — to be completed by City staff Amoun_t_R,leased: $ �e1 1.Gb , CO K Check - Check No. Igt-1/501 ❑ Cash quivalent — Letter attached ❑ Bond — Letter attached Date Released: (Q• I (00•01 Released by: 1policy and procedures\red boolAdeveloper's projea warranty form Created: February 2005 spectrum enterprises IIc 9810 48th avenue east tacoma, wa 98446 253.539.4766 fax 253.539.4767 wa Iic: spectel968ma March 16, 2009 RE: McDonald's Restaurant #46-0005 (Riverton #00472) 15210 Pacific Hwy South Tukwila, WA 98188 50 feet of stamped concrete length width total cost total 50 5 250 $6 $1,500 • • City of Tukwila • Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206-431-3665 Web site: http://wwvv.ci.tukwila.wa.us RECEIPT Parcel No.: 0043000096 Address: 15210 TUKWILA INTERNATIONAL BL TUKW Suite No: Applicant: MCDONALD'S RESTAURANT Permit Number: D08-243 Status: ISSUED Applied Date: 04/30/2008 Issue Date: 08/25/2008 Receipt No.: R09-00409 Initials: JEM User ID: 1165 Payment Amount: $2,250.00 Payment Date: 03/16/2009 09:07 AM Balance: $0.00 Payee: SPECTRUM ENTERPRISES TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Descriptio Amount Payment Check 2077 2,250.00 ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description Account Code Current Pmts BONDS/DEPOSITS 000.239.100 2,250.00 Total: $2,250.00 RECEivED� doc: Receiot-06 Printed: 03-16-2009 1 charles SCHWAB O S a 1 Schwab One 1(08/08/2008) Joanna Spencer_- FW: 4' 005 Tukwila -Page- 1 , From: "Travis Price" <travis.price@drstrong.com> To: "Joanna Spencer" <jspencer@ci.tukwila.wa.us>, <bholt@ci.tukwila.wa.us> Date: 08/06/2008 8:33 AM Subject: FW: 46-0005 Tukwila Attachments: GSS_19_12868.pdf; GSS_19_12868.pdf; Page0001.pdf; Page0001.pdf I know you are receiving this in duplicate, but here are all of the insurance/license act. Please inform me if you are missing any other information. From: Steve Platt [mailto:steve@spectrumenterprises.us] Sent: Wednesday, August 06, 2008 8:22 AM To: doug.bates@us.mcd.com; Travis Price Cc: robert.comiskey@partners.mcd.com Subject: 46-0005 Tukwila City Licenses were paid on 7/15, insurance certs were faxed to the City on 7/31 Steven Platt Spectrum Enterprises LLC 253.539.4766 fax 253.539.4767 "(08/08/2008) Joanna Spencer PageC ' .pdf Page 1J • • w ***********************4.:.*************** City of SeaTac 4800 South 188th Street Seal ac, WA 98188-8605 **************************************** Reg# #/Rcpt#: 001-00077149 [ JK ] Accounting Date: Tue, Jul 15, 2008 Date/Tune; Tue, Jul 15, 2008 10:22 AM **************************************** 1022/6472/SPECTRUM ENTERPRISES LLC/BUSINES S LICENSE Ref #: LIC , 6472 ►'ME: SPECTRUM ENTERPRIS ES LLC 001-321-90-00-000 $35.00 Receipt Total = $35.00 **************************************** Payment Data: Pmt# :1 Payer: SPECTRUM ENTERPRISES LLC Method: Ref#: Amount = $35.00 **************************************** Receipt Summary **************************************** Total Tendered = $35,00 Receipt Total = $35.00 Change Due = $0.00 **************************************** x:(08/08/2008) Joanna Spencer - Paged' .pdf • 0 • Clry of Thicwila, Washington C)MSONESS LICENSE L53 513-4713 Cons taw tian/111813 TIM f11Ern1Ca. MAIM O MUM. I` C0I4dm m COMPLY W17. ALL tie MOInOaMr11 CV 0r00. Naavl •101 =MUM. vPltGaa 701541! 051.451145mmr MIX= 11.3311.3135 *neatens Maternal.... ft.3 8319 4141 101 a 730094 O 81446-4191 pPO•TON 0.15 12.31-2008 Cafe6aaa 53/01/2050 40041 KAn01 01.4405 Iia rr0 Ilan. 00 IA1ES Tay COM 149.1729 ray barn r W C.w.o. romans* O 1.4 YMM al banns NY adman ..s avglate 8319 slob 1. 81 necessary 10 Contact ee Cay 058143 0010181209-433-11300 in the avant your the rcdewtp trueness . pukkildrs 8. Moves within the city MVO of 7L1eea I theoperatinof Moves outside limey limits Y "d your ara= Ceases operation � . Clamps., oaaeMip AIX 0 S).1 Changes use or 33006034381 p IMO 6r having a special event (noon n 4.03L F3 s6Je or any other event Maids hs routine operation. 2. mammal Oceans are required 11 your business has eve mushYenbrbinmenl tow Owlet) amusement devksa so9dtwslpedmel9, or adult emerlebanent 3. Arty retell sales to generated In 1ltkelb rods to be reported to the Washington 9108. Deportment of Revenue, under fabs in code a 1729. 4. T kral busi1e33 gene taneWld0 ars mailed to all OCsnad bnblesses in [Member and payable without penally until January 31. -City of Tukwila Mhod. 14 tmmres l6,re 3 aan.1W1 ella2faa ]Will elm Page 1 2008 Business License Application !ll 1. ON! !1113 rOR,tl IN ITS ENTIRE IT u.u..,ruu .1P,u,.al 070 yt 71*b m APPUG71ON 0N32 and NOf. Mem m madam 55110.83. i.,ld SASL Innicebm. au6mtmw cP2101 eamae0m61r6mmns J 5 4-i ,�L gy7yydnere eeJ7 fd ^."I 4p.'1s July 14. 2009 IJmr1 11 wawa balsams Ise lm Me. Atlnte.e 104 roe.. 55 bail mnat 43.050um 4brprla.e 9810 66th Avanua last Tacoma. 04 96446 •t..atapattru0.Oterpri.a..u. Cann. •Wlataaea.am Wee L. Imam /3v 253 1 119-6766 Comm haL 233 1 539-4166 V holmium W nomad t4 8mm tlbarter 00.9 CAC ❑85.03 0Pram. not Cato*. rap. �1 .1e to 3313.1.314 160 .etm/6a4W....r -®aa:Jdm d 3 •6.. we. a 3t.,.n Platt Principal 9810 46513 40. Esse Tama. W 96446 253.339.4766 10/16/74 atom pwr6awbo0Wmera5l r8g713 h �Mp�t 4aeRstm.P.1M 8360940 Comma land menu .m1Cat Lie 3130 8310 08. '-• 6'13'*NAM alarm CII, OP11Jr* IATREAST78EWS 9ECEWT N.0 ')1666.,,,, CII7CLERRS OFFTCO MIA botbrat# Greeri-rum �n--ar�r�Ps 1 LC'J Od130 itlt• 005* 'r WuNFL""110:1114 000371.000 $ too lat. Con. 000.321.600 Peen. Peel MMmn `000.730333 p mono Ma 000.941.900 80301033805300013100 000.341.690 A3e060400032 000321.700 Hems Bork 1.94311 000386.37 Hareem 000361.704 Don[ 3 V 0v" ,831•.32 )5194100 purr 1..rr •er • 1 0 brtymM 1•••• maw pa. NA6CUse Core 8 P tt 1 Date 3,9801pal CNA C1A1M0MMAW be ams lICDa8 PE8 gees__ 41008 1:15/1330...-111130m to .p:,3.; Urax_.nx0 o msaa. 701 Lam NMI. ❑61.101_11(101 or .0 8.0-3.1 Mean m.m,n colloid ba application *Mier es l44Woa CIy hi ladol, Nan 360{ Mandan Oy art*, Ooh. (08/68/2008) Joanna Spencer - GSS " 12868.pdf • • SPECENT ACORD,r CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (M B D'""YY) PRODUCER Bell -Anderson Ins -Bellevue C/L P. O. Box 40609 11201 S. E. 8T11 ST., SUITE 100 Bellevue, WA 98016-4609 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND,EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURED Spectrum Enterprises LLC 10025 S Tacoma Way #H8 Tacoma, WA 98499 INSURER A. Alaska National Insurance Company ,ySRD A INSURER B GENERAL LIABILITY INSURER C INSURER O EACH OCCURRENCE INSURER E: COVERAGES THE PCLICIESOFINSURANCE USTED BELOWHAVE BEEN ISSUEDTO THE INSURED NAMEDABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERMOR CONDITION CF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECTTO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUEDCR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POUCI ES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECTTO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAIDCLAIMS. INSR400L LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE flATF IMM/OO/YYI POLICY EXPIRATION OATS IMM/nYY) N LIMITS ,ySRD A GENERAL LIABILITY 08GPS32061 107/01/08 07/01/09 EACH OCCURRENCE 51,000,000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL UABIUTY PDAMAGE TO RENTED 5100,000 aims MADE X OCCUR MED EXP (MY ane Person) #10,000 X PI3 Ded: $6,000 PERSONAL a ADV INJURY s1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE s2,000,000 GENL AGGREGATE UMIT APPUES PER PRODUCTS - COMP/OPAGG 12,000,000 —I POLICY n f LOC A AUTOMOBILE X LIABILITY ANY AUTO 08GAS32061 07/01/08 07/01/09 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) 11,000,000 ALL OWNED AUTOS— BODILY INJURY SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) _ X HIRED AUTOS BODILYINIURY X NON -OWNED AUTOS (Per eeeiders) PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) 5 GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY- EA ACCIDENT 5 R ANY AUTO THAN EA ACC 5 OTHER AUTO ONLY: AGG 5 EXCESS/UMBRELLA LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE 5 OCCUR CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE 5 s 5 RDEDUCTIBLE RETENTION s 1 A WORKERS COMPENSATIONANO 08GPS32061 07/01/08 07/01/09 I 0R STATUS I 1OFR EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY - WA Stop Gap- E.L EACH ACCIDENT 61,000,000 ANY PROPRIETO)LPARRNERlEXECUrIVE E.L DISEASE- EA EMPLOYEE 51,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBEREXCLUOED7 If ya,deawribe under SPECIAL PROVISIONS babe E.L DISEASE- POUCY UMIT 11,000,000 OTHER DESCRIPTIONOF OPERATIONS/ LOCATIONS/ VEHICLES/ EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT / SPECIAL PROVISIONS RE: Mcdonald's Restaurant #46-0005 & #071508; 15210 Pacific Hwy. S., Tukwila, WA 98188 The certificate holder is additional insured for general liability, but only if required by written contract or written agreement per the (See Attached Descriptions) CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION City of SeaTac Attn: Dixie Hallenberger 4800 South 188th St. Seattle, WA 98188 SHOULD ANY OF THEABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILLENDEAVOR TO MAIL 111 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THELEFT,BUT FAILURE TO DOSO SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATIONOR LIABILITYOF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. ACORD 25 (2001/08) 1 of 3 #S187641/M187640 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE � ' J G O ACORD CORPORATION 1988 (08/08%2008) Joanna Spencer GSS A 12868.pdf • Page 2. IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WANED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. ACORD 25-S (2001/08) 2 of 3 #S187641/7/1187640 (08/08/2008) Joanna Spencer -_GS_1 '2888:pdf _ _ _... ...__.. Page 1 • • • ACORD. CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DY) D,E(roe'"" TYPE OF INSURANCE PRODUCER Bell -Anderson Ins -Bellevue CIL P.O. Box 40509 11201 S.E. 8TH ST., SUITE 100 Bellevue, WA 98015-4509 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AM END, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAM,/ INSURED Spectrum Enterprises LLC 10025 S Tacoma Way #H8 Tacoma, WA 98499 INSURER A Alaska National Insurance Company GENERAL LIABILITY INSURER G 07/01/08 INSURER C: EACH OCCURRENCE INSURER 0 INSURER E. X COVERAGES THE POJCIES CF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUEDTO THE INSURED NAMEDABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERMOR CCNDITTON CF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECTTO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUEDOR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POUCI ES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECTTO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS CF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAIDCLAIMS. INSR 1.18-118811 VOL TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE (MM' M/DO1 POLICY EXPIRATION DATE IMM/DDIYYI LIMITS A GENERAL LIABILITY 08GPS32051 07/01/08 07/01/09 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY PREM S,- f nENTorrurErenne) 5100,000 CLAIMS MADE X OCCUR MED EXP (Am as person) Si 0,000 X PD Ded: $5,000 PERSONALS ADV INJURY 51,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE s2,000,000 GENT. AGGREGATE UMITAPPUES PER TPOucvI GIT& I ILOC PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGO s2,000,000 A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 08GAS32061 07/01/0807/01/09 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT X ANY AUTO (Ea accimM) 51,000,000 ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per Person) 5 X HIRED AUTOS X NON OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Pet accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ R ANY AUTO OTHER THAN EA ACC S AUTO ONLY: AGG S EXCESS/UMBRELLA LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE S OCCUR CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE S S RDEDUCTIBLE S RETENTION $ $ A WORKERS COMPENSATION AND 08GPS32051 07/01/08 07/01/09 I WC I IMIT I 10TH• TORY I IMITS FR EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY E EACH ACCIDENT 51,000,000 ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE-WA Stop Gap - OFFICERIMEMSER EXCLUDED? udM E DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE 51,000,000 E DISEASE - POUCYUMIT $1,000,000 SPEGAL PROVISIONS be MAL OTHER DESCRIPTIONOF OPERATIONS/ LOCATIONS/ VEHICLES/ EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT / SPECIAL PROVISIONS RE: Mcdonald's Restaurant #46-0005 & #071508; 16210 Pacific Hwy. S., Tukwila, WA 98188 The certificate holder is additional insured for general liability, but only if required by written contract or written agreement per the (See Attached Descriptions) CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION City of Tukwila Attn: Joanna Spenser 6200 Southcenter Blvd. Seattle, WA 98188 SHOULD ANY OF THEABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION GATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILLENDEAVOR TO MAIL 40 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT,BUT FAILURE TO DOSO SHALL I MPOSE NO OBLIGATIONOR LIABILITYOF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. ACORD 25 (2001/08) 1 of3 #S187642818187640 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ‘1444..4a.- VVV ACORD CORPORATION 1988 GSS (08/08/2008) oa Jnna Spencer - GSS_' 12868.pdf • Page 2 IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. Astatement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the polities listed thereon. ACORD 25-S (2001!08) 2 of 3 #S187642IM187640 Joanna Spencer - Re: McDonald's Restau C08-011 From: Cyndy Knighton To: Joanna Spencer Date: 07/28/2008 4:42 pm Subject: Re: McDonald's Restaurant C08-011 Comparing the two possible methods for calculating impact fees, I've chosen the one most advantageous to the applicant. Applying the net increase of 509sf to the fee amount per sf of $9.94, the impact fee due at building permit issuance is $5,059.46. The second method, which is likely to be more reflective of the true trip generation of the site as per the ITE trip generation manual's comment that hamburger joints typically have a higher trip generation than others in the same classification, yields an impact fee due of slightly more than $2k over the quoted amount above. Cyndy »> On 07/28/2008 at 3:58 pm, in message<488DEBF9.3CF2.00D6.0@ci.tukwila.wa.us>, Joanna Spencer wrote: > Cyndy, > Traffic Conc Test Application C08-011 was submitted > and PW didn't charge them any application fee. > Proposal calls for demo of the exist restaurant which has 4,974 sq ft > and construction of a 5,483 sq ft new one. Net area increase is 509 sq ft. > Both have a drive thru window. What is the traffic mitigation fee ? > Thanks, Joanna PERMANENT FILE COPY �06-243 • • D.R. STRONG CONSULTING ENGINEERS July 2, 2008 Joanna Spencer Development Engineer City of Tukwila 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188-2544 Re: Response to City Comments Tukwila McDonald's Project No. 07052.100 CITY RECEIVEDLA Ji 022008 PERMIT CENTER Dear Ms. Spencer: This letter is in response to your comment letter dated June 25, 2008, and the plan markups received on June 27, 2008. We have addressed the necessary items for the City to complete its review. Our responses to the comments are as follows: City Letter Comments June 25, 2008: 1. Clearly show City of Tukwila corporate boundaries with SeaTac, copy of assessors map attached. The boundary for City of Tukwila/City of SeaTac was added to sheets C1, F1, F2 and F3. 2. Submit copy of surveys listed under "note" on sheet C1 of 6 including copy of property title report and recorded copies of all easements. Sheet C1 of 6 shows 2 diagonal overhead power lines, however, only one 10' electric transmission line easement is mentioned. Since SeaTac has future plans for power undergrounding in their right-of-way, applicant shall coordinate with City of SeaTac and the power company to make provisions for future undergrounding and at least provide adequate conduits to avoid new parking pavement disruption. 25' wide storm line easement recording no. 5533740 is only shown in E/W direction, however, the pipe system angles towards SE corner of the property, submit easement document for verification. • Updated-TOPO survey will be submitted. o Overhead power line and easement into center of site will be abandoned. See response to Redline Comment Sheet C2 Item 1 below. • Existing 25' storm drain easement will be replaced with 15' public storm drain easement through total site, at completion of construction per earlier agreement. 3. Trash enclosure requires a small CB and it shall be routed to sanitary sewer system via a grease interceptor. Your plans show it routed incorrectly to storm drainage system. Per your phone call to me on June 30, 2008, the trash enclosure area will not have a catch basin drain and will not drain to the sanitary sewer, it will sheet flow to nearest catch basin to west. 4. A separate plan drawn in 1"=10' of 1"=20' depicting frontal improvements along S. 152nd Street (including one street light) is required. Please follow City of Tukwila standards and 10604 N.E. 38111 Place Suite 101 Kirkland, WA Q8 03 c: 42,) 306 79033 -2423 Engineers CORRECTION LTR# 0 Planners j Surveyors Joanna Spencer July 2, 2008 Page 2 of 6 • • details. SW corner of S. 152nd Street intersection might need to be modified. Please coordinate with SeaTac. Frontage improvements for both International Blvd and S. 152nd Street are shown on sheets F1 and F3 respectively. Sheet F2 contains traffic control plan for both street improvements. Sheet F1 and F2 have been submitted to the City of SeaTac for their review. 5. A separate street illumination plan is needed for installation of one (1) street light on the south side of S. 152nd Street. Per Scott Bates, PW Street Department at (206) 575-3404, it can be powered from the NE corner of the intersection. Tukwila owns this light so its feed can be used. The street light has been shown on sheet F3. 6. Please submit sizing calculations for detention, water quality and letter from Contech approving proposed storm drainage design. See response to Redline Comment Sheet C5 Item 1 below. 7. Please refer to attached mark-up for additional comments. Return mark-up with your revision resubmittal. See responses to all plan mark-up comments as follows: Sheet PCV -Project Cover Sheet: 1. Add additional sheet numbers encompassing entire civil and landscape set. Each sheet has an additional number provided in the lower right corner. 2. Additional Plan Changes. The sheet index has been updated to match and account for additional project sheets. Sheet C1 -Cover Sheet: 1. Was June 20, 2007 updated in March? Submit a copy of this survey. A copy of the updated survey dated March 24, 2008 is enclosed with this package. The Vertical and Horizontal Datum were updated to met City of Tukwila requirements. City of Tukwila / City of SeaTac boundary was added. Sheet index was added to show Frontage Improvement and Traffic Control Plan Sheets F1 - F3. Sheet C2 — T.E.S.C. Plan and Notes: 1. What's the deal with O.H. power crossing your property? The overhead power crossing the Site has been coordinated with Seattle City Light. See Sheet C6 for the new power layout. Note that Seattle City Light will be providing power to the Chiropractor's Office adjacent to the site via South 152nd Street. Sheet C2 — T.E.S.C. Notes and Details: The sanitary sewer capping information has been added to the TESC Plan. Note was added calling for capping existing storm lateral connection to 36" storm drain pipe. Joanna Spencer July 2, 2008 Page 3 of 6 • • Sheet C4 — Grading and Storm Drainage Plan: 1. Show these details on plan. Sheets SD8 and SD9 have been added to the plan set showing all City of Tukwila Details used. 2. Submit SD easement document. Per earlier discussions with City staff prior to the DRB, a new easement will be recorded prior to occupancy, extinguishing the existing 25 -foot private storm drainage easement, and providing a 15 -foot public storm drainage easement. No action necessary at this time. 3. Shall tie into sanitary sewer via grease interceptor per Mike Cusick, Public Works Sanitary Sewer Engineer. Per conversation with you June 30, 2008, no drain shall be provided and trash enclosure shall sheet flow to storm drain CB. The drain catch basin has been eliminated and the trash enclosure area grading has been revised, as requested. 4. Correct spelling of Chamber. Chamber has been correctly spelled. The grading information in S. 152nd Street has been moved to sheet F3 Sheet C5 — Storm and Pavement Notes and Details: 1. Submit an approval letter from Contech that they have reviewed SD calculations and plan sheets x, y, z, last review dated .... Review and letter from Contech is in process and will be submitted separately prior to permit issuance (Joe Reidy 800-548-4667 ext. 114). 2. Submit a Storm Drainage Maintenance Manual in a recordable form (1" margin all the way around), to be recorded by the applicant against the property. Document is being prepared and will be submitted separately prior to permit issuance. 3. This detail shall be shown on a separate frontage improvement plan. The pavement section detail has been moved to sheet F3. 4. Include C.O. T. details on plan. C.O.T. Details have been added to sheets SD 8 and SD 9. Sheet C6 — Layout and Dimensioning Plan: The layout information in S. 152nd Street has been moved to sheet F3. Power vault information under a separate permit with Seattle City Light has been referenced on the plan sheet. Sheet SD1-7 — Site Details: Change to note at top center of sheet has been revised and/or added regarding the origin of the plan details from McDonald's Corp. for reference and coordination only. Joanna Spencer July 2, 2008 Page 4 of 6 • • Sheet SD7— Trash Yard Details: 1. CB Structure & Pipe to Grease Interceptor. Requirement for CB in center of trash enclosure area was eliminated per phone conversation June 30, 2008. See response to similar note on sheet C4. No change to plan sheet was made. Sheet SD8-9 — Site Details: New sheets with City of Tukwila Standard Details. Sheet SW1 — Fire Sprinkler and Side Sewer Plan and Cover Sheet: 1. Submit sanitary sewer plan approval from Valley View. Plan approval is in process and will be submitted prior to City issuance of construction permit. 2. Submit water service plan approval from Water District No. 125. Plan approval is in process and will be submitted prior to City issuance of construction permit. 3. Submit traffic control plan for S 152"d Street. The traffic control plan for S 152nd Street is shown on new Sheet F2 of 3 and is combined with the traffic plan for International Blvd. 4. Submit copy of SeaTac permit. Permit approval is in process and will be submitted prior to City issuance of construction permit. 5. RPPA Reduced Pressure Principle Assembly Required (pointing to existing 1 %" building service meter). Per discussion between Travis Price and you, this is not required if the water serviced to trash enclosure area is fed off of irrigation system service that has a proper backflow assembly. The plan was revised to clarify that the service to the trash enclosure hose bib was connected to the irrigation service meter beyond the double check valve assembly and not to the building service line that crosses under that irrigation service line. 6. `, City of Tukwila inspection of water service line required since WD# 125 does not inspect downstream of WM." This note was added to the existing 2" water service line call out. 7. Inlet from trash enclosure shall be routed via grease interceptor to sanitary sewer and not to storm. See response to similar comment on Sheet C4. 8. What vertical datum are being used? NA VD 1988 is required. The note referencing adding 300.0 to the spot elevations shown is just to clarify that the 300 digit was left off of all of the spot elevations on the original survey and not that an assumed Joanna Spencer July 2, 2008 Page 5 of 6 • datum had been used. The survey information shown reflects the correct NAVD 1988 datum. 9. This sanitary sewer capping shall be part of the demo permit. The note has been modified to reflect this comment. 10. "with 5" locking Storz caps manufactured by Knox, Contact Tukwila Fire Department for ordering" and "to be located not less than 18" nor more than 48" above the level of adjoining ground, sidewalk or grade surface." The note referenced was modified as indicated. 11. Show vault detail on plan. The Water District No. 125 Standard Details for the double detector check valve and vault have been added to new plan sheet SW2 of 2. 12. Pipe clearance to assure no conflict. A table showing projected pipe clearance for sewer/water/storm crossings has been added. • Building sewer was raised 0.5' to provide 0.6' clearance over 36" storm drain crossing #5 as shown on the crossing table. Sheet SW2 — Sewer and Water Details: New sheet with WD No. 125 Standard Details for Double Detector Check Assembly. Sheet SL1 — Site Lighting Plan: No Changes. Sheet L1 — Landscape Construction Plans Cover Sheet: No Changes. Sheet L2 — Layout/Planting Plan and Details: The plan was updated/adjusted for new S.C.L. Utility Vaults. Sheet SP1 Architectural Site Plan: 1. A separate Frontage Improvement Plan including installation of (1) required streetlight on S.152"d Street drawn in 1"=10' or 1"=20' scale is required. Show City of Tukwila Sidewalk and driveway details and streetlight details. These improvements will be turned over to the City of Tukwila for ownership and maintenance. A separate frontage plan F3 has been created including one street Tight. F1 is provided for reference purposes. Sheet F2 is the traffic control plan for both frontages. All City details are shown on sheets SD8 and SD 9. Joanna Spencer July 2, 2008 Page 6 of 6 • • 2. These improvements will be turned over to the City of Tukwila for ownership + maintenance. This is acknowledged. 3. Curb/Gutter as required. Information added to sheet F3. 4. Transition to match existing needs to take place beyond McDonald's frontage. Transition has been added to Sheet F3. Sincerely yours, D. R. STRONG Consulting Engine rs Inc. Richard D. Olson, P.E. Principal, Senior Vice -President TWP/adb Enclosures. Updated Topographic Survey March 24, 2008 City Markups Revised Plans T: 107101070521Letters\L080627 Joanna Spencer.doc t June 30, 2008 • • Cizy of Tukwila Jim Haggerton, Mayor Department of Community Development Jack Pace, Director Doug Bates 12313 113 Ave NE, Ste 103 Kirkland WA 98034 RE: CORRECTION LETTER #1 Development Application Number D08-243 McDonald's Restaurant —15210 Tukwila International BI Dear Mr. Bates: This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit can be approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the Public Works Department. At this time the Building, Fire, and Planning Departments have no comments. Public Works Department: Joanna Spencer at 206 431-2440 if you have questions regarding the attached comments. Please address the attached comments in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and/or other documentation. The City requires that four (4) complete sets of revised plans, specifications and/or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal, a `Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections/revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. If you have any questions, please contact me at (206) 431-3670. Sincerely, e ifer Marshall ut Technician encl File No. D08-243 P:\Pemdt Center\Correction Letters\2008\D08-243 Correction Ltr #I.DOC wer 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206-431-3670 • Fax: 206-431-3665 • PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT COMMENTS www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Development Guidelines and Design and Construction Standards DATE: June 27, 2008 PROJECT: Tukwila McDonald's Q 15210 International Blvd REVIEW #: 1 File No.: D08-243 PLAN REVIEWER: Contact Joanna Spencer at (206) 431-2440 if you have any questions regarding the following comments. 1) Clearly show City of Tukwila corporate boundaries with SeaTac, copy of assessors map attached. 2) Submit copy of surveys listed under "NOTE" on sheet C 1 of 6 including copy of property title report and recorded copies of all easements. Sheet C 1 of 6 shows 2 diagonal overhead power lines, however, only one 10' electric transmission line easement is mentioned. Since SeaTac has future plans for power undergrounding in their right-of-way, applicant shall coordinate with City of Seatac and the power company to make provisions for future undergrounding and at least provide adequate conduits to avoid new parking pavement disruption. 25' wide storm line easement recording no. 5533740 is only shown in E/W direction, however, the pipe system angles towards SE corner of the property, submit easement document for verification. 3) Trash enclosure requires a small CB and it shall be routed to sanitary sewer system via a grease interceptor. Your plans show it routed incorrectly to storm drainage system. 4) A separate plan drawn in 1"=10' of 1 "=20' depicting frontal improvements along S. 152nd Street (including one street light) is required. Please follow City of Tukwila standards and details. SW corner of S. 15211d Street intersection might need to be modified. Please coordinate with SeaTac. 5) A separate street illumination plan is needed for installation of one (1) street light on the south side of S 152nd Street. Per Scott Bates, PW Street Department at (206)575-3404, it can be powered from the NE corner of the intersection. Tukwila owns this light so it's feed can be used. 6) Please submit sizing calculations for detention, water quality and letter from Contech approving proposed storm drainage design. 7) Please refer to attached mark-up for additional comments & items discussed at June 27, 2008 meeting. Return mark-up with your revision resubmittal.* * mark-up set was given to the engineer during 06/27/08 meeting (P:Joanna/Comments 1 D08-243 • William H. Epp PE c/o McDonald's Corporation 2111 McDonald's Drive Dept. 043 Oak Brook, IL 60523 TO: City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Blvd. Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 Attn: Brenda Holt, Permit Coordinator DATE: March 24, 2008 Re: Response to Incomplete Letter #1 Permit Number D08-243 McDonald's Restaurant 15210 Pacific Highway West Denver, CO (046-0005) Dear City Official: The structural drawings have been designed per the requirements stated in the geotechnical report (The Riley Group, #2007-021 and dated February 27, 2007) for spread footing foundations; with the fill as specified and as required by said report. Sincerely Yours, William H. Epp, P.E. State of Washington Registered Engineer No. 23201E JPI/pmp INCOMPLETE RECE1VEr MAY 2 3 2009 PERMIT CENTEI - EXPIRES 8/211 08 acifto 10 8 Dos- )2(3 May 16, 2008 i City of Tu ,Ila Jim Haggerton, Mayor Department of Community Development Jack Pace, Director Doug Bates 12131 — 113th Avenue NE, Suite 103 Kirkland, WA 98034 RE: Letter of Incomplete Application # 2 Development Permit Application D08-243 McDonald's Restaurant — 15210 Tukwila International B1 Dear Mr. Bates, This letter is to inform you that your permit application received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center on April 30, 2008 is determined to be incomplete. Before your application can continue the plan review process the following items from the following department need to be addressed: Building Department: Dave Larson at 206 431-3678 if you have any questions concerning the following comments. 1. Please submit 2006 energy code forms as outlined in incomplete letter #1 dated May 6, 2008. Copy attached for your reference. Please address the comment above in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and/or other documentation. The City requires that five (5) sets of revised plans, specifications and/or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal a `Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. If you have any questions, please contact me at the Permit Center at (206) 431-3670. Sincerely, tia 40( Brenda Holt Permit Coordinator Enclosures File: D08-243 P:\Permit Center\Incomplete Letters\2008\D08-243 Incomplete Ltr #2.DOC jem 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206-431-3670 • Fax: 206-431-3665 May 6, 2008 • Cizy of Tukwila • Jim Haggerton, Mayor Department of Community Development Jack Pace, Director Doug Bates 12131 — 113`h Avenue NE, Suite 103 Kirkland, WA 98034 RE: Letter of Incomplete Application # 1 Development Permit Application D08-243 McDonald's Restaurant — 15210 Tukwila International Bl Dear Mr. Bates, This letter is to inform you that your permit application received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center on April 30, 2008 is determined to be incomplete. Before your application can continue the plan review process the following items from the following department need to be addressed: Building Department: Dave Larson at 206 431-3678 if you have any questions concerning the attached comments. Please address the comment above in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and/or other documentation. The City requires that five (5) sets of revised plans, specifications and/or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal a `Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. If you have any questions, please contact me at the Permit Center at (206) 431-3670. Sincerely, oAttize Brenda Holt Permit Coordinator Enclosures File: D08-243 • • P:\Permit Center\Incomplete Letters\2008\D08-243 Incomplete Ltr # 1.DOC jem 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206-431-3670 • Fax: 206-431-3665 • • Tukwila Building Division Dave Larson, Senior Plan Examiner Determination of Completeness Memo Date: May 6, 2008 Project Name: McDonald's Permit #: D08-243 Plan Review: Dave Larson, Senior Plans Examiner The Building Division has deemed the subject permit application incomplete. To assist the applicant in expediting the Department plan review process, please forward the following comments. (GENERAL NOTE) PLAN SUBMITTALS: (Min. size 11x17 to maximum size of 24x36; all sheets shall be the same size). (If applicable) Structural Drawings and structural calculations sheets shall be original signed wet stamped, not copied.) 1. The cover page and callouts on the structural pages provided refer to structural pages that were not provided with the submitted plans. Also the plans do not include a structural notes page typically inserted at the beginning of the structural section. I could not find any information that would coordinate geotechnical recommendations with proposed spread footing foundations. Special inspection information would typically be located in a Structural Notes page as well. Please complete the structural section of plans by adding missing pages and other necessary information that may have been overlooked. 2. The geotechnical report recommends two scenarios for support of the foundation system proposed, pin piles or structural fill four to eight feet deep depending on specific location of footings within building footprint. Please verify which condition applies and add notes to structural pages that include geotechnical and special inspection monitoring requirements for this project and specific design details as related to piles or earthwork. 3. The Washington State Energy Code compliance forms used are 2004 forms. Please resubmit using 2006 forms. Should there be questions concerning the above requirements, contact the Building Division at 206-431-3670. No further comments at this time. Alder Square Environmental Health Services 1404 Central Avenue South, Suite 101 Kent, WA 98032-7433 206-296-4708 Fax 206-296-0163 TTY Relay: 711 www.kingcounty.gov/health April 28, 2008 Travis Price DR Strong Consulting Engineers 10604 NE 38th PI #101 Kirkland, WA 98033 RE: PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR: McDonalds at 15120 Pacific Hwy S, Tukwila 98188 SR1159013 P/E 6723 (Risk 3) Dear Mr. Price: 0 Public Health Seattle & King County The plans and specifications for the above new project have been reviewed and, in accordance with the provisions of Title 5, the Code of the King County Board of Health (The Food Code) are hereby APPROVED. Your establishment has been assigned the following plan review service number (SRI 159013). Please use this SR# in all future contact with us. As required in The Food Code, upon completion of the construction and before opening for business, the food service establishment operator/owner shall: 1. Complete an application for the annual operations permit if you don't have a current permit. Include a copy of this letter when applying for the annual permit. Please call me prior to paying for your permit to verify the correct fee. Be advised that the penalty for commencing operation of a food service establishment without the required permit is 50% of the applicable permit fee. 2. Obtain a preoperational inspection approval. Contact me at 206-205-1903 at least one week in advance to schedule a preoperational inspection. Be sure all other inspections (plumbing, building, etc.) are done before you call the Health Department for an inspection. Your application for a food service establishment permit from Public Health Seattle & King County may be approved during this inspection, however it is the responsibility of the food service establishment operator/owner to obtain all necessary permits and approvals from other agencies. Operating the establishment without these required permits or approvals may subject the operator/owner to legal action by the appropriate agencies. If the establishment is opened without the Health Department preoperational inspection, it may be subject to closure. Failed preoperational inspections will require a $100.00 fee for a repeat inspection. If you have any questions, please don't hesitate to contact me. Thank you for your compliance in this matter and I look forward to seeing you soon. Sincerely, Diane Agasid Bondoc, R.S. Plans Examiner Alder Square Office DAB:dg enclosures cc: Robert Comiskey, Owner/Operator RECEIVED CITY OF TUKIMLA APR 4, 0 ZOOd PERMIT CENTER DO(4- • PERMIT COORD COPY • PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D08-243 DATE: 01-26-09 PROJECT NAME: MCDONALDS SITE ADDRESS: 15210 TUKWILA INTERNATIONAL BL Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter # Response to Correction Letter # X Revision # 1 After Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: Building Division Public Works n Fire Prevention Structural u u -$M A-Wc, 1 x-09 Planning Lit vision Permit Coordinator n DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete Comments: Incomplete U DUE DATE: 01-27-09 Not Applicable Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW 0 Staff Initials: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: TUES/THURS ROUTING: Please Route 12r Structural Review Required No further Review Required ❑ REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved Notation: Approved with Conditions n DUE DATE: 02-24-09 Not Approved (attach comments) El REVIEWER'S INITIALS: 1Al E12— DATE: cxq-D Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg 0 Fire 0 Ping 0 PW 0 Staff Initials: Documents/routing slip.doc 2-28-02 PERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D08-243 DATE: 07-02-08 PROJECT NAME: MCDONALD'S RESTAURANT SITE ADDRESS: 15210 TUKWILA INTERNATIONAL BL Original Plan Submittal X Response to Correction Letter # 1 Response to Incomplete Letter # Revision # after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: Building Division Pxblic Wo, U 0-/ -05 DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete rVf Incomplete Comments: Fire Prevention Structural Planning Division nPermit Coordinator n DUE DATE: 07-08-08 Not Applicable n Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg 0 Fire ❑ Ping 0 PW ❑ Staff Initials: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: TUES/THURS ROU NG: Please Route Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: n No further Review Required DATE: n APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: DUE DATE: 08-05-08 Approved n Approved with Conditions In Not Approved (attach comments) Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg 0 Fire ❑ Ping 0 PW ❑ Staff Initials: Documents/routing slip.doc 2-28-02 �PERMIT COORD COPY • PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D08-243 DATE: 05-23-08 PROJECT NAME: MCDONALD'S RESTAURANT SITE ADDRESS: 15210 TUKWILA INTERNATIONAL BL Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter # X Response to Incomplete Letter # 2 Revision # After Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: JCS0 '645 Buildl_ng Qivisioo Public orks 1.�. Fire Prevention Structural n -161 PI nnl g Ivlslo Permit Coordinator DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) DUE DATE: 05-29-08 Complete Comments: Incomplete Not Applicable n Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg 0 Fire 0 Ping 0 PW 0 Staff Initials: TUES/THURS RO TING: Please Route Structural Review Required ❑ No further Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DUE DATE: 06-26-08 Not Approved (attach comments)17( DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: b(/ (9)t) Departments issued corrections: Bldg 0 Fire 0 Ping ❑ PW Staff Initials: Documents/routing slip.doc 2-28-02 • PERMIT COORD COPY • PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D08-243 DATE: 05-14-08 PROJECT NAME: MCDONALDS SITE ADDRESS: 15210 TUKWILA INTERNATIONAL BL Original Plan Submittal X Response to Incomplete Letter # 1 Response to Correction Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: t4114Big 4 Public Works Fire Prevention Structural Planning Division ❑ Permit Coordinator DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete Comments: Incomplete DUE DATE: 05-15-08 Not Applicable n Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: 6 D"OD LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILE P Departments determined incomplete: Bldg Fire 0 Ping 0 PW 0 Staff Initials: TUES/THURS ROUTING: Please Route n Structural Review Required ❑ No further Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: n APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: n DUE DATE: 06-12-08 Not Approved (attach comments) n DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg 0 Fire 0 Ping 0 PW 0 Staff Initials: Documents/routing slip.doc 2-28-02 • PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D08-243 DATE: 04-30-08 PROJECT NAME: MCDONALD'S SITE ADDRESS: 15210 TUKWILA INTERNATIONAL BL X Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter # Response to Incomplete Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: Prrvi Bu ing Division Public Works 5II&S Fire Prevention Structural n Planning Division Permit Coordinator DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete Comments: Incomplete DUE DATE: 05-06-08 Not Applicable Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: -07) LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg d Fire 0 Ping 0 PW 0 Staff Initials: TUES/THURS ROUTING: Please Route nStructural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: No further Review Required DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved n Approved with Conditions Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DUE DATE: 06-03-08 Not Approved (attach comments) n DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg 0 Fire 0 Ping 0 PW 0 Staff Initials: Documents/routing slip.doc 2-28-02 • City of Tukwila Steven M. Mullet, Mayor Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206-431-3665 Web site: http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Steve Lancaster, Director VISION°rSUB1VIIT.T; Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: (#!,)3t1 PIan Check/Permit Number: ❑ Response Incomplete Letter # 0 „Response to Correction Letter # Revision # toafter Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner Project Name: A( -1)D0,101 C 01 Vl Project Address: 1 D r i Contact Person: ( i`7 Prit{. / " Summary of Revision: k3(.f c-c}o' of- 11_1,164,9( b c, dd"s Pri) 1,4 liec� '(I pt)Vw(6 fy�rl,4'1 A dtg- cafgRa JAN 2 6 2009 PERMIT CENTER Phone Number: 4411'1 0141111(1k Sheet Number(s): "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: 121 Entered in Permits Plus on W'%41) `applications\fonns-applications on line\revision submittal Created: 8-13-2004 Revised: • City of Tukwila • Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206-431-3665 Web site: http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: "' 7/ P-103 Plan Check/Permit Number: W ol"I ✓ ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # Response to Correction Letter # ❑ Revision # after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner peceiven CITY pc 71 1LA JUL 0 2 2008 PERMIT CENTER Project Name: \N'C�116` Project Address: \ , \ b TUAY W117 � mt Qy 6& &w - Contact Person: \- \(j 1(iI Q\SOi \ Phone Number: VI 15- 17" 30(-03 Summary of Revision: ?vas( (- iCk` . L t -Q. 0 - ( C.ovn, uJM- S ' Qclu kul upoio? Sheet Number(s): "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: 1 ki Entered in Permits Plus on 01-19.2. 1,24 \applications\forms-applications on Iine\revision submittal Created: 8-13-2004 Revised: • • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206-431-3665 Web site: hltp://www.ci.tulnvila.wa.us REVISION SUBMITTAL Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: -5/2/06 Plan Check/Permit Number: D08-243 ® Response to Incomplete Letter # 2 ❑ Response to Correction Letter # ❑ Revision # _ after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner Project Name: MCDONALD'S RESTAURANT Project Address: 1 52 10 Tukwila International BI Contact Person: Doug Bates Summary of Revision. Phone Number: 426- 24Z_ Z'4 1 SHt .F TS RECEIVED MTV OF T11KW11 A MAY 23 2000 PERRY CENTER Sheet Number(s): "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision ) ,� Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: [Entered in Permits Plus on \applications\forms-applications on line\revision submittal Created: 8-13-2004 Revised: • City of Tukwila Steven M. Mullet, Mayor Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206-431-3665 Web site: http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Steve Lancaster, Director Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: 4-f(r)b EL- Response to Incomplete Letter # ❑ Response to Correction Letter # ❑ Revision # after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner Plan Check/Permit Number: t c 82* Project Name: j u K.w . /l&& D0,.._,,44.,t Project Address: I ,S Z 10 "Tv Contact Person: l Phone Number: 27 30 L? Summary of Revision: — S -T17.0 D (.--, A -(t c, -. /A. Lct F12-,3 -Thi LL -47/P-1 5� =t - RECEIVED Cin, nF TI 11(tgl1� MAY 114 200e, PERMIT CENTER Sheet Number(s): "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: trEntered in Permits Plus on S5-- 1--c-06 Capplicationslforms-applications on linelrevision submittal Created: 8-13-2004 DEC -03-2007 17:09 D. R. STRONG • CITY OF TUKWI[A Community Development Deparbnent Permit Center 6300 Southcenter 81vd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 425 827 2423 • P. 02433 Permit Center/Building Division: 206-431-3670 Public Works Department: 206-433.0179 Planning Division: 206-431-3670 CERTIFICATE OF WATER AVAILABILITY Required only If outside City of Tukwila water dtstrtot PERMIT NO.: Site address (attach map and legal desaiplon showing hydrant location and size of main): 15210 Pacific Rwy- South T"ii- WA McDonalds Corpnrarinn Address: Phone: 425-242-2411 Travi- Address 10604 NE lRrh 21 - 4 1 n1 Ph One: Kirkland, WA 9803 475_R97-1fA1 This red ficate Is for the purposes of: 0 Residendal Building Pam*❑ Preliminary Plat Convnarchalfindustrtal Building Perna 0 Rezone 0 Short Subdivision Other connection Es d mmdner of service tens and wider meter slam One 1 1l 2 inrh mP r P r 1ti r n P 2 inch for fire service. VeVehicular distance from nearest hydra to the closest pout of structure is 2 25 5 Area is served by (Water Utley District): Water District # 17% - Date 1. The P project is within 2. ❑ No Improvements required. 3. The improvements requited to upgrade the water system to ming tt Into compliance with the aides' comprehensive plan or to meet the minimum flow requirements of the project before connection and to meet the State cross connection control requiremenbc •••••••••• i 1 a l c (City/County) (ilia separate sisal Immo roost Is seed34) ed and will be available at the efts with a 4. act 20 psiresidualresidual for a on the duration of 22 hours above. listed velocity of water can be a 2. fps as documented by the attached � 9Pm 5. Water Acceptable service can be provided to this project DAcceptable Beryl= cannot be ceded to this project unless the i eptovements in Item B-2 are mat. System is net capable of providing service to this project. I hereby orrery that the above Intomudion is bur and correct. id.% C.c., ullrFle D i'i'i,40. E i Ag a 2.Ora_ 2.4z-ct 5 `i 7 By . This certificate Is not valid without Water District #125's attachment e N., 'Attachment to Certificate of Water Avallablity" ‘eppficatiansbneter aveuabiflb (7-2009) Printed: 0-16.03 CITY ORECEIVED �TUKWI A APR 3, 0 2006 PERMIT CEt1F / 2 -/I—t)-7 Date E tir-e5 -.-`z�. cis • • 14816 Military Road South P.O. Box 69550 Tukwila, WA 98168 Phone: (206) 242-3236 Fax: (206) 242-1527 CERTIFICATE OF SEWER AVAILABILITY/NON-AVAILABILITY I I Residenitial: $50 Commercial: $100 M Certificate of Sewer Availability OR 0 Certificate of Sewer Non -Availability Part in.. (To Be Completed by Applicant) Purpose of Certificate: © Building Permit 0 Preliminary Plat or PUD 0 Other 0 Short Subdivision 0 Rezone Proposed Use: ❑ Residential Single Family 0 Residential Multi -Family ® Commercial 0 Other Applicants Name: McDonalds Corporation Phone: 425-242-2411 Property Address or Approximate Location: Tax Lot Number. 15210 Pacific t1W.South Tukwila, WA 0043000096 & 0043000090 Legal Descnption(Attach Map and Legal Description if necessary): See Attached Part B: (To Be Completed by Sewer Agency) 1. Pt e. Sewp Service will be provided by side sewer connection only to an existing 15 ` size sewer CJ feet from the site and the sewer system has the capacity to serve the proposed use. OR ❑ b. Sewer service will require en improvement to the sewer system of: 0 (1) feet of sewer trunk or lateral to reach the site; and/or ❑ (2) the construction of a collection system on the site; end/or ❑ (3) other (describe): 2. (Must be completed if 1.b above is checked) 0 a. The sewer system improvement Is In conformance with a County approved sewer comprehensive Plan. OR 0 b. The sewer system improvement will require a sewer comprehensive plan amendment. 3. IS a. The proposed protect Is within the corporate Omits of the District, or has been granted Boundary Review Board approval for extension of service outside the District, OR ❑ b. Annexation or BRB approval will be necessary to provide service. 4. Service is subject to the following: PERMIT: $ a. District Connection Charges due prior to connection: GFC: $ SFC: $ UNIT: $ TOTAL $ (Subject to Change on January 1st) King County/METRO Capacity Charge: Currently, $6195.651resIdenUel equivalent. will be billed directly by King County alter connection to the sewer system. (Subject to change by King Co/Metro without notice..) b. Easements: 0 Require0 Maybe quired ' j c. Other. 4:40,,,E...11 Z✓4. 4e-rG.✓Y�l ssrCF O �f) 4 r . C . e O NK CC+1-jJ ‘..) the • certify that the above s - wer agency information is true. This certification shall be valid for one year fro r date of signet Title Date RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA APR 3, 0 2008 PERMIT CENTER ATTACHMENT TO VAL VUE SEWER DISTRICT CERTIFICATE OF SEWER AVAILABILITY/NON-AVAILABILITY The following terms and conditions apply to the attached Val Vuc Sewer District ("District") Certificate of Sewer Availability/Non-Availability ("Certificate"). 1 This Certificate is valid only for the real property referenced herein ("Property"), which is in the District's service area, for the sole purpose of submission to the King County Department of Development and Environmental Services, King County Department of Public Health, City of Seattle, CityofTukwila, City of Burien and/or City of SeaTac. This Certificate is between the District and the applicant only, and no third person or party shall have any rights hereunder whether by agency, third -party beneficiary principles or otherwise, 2. This Certificate creates no contractual relationship between the District and the applicant and its successors and assigns, and does not constitute and may not be relied upon as the District's guarantee that sewer service will be available at the time the applicant may apply to the District for such service. 3.. As of the date of the District's signature on this Certificate, the District represents that sewer service is available to the Property through sewer systems that exist or that maybe extended by the applicant. The District makes no other representations, express or implied, including without limitation that the applicant will be able to obtain the necessary permits, approvals and authorizations from King County, City of Seattle, City of Tukwila, City of Burien, City of ScaTac or any other governmental agency before the applicant can utilize the sewer service which is the subject of this Certificate. 4. If the District or the applicant must extend the District's sewer system to provide sewer service to the Property, the District or applicant may be required to obtain from the appropriate governmental agency the necessary permits, approvals and authorizations. In addition, the governmental agency may establish requirements that must be satisfied as a condition of granting any such pemrits, approvals or authorizations, which may make impractical or impossible the provision of sewer services to the Property. 5. Application for and possible provision of sewer service to the Property shall be subject to and conditioned upon availability of sewer service to the Property at the time of such application, and compliance with federal, state local and District laws, ordinances, policies, and/or regulations in effect at the time ofsuch application. I acknowledge that I have received the Cert(Jl cele ofSewerAvailability/NonAvailability mid this dinacltnrent, andfully understap he terms and conditions herein. Applicant's Signature • Date Untitled Page • • General/Specialty Contractor A business registered as a construction contractor with LEtI to perform construction work within the scope of its specialty. A General or Specialty construction Contractor must maintain a surety bond or assignment of account and carry general liability insurance. Business and Licensing Information Name Phone Address Suite/Apt. City State Zip County Business Type Parent Company SPECTRUM ENTERPRISES LLC 2535394766 9810 48TH AVENUE EAST TACOMA WA 98446 PIERCE LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY UBI No. Status License No. License Type Effective Date Expiration Date Suspend Date Previous License Next License Associated License Specialty 1 Specialty 2 602207379 ACTIVE SPECTEL968MA CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR 7/1/2004 7/1/2010 GENERAL UNUSED Business Owner Information Name Role Effective Date Expiration Date PLATT, STEVEN PARTNER/MEMBER 07/01/2004 Bond Amount Bond Information Bond Bond Company Name Bond Account Number Effective Date Expiration Date Cancel Date Impaired Date Bond Amount Received Date 1 DEVELOPERS SURETY at INDEM CO 543065C 07/01/2004 Until Cancelled $12,000.00 07/01/2004 Insurance Information Page 1 of 2 Insurance Company NameDate Policy Number Effective Expiration Date Cancel Date Impaired Date Amount Received Date 5 MARKEL AMERICAN INS CO 8521 RS0048330 07/01 /2007 07/01/2009 $1,000,000.00 06/24/2008 4 MAINS WAC460189 07/01/200707/01/2008 $1,000,000.0006/29/2007 3 CORNHUSKER WAC460189 07/01 /2006 07/01/2007 $1,000,000.00 06/08/2006 http s : //fortress. w a. gov/lni/bbip/D etai 1. aspx?License=SPECTEL968MA 08/25/2008